13 214001 4800000492 CH2 Fac SPC 040001 - 02

Document Submittal Form
Document 13-214001-4800000492-CH2-
Contractor Jacobs
submittal no. FAC-SPC-040001_02
Contract no. 4800000492 Date 29 May 2023
To PMC AECOM
Rev
Document no. Type Description Action required
no.
4800000492/000 – BOOK 5 – Approval Comments
FACADES - CLUSTER 4 UPPER
13-214001-4800000492-
SPC UPSCALE RESORT 02
CH2-FAC-SPC-040001 Information Other
SPECIFICATION – 1 BED & 2 BED
VILLAS - IFC PACKAGE
Contractor authorized signatory

Name Ruba Odeh Date 29 May 2023
Signature
PMC’s comments
Exception as noted revise

No exception taken Revise and resubmit
Status code and resubmit for record
Rejected Review not required Issued for Construction
Engineer’s
Date
name
Signature
Received by Contractor
Name Date
Signature
COM-FRM-000019 Rev 0 Page 1 of 1

September 2019
SPECIFICATION
4800000492/000 – BOOK 5 – FACADES
CLUSTER 4 UPPER UPSCALE RESORT
1B & 2B VILLAS SPECIFICATION
STAGE 3D- TENDERING AND IFC PACKAGE
13-214001-4800000492-CH2-FAC-SPC-040001 Rev 02, May 2023
©NEOM [2023]. All rights reserved.
4
Document history
Revision code Description of changes Purpose of issue Date
Stage 3D Tendering & IFC Issued for 31.01.2023

Rev 01
Construction
Rev 02 Stage 3D Tendering & IFC Issued for

Construction 29.05.2023
Document approval
Prepared by Reviewed by Approved by

Name Pravin Salunkhe Marina Kindelan Marina Kindelan
Job Title Façade Engineer Façade Associate Façade Associate

Director Director
SECTION 01 30 50 – FAÇADE ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS
DOCUMENT CODE: 13-214001-4800000492-CH2-FAC-SPC-040001 REVISION CODE: 02 PAGE 2 OF 18
©NEOM [2023]. All rights reserved

Contents
1. 01 30 50 FAÇADE ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENT

2. 01 40 50 FAÇADE QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
3. 03 49 00 GLASS FIBRE REINFORCED CONCRETE
4. 05 12 10 FAÇADE STRUCTURAL FRAMING
5. 07 21 00 FAÇADE THERMAL INSULATION
6. 07 42 13 METAL CLADDING AND SCREEN SYSTEM
7. 07 44 50 CEMENT PARTICLE BOARD
8. 07 93 00 FAÇADE SEALANT
9. 08 11 16 FAÇADE GLAZED DOOR SYSTEMS
10. 08 44 13 GLAZED ALUMINIUM CURTAIN WALL
11. 08 45 13 STRUCTURED POLYCARBONATE PANEL
12. 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOW SYSTEM
13. 08 81 23 FAÇADE GLAZING
14. 08 90 00 ARCHITECTURAL LOUVERS AND VENTS
15. APPENDIX A
16. APPENDIX B
17. APPENDIX C

Contents
FAÇADE ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS

1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 RELEVANT DOCUMENTATIONS
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
1.4 DEFINITIONS
2 PRODUCTS
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 KICK OFF MEETING
3.2 PROGRESS MEETING
3.3 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
3.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01 30 50 Facade Administration Requirements
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Description
The Façade administration section for the proper coordination and completion of work
including the following:
1. Progress meetings.
2. Submittals for review and information.
3. Submittals for project closeout.
4. Submittal procedures.
B. Related Sections
1. 01 00 00_General Requirements
a. 01 40 50_Facade Quality Requirements
2. 03 00 00 Concrete
a. 03 49 00_Glass Fibre Reinforced Concrete
3. 05 00 00 - METALS MANUFACTURERS
a. 05 12 10_ Façade Structural Framing
4. 07 00 00 _ THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
a. 07 21 00_ Facade Thermal Insulation
b. 07 42 13_ Metal cladding and screen system
c. 07 44 50_Cement Particle Board
d. 07 93 00_ Facade Sealants
5. 08 00 00 _ OPENINGS MANUFACTURERS
a. 08 11 16_Facade Glazed Door Systems
b. 08 44 13_Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall
c. 08 45 13_Structured Polycarbonate Panel
d. 08 51 13_Aluminium Windows System
e. 08 81 23_Facade Glazing
f. 08 90 00_Architectural Louvers & Vents
6. APPENDICES
a. Appendix A_ System Writeup
b. Appendix B_ Glazing
c. Appendix C_Building Movement and Construction Tolerances
This specification shall be read in conjunction with any other tender documents including but not limited
to:
A. Architectural Tender Drawings and Specifications.

B. Structural Tender Drawings and Specifications.
C. Façade Engineering Drawings.
D. MEP Drawings and Specifications.
E. Acoustics Drawings and Specifications.
F. Building Maintenance and Access Tender Drawings and Specifications.

G. Security Design Documentation.
H. Interior Design Documentation.
I. Fire (FLS) Design Documentation.
J. Lighting and Signage Design Documentation.
K. Branded apartments, Service apartment and Hotel brand guidelines.
L. Saudi Building Code.
M. NEOM Requirements/Guidelines.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
A. KSA: Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.

B. ISO: International Organization for Standardization.
C. CAD: Computer-aided design.
D. PDF: Portable document format.
E. ICE: Institution of Civil Engineers
F. IStructE: Institution of Structural Engineers.
G. OMM: Operation and Maintenance Manual.
H. GFRC: Glass Fibre Reinforced Concrete.
I. MEP: Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing.
J. OITC: Outdoor-indoor transmission class.
K. QA: Quality Assurance.
L. QC: Quality Control.
M. DLP: Defect liability period.
N. NCR: Non-conformance report.
O. FLS - Fire life safety.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Main Contractor: Contractor appointed by client to conduct the construction works.

B. Façade Sub-Contractor: Contractor appointed by Main Contractor to coordinate, design,
engineer, test, attain approvals, procure, fabricate, deliver and install the façade system
works.
C. Façade Specialist Sub-Contractor: Contractor appointed by Main Contractor to coordinate,
design, engineer, test, attain approvals, procure, fabricate, deliver and install the specialist
façade system works, such as stone, GFRC, Coral stone, Render finish system and any
other systems as described in the documentation.
D. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and
after execution of the Work to evaluate those actual products incorporated into the Work
and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager.
E. Defect liability period (DLP): it is a set period of time after the construction of the project has
been completed, during which the Main Contractor and its Sub-Contractors have the right
and must return to the site to remedy any defects. These defects must be put right by the
Contractor at the Contractor's own expense.

F. Visual Mock-ups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mock-ups are
constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination,
testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate
compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mock-ups are not Samples. Unless
otherwise indicated, approved mock-ups establish the standard by which the Work will be
judged.
G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for
installation of the Work and for completed Work.
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTED MANUFACTURERs
A. Manufacturers used for this project must conform to the NEOM Approved Vendor’s List –
NEOM-NEN-MAN-002_LST01_01.00
2.2 MANDATORY MATERIALS
B. Comply with Local Content and Government Procurement Authority requirements that are
applicable.
C. Refer to NEOM letter 00-000000-000000000-NEO-CPM-MEM-000001 - Implementation of
Mandatory Material List
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 KICK OFF MEETING
D. Main Contractor shall oversee the planning and organization of façade kick off meeting.
Meeting can be conducted physically or online, and all attendees shall be informed
minimum 48 hours (Two days) prior to meeting date.
E. The following list of attendees shall be available for kick off meeting to ensure successful
coordination works. Attendees need to confirm their presence maximum 24 hours (one day)
prior to meeting date:
1. Client or Client's representative.
2. Architect and Architect’s Representative.
3. Main Contractor.
4. Façade Consultant.
5. Relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and/or Façade Specialist Sub-contractor.

F. Minimum Objective of Kick off meeting:
1. Introduction to project team.
2. Share project team contact details.
3. Establish
4. Alignment in document referencing.
5. Set program for submission & review of construction documents. Allowance for
resubmission & review, preparation of documents shall be made.
6. Staging of reviews.
7. Alignment of review Status.
8. Establish the procedure request for inspection, remedial and closing off installation.
9. Establish requirements of mock-ups, sample submittals, and benchmarks.
10. Any other items.


3.2 PROGRESS MEETING
A. Main Contractor shall oversee the planning and organization of façade workshop meetings.
Consistent meetings shall be scheduled every 2 weeks, as maximum time interval, aligned
with an agenda for meeting objectives to be shared with all participants. Meetings can be
conducted physically or online, and all attendees shall be informed minimum 48 hours (two
days) prior to meeting date.
B. The following list of attendees shall be available for workshop meetings to ensure successful
coordination works. Attendees need to confirm their presence maximum 24 hours (one day)
prior to meeting date:
1. Client or Client's representative.
2. Architect and Architect’s Representative.
3. Main Contractor.
4. Façade Consultant.
5. Specialist Sub-Contractor.
6. Relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and/or Façade Specialist Sub-contractor.
7. Specialist Trades.
C. The following needs to be provided 2 days before meeting:
1. Outstanding Non-conformance items, as listed in Non-conformance (Report NCR).
a. Upcoming Submission for the two (2) following weeks.
b. Schedules for Benchmarks and mock-ups.
c. RFI Trackers and outstanding RFIs for resolution during meeting.
D. Agenda:
1. Main Contractor shall issue a meeting agenda to all participants minimum 48 hours
(two days) prior to meeting date. The meeting agenda shall include main discussion
items between participant in and a timely ordered schedule, and covers the minimum
of:
a. Review minutes of previous meetings.
b. Review of Work progress.
c. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
d. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.
e. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
f. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
g. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
h. Other business relating to Work.
2. All meeting participants shall receive coordination drawings, to be presented and

discussed during the façade workshop meeting, minimum 48 hours (Two days) prior
to meeting date.
3. Minutes to be recorded and copies distributed after meeting to all participants, and
those affected by decisions made.
4. Additional meetings to be arranged as required to ensure project progress is

maintained.
E. SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

1. Façade engineering submittals shall comply and be aligned with the requirements
listed in Section 01 40 50 - Façade Quality Requirements and NEOM-NEN-SCH-002
Schedule Q - Quality Requirements for Contractors with regards to the façade
systems, materials, accessories, and any other relevant item.
The facade contractor is required to provide a detailed list of any non-compliances

with the specifications outlined in the tender document. Any items that have not been
specifically flagged or addressed in the tender should be assumed to be compliant.
Failure to meet the specifications or address any issues may result in disqualification
from the contract.
2. Façade System concept drawings:

a. For façade systems concept approval, Relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and/or
Façade Specialist Sub-contractor shall submit a package of façade concept system
drawings capturing the fundamental design principles for the proposed façade
systems, for Façade Consultant’s review and approval.
b. The first package of façade concept system drawings shall be received no later than
two weeks from the kick-off meeting.
c. The first package of façade concept system drawings shall be substantiated by a
preliminary structural calculation set (Moment of inertia calculation).
d. The first façade system concept drawings shall include General Notes. The General
Notes shall be updated and resubmitted along with every submission, and shall
include the below listed information, as a minimum:
1) Design codes.
2) Design criteria such as:
- Design stresses.
- Deflection criteria.
- Thermal performance.
- Fire rating.
- Acoustic rating.
3) Detailed description of all façade materials with grades, finishes &
thickness.
4) Movement allowances, tolerances and adjustments.
5) Façade component full technical details.
6) Material codes, part schedules (hardware, fixings, gaskets, etc.).
7) Glazing performance, glazing build ups including coating.
3. Shop Drawings Package:

a. Upon approval of the façade concept system drawings (Status A or B), a complete
façade detailed drawing package shall be submitted, with substantiating structural
calculations.
1) Shop drawings packages submitted without structural calculations
documents will be rejected Status C without review.
2) In the case of the use of a trademarked product prior to the first
submission, relevant drawings and their supporting calculations shall
be endorsed by their respective specialist manufacturer to verify
suitability of material usage in proposed design and confirm their
back-to-back warranty for the given application. Such items include
typical and non-typical use of:
- Silicones,
- Anchors,
- Embeds,
- All other trademarked products and materials.
3) Detailed shop drawings package shall include and represent all
aspects of the proposed façade systems including:
- Overall elevations, plans and sections, with partial plans, section
call outs. With reference to the following as a minimum:

o Wind load on building / Wind load zones.
o Façade cladding system types.
o Acoustic performance / associated glass build-up.
o Unit numbering systems.
o Settings of Operable sashes.
o modulation and setting out.
o Emergency egress requirements.
o Minimum movement and seismic joint locations.
o Visible MEP items.
- Complex geometries shall be analysed and verified using 3D
(three Dimensional) studies, assemblies and interfaces shall be
developed where required.
- Third-party Specialist Façade Checking Engineer shall submit and
verify a relevant resume and certificate of chartership.
- System detailed shop drawings shall be developed and submitted
in 1:2 and 1:5 scale. Details include and are not limited to the
following:
o Partition wall interfaces of core and shell buildings.
o Vertical and horizontal details of all typical and non-typical
conditions, showing the actual proposed configuration with all
attachments and interfaces.
o Sequence diagrams.
o Details of fabrication, assembly, installation and fixing
anchorage of the façade system.
o Complex details and interfaces in 3D illustrations.
o Coordinated MEP Interface details.
- Façade Consultant has the right to request additional plans,
sections, details, views, isometric drawings, etc. for better
understanding of the proposed solution.
- All drawings shall be clearly cross-referenced “parent to child” and
“child to parent”.
- All drawings shall be fully coordinated with other trades, any
uncoordinated interfaces with other trades may be rejected.
- All details shall be fully coordinated with engineering justification
as well as thermal performance.
- All details shall be full dimensioned and annotated.
- All drawings shall be issued in .dwg (CAD) format, and .pdf (PDF)
formatted for legible printing in A3 paper size.
- All drawings to allow space for Architect and Façade Consultant
review stamps.
- Contract Documents shall not be used to re-create shop drawings.
- Shop Drawings shall indicate the following information:
o Façade geometry.
➢ Base building tolerance values and line illustrating the
extents of stated tolerance.
o Façade movement allowance values.
o Expansion joint movement allowance values.
o Weld types.
o Fastener types, grade, edge distances, centres, embedment
depths, shimming limits, etc.
o Material grades, thicknesses, finishes, etc.
o All seen and critical dimensions.
o Structural sealant bites,
o Differentiate between shop and field fabrication.
o Reference to the relevant calculation package.
o Bio metallic separator where required.
4. Calculations:

a. All submitted façade system drawing packages shall be supported by structural
calculations and verifications. Shop drawings and its associated calculations shall be
provided concurrently. Calculations with no shop drawings, and vice versa, results in
immediate rejection of submission.
b. The submitted calculations must sufficiently and adequately demonstrate that the
Relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and/or Façade Specialist Sub-contractor’s
proposed systems meet the structural and performance criteria set out in this
specification.
c. Calculations shall describe the software and its version used to perform the analysis.
d. In case Façade Subcontractor meets various requirements contradicting one another,
the façade contractor shall contact the design team (and Façade Consultant) for
clarification.
e. In case of parallel requirements sourced from different documents/codes/standards,
the most onerous requirement shall be followed.
f. The calculations must be documented in a sequential, and detailed method to allow
clarity and understanding of how the results have been derived.
g. Calculations shall be developed in a clear and structured formatting.
h. Revised calculation documents shall clearly identify all changes made since previous
submission.
i. Façade Consultant has the right to request additional calculations and engineering
checks where necessary.
j. Each structural calculation document shall be reviewed and approved by Façade
Consultant and other relevant parties. Calculation submittal shall include the following
information, as a minimum:
1) Wind pressure calculations. Where wind tunnel test is not available
or required.
2) Justification of movement allowance within the system. Concept

design proposal shall be based on Building movement values from
Structural Engineer. All movements shall be confirmed by the Main
Contractor at the onset of construction. Differential movements to be
calculated and indicated where required to confirm if proposed
system is adequate. Calculations shall include as a minimum:
- Calculations for horizontal and vertical movement incorporating
the effects of:
o Thermal expansion/contraction.
o Inter-story drift.
o Fabrication tolerance,
o Live load deflection,
o Vertical displacement due to interstudy drift.
o Seismic load or movement.
o Column shortening.
o Any movement at expansion joints.
o Wind load deflection.
o Superimposed dead load deflection.
o Diagrams of each typical façade condition in design, maximum
opening and maximum closing conditions.
3) Cast-in, embed anchors and shimming limits calculations shall be

submitted. To be issued as a high priority within two weeks of
contract award. Calculations must include a derivation of the loads
applied. Embeds shall take into consideration concreting tolerances,
relevant load offsets, bearing distance, as a minimum.
4) System calculations. Including checks and verification of all structural

elements, such as all framing members, all brackets, all anchors, all
fixings, all connector pieces, all extrusions, all glasses, all structural

sealants, all special elements, etc. Including the connections and
interfaces of these elements. Each system calculation package
should contain the following sections as a minimum:
- Specified Design Criteria.
- List of codes used excerpts where necessary.
- Reference number of the relevant shop drawings and material
submittals.
- Reference of engineering software used.
- Excerpt of relevant elevation, plan, section, and detail drawings.
Including dimensions, mark-ups of acting force locations,
eccentricities, and restraints.
- All coefficients and variables used shall be clearly described and
explained.
- Suppliers’ documents, such as product data sheets, supplier's
calculations, suppliers written acceptance of the application, etc.
- Movement and concrete tolerance to be accounted for, for the
relevant system.
- Calculations shall be set out to follow load path, and load transfer
path diagrams.
- All values derived and adopted within the calculations shall be
referenced.
- Diagrams of relevant details, specific for the calculation in
question, shall be dimensioned with all set out and offsets for load
application and resistance.
- All typical, worst case and non-typical conditions.
- High resolution computer model output diagrams, showing
ultimate factor of safety, actual / allowable stress, and deflection
ratios.
- Dimensioned die drawings with structural properties.
- Page numbering.
- Façade acoustic calculations. Testing instead of calculation is
preferred and can be opted for.
- Checks of non-structural elements. Where inadequate stiffness,
fixation, twist, etc., could cause undesired visual effects.
- Secondary steel support calculations. Including connection
design.
- U-value calculations and condensation checks. Where computer
simulation software is used provide calibration check. U-value
calculations shall prove compliance of the system’s assembly,
including all thermal bridge conditions (example: perimeter details,
corners, localized bracket penetrating thermal line).
5. Material submissions:
a. Material submissions and relevant sample submissions shall be submitted together in
one submittal.
b. Material submissions will be for materials of identical type, quality, origin,
manufacturer, surface treatment, etc., to that of the proposed project materials.
c. Satisfactory material submittals approval shall be done prior to the final approval of the
system drawings and calculations.
d. Material submission shall include as a minimum:
e. Extracts from relevant specification(s).
1) Specification(s) compliance statement.
2) Detail drawings showing locations of material(s).
3) Sample warranty, or back-to-back warranties, as required by the
project specification.
4) Details of product manufacturer (ISO certifications).
5) Product technical data sheets showing compliance to specification(s)
requirements.

6) Products covered by the general warranty do not require individual
warranties; see specification section relating to warranties and
service life for specific requirements.
7) Statement of project service life, as required by the project
specification.
8) See specification section relating to warranties and service life for
specific requirements.
9) Additional information should be included as required by the specific
material. Including but not limited to:
10) Product testing data as required supporting specification compliance.
11) Sample mill certificates.
12) Manufacturing standards.
13) Compatibility statements.
14) Local (country/ State / Province) Authority approval and testing
certification.
15) Where catalogue pages are included containing multiple products the
relevant sections should be highlighted or irrelevant sections
obscured or removed, keeping the submission concise. Volumes of
irrelevant submittals pages will be grounds for submission rejection.
6. Benchmark Sample Submission:

a. Sample submissions shall be accompanied by the relevant material submission.
b. All samples submitted will be identical in type, quality, origin, manufacturer, surface
treatment, etc., to that of the proposed project materials and items.
c. Final approval of system drawings and calculations may be withheld until satisfactory
samples have been submitted and approved.
d. Unless otherwise requested, a minimum of 3 samples shall be submitted for review to
consultants. Upon approval of the material submission and benchmark sample
review. One approved sample shall be return to site for benchmark control (see item 5
below). The other approved sample shall be sent to Façade Sub-Contractor’s
facilities. The final approved sample shall be kept with the Architect at the Architect’s
office.
e. Approved samples will be retained in a sample room on site until final handover.
These samples will be used a as control samples when inspecting the project works.
Samples cannot be incorporated in the contract works.
f. The Client may request further samples above the number and sizes indicated until
the proposed element or material meets their requirements. No additional costs shall
be charged to Client for such additional samples.
g. Further samples above the indicated number and size as requested, shall be
provided free of charge, for material testing or performance testing purposes.
7. Method statements:
a. The method statement shall be entirely project specific and describe the activities and
methods proposed to be used. Where possible is shall include illustrations, diagrams,
and pictures, where possible.
b. It is preferable that individual method statements for each system/process are
submitted.
c. The method statements shall include but not be limited to the following:
1) Off-site fabrication, manufacture, and testing.
2) Off-site integration of works by others (Façade Access equipment for
example).
3) Methods of handling, and transportation including storage.
4) Site organization.
5) Construction and installation sequences.
6) Necessary coordination items with other trades.
7) Temporary works.
8) Access proposals.

9) Off-site quality control procedures.
10) On-site quality control procedures.
11) Site testing and commissioning.
12) Protection.
13) Removal of excess sealant from glazing and metal cladding.
14) Touch-up and repair methods.
15) Final cleaning.
16) Inspection test plans.
17) Inspection checklists.
18) Re-glazing and cladding replacement.
d. Main Contractor and his relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and/or Façade Specialist
Sub-contractor shall put in place a procedure of joint inspection, rejection/acceptance
of base structure or cast-in placement.
e. Main Contractor and his relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and/or Façade Specialist
Sub-contractor shall put in place procedure for remedial works approval to allow
rectification works to be reviewed and approved prior to continuation of other trades.
Such procedures shall be submitted for Consultant’s approval prior to
commencement of works.
3.3 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. As built drawings:
1. All approved changes and minor deviations occurring during construction that took
place after the shop drawings approvals shall be recorded on a control set of
documentation and saved on site with Main Contractor and the relevant Façade Sub-
Contractor and/or Façade Specialist Sub-contractor. These changes and deviations
shall be updated, and a full set has to be submitted before hand-over as "as-built
drawing", in .pdf (PDF) and .dwg (CAD) format. All changes shall be clouded and
reference with a tracking log clarifying reason for change. Final handover will not be
possible without submitted as-built drawings, and the accuracy of these will be
checked during hand-over.
B. Quality Assurance Manual:
A high level of quality checking shall be demonstrated from the initiation till the project’s
competition to ensure consistent output quality and100% elimination of unsuitable, faulty,
damaged, low-grade materials and structures. To avoid abortive work, it is essential that
such production problems are identified, and materials rejected in time and promptly
rectified or replaced. Any loss arising from sub-standard product arriving to site or being
installed will be at the risk of the Main Contractor and the relevant Façade Sub-Contractor
and/or Façade Specialist Sub-contractor.
1. The Quality Assurance Manual may partially consist of existing quality management
documentation but is required to be project specific.
2. The Quality Assurance Manual shall be adhered to for the whole duration of the
project works. Any change to it shall meet prior approval of the revised Quality
Assurance Manual submission.
3. At the beginning of the design phase, the Quality Assurance Manual shall be
produced and shall include the following:
a. Quality Manager name.
b. Chart of design process showing how changes and comments will be addressed and
the documents checked before resubmission. Name of the checker.
c. Team structure of factory and site QA/QC team.
d. List of incoming materials checking procedures, with their frequency.
e. Schedule of manufacturing checking procedures.

f. Verification and record keeping procedure of quality check and test certificates from
suppliers (e.g., Mill certificates, heat soak testing records).
g. Material testing procedures and their frequency.
h. Site installation checking procedure.
i. Storage, handling, packaging, transport, and protection requirements.
j. Fabrication and erection tolerances schedule.
k. Alignment checking procedures.
l. Calibration methods and records.
m. Site testing program proposed third party and supplier representative test witnesses.
n. Rejection and re-working procedures.
o. Re-inspection procedures.
p. Record keeping methods and policy.
q. Procedure for tracking panels showing co-relationship between panel numbers and
assembly stage (glazing sealant batch etc.) tracking.
r. Panel numbering in elevation.
s. Checklists register and examples of each checklist.
4. The Main Contractor and the relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and/or Façade
Specialist Sub-contractor shall be aware note that the specified standard of finish and
alignment in terms of workmanship will be required. The quality and appearance,
including reflection from all glazed and panelled surfaces, shall be consistent across
a type.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manual (OMM):
1. An OMM including clear instructions and explanation on all the necessary

maintenance and the correct operation methods of the contract works shall be
submitted. Allow for training the Building Operator's personnel / Client's
Representative.
2. Submit at least 8 weeks prior to planned practical handover.
3. Language shall be in English or bilingual with a second language selected by the

Client.
4. Shall include a clear description of the system principles and their construction
method.
5. Shall include a system-by-system description of operation and maintenance

requirements and methods, including:
a. Frequency of inspection and Inspection principles.
b. Possible failure scenarios and their rectification.
c. Planned maintenance requirements, methods, and frequency.
d. Sequence diagrams and photos showing correct methods of the most common
operation and maintenance practices, such as reglazing, changing a cladding
element, correct handling of glass, seal integrity checks and repair methods, re-
touching scratched paint finish, removing construction stain from glass, adjustment of
operable vent hardware, light replacement, check of smoke vents, etc.
e. For coatings and finishes that may deteriorate over time, such as paint coats, slip-
resistance coating, etc., issue a detailed maintenance schedule to ensure the required
performance is maintained.
f. Relevant excerpts of the as-built drawings with mark-ups of procedures where
applicable.
g. List of relevant as-built drawing numbers, listed separately at each procedure.
h. Details of possible scenarios of fixing attachments or interfacing the contract works at
a later stage during partial internal reconstruction, installation of common tenant add-
ons or entire internal fit-out for core and shell buildings. The details shall contain the
following as a minimum and shall be accompanied by notes or diagrams showing

incorrect and forbidden methods, clearly identified by crossed over. Highlight possible
and forbidden drill fixing locations, call out locations of movement allowance
requirements, name air seals to be maintained in integrity.
1) Fixing of curtain rails, pelmets, blind rails.
2) Partition wall interfaces.
3) Installation or change of floor finish.
4) Interface with newly constructed raised floor.
5) Method and location of hanging decoration from lobby skylights.
6) Any other possible interface works.
6. Loading restrictions and limitations, such as maximum traffic allowance for overhead
glazing, maximum weight of suspended decoration to be hung from skylight
steelwork, etc.
7. Information of all materials and components used, including:

a. Brand name and product code.
b. Manufacturer's name.
c. Trader, local distributor's contact details.
d. If applied by others, relevant Sub-Contractor's contact details.
e. Reference used to identify the material component on the detail drawings.
8. List of approved and forbidden cleaning materials and equipment, brand name and
manufacturer of approved materials and consumables.
9. Collection of warranties and indemnity certificates, with terms and conditions;

maintenance period confirmations from suppliers and register list of length of such
periods for each item.
10. Manufacturer's technical literature where available.
11. Register list of available design and procurement documentation handed over to the
Client, such as as-built drawings, test certificates, unit number labelling and
identification layout drawings, etc.
12. Provide Inventory of spare materials.
13. Provide detailed information like name, contact details and signature of the operation
personnel Client representatives who attended the relevant Façade Sub-Contractor
and/or Façade Specialist Sub-contractor 's OMM Training, name and contact details
of the representative who conducted the training.
D. Maintenance materials:
1. Façade components spare parts stock shall be delivered to site and stored as
instructed by the Client Building Operator two weeks prior to date of practical
completion.
2. Parts storage and handling shall be as manufacturer’s instructions. All parts shall be
protected by approved wrapping, stored in crates and labelled with name, sizing,
finish type, etc.
3. These parts shall not be used for replacement of glass and cladding damaged prior
to the end of the defect’s liability period DLP.
4. Inventory shall be submitted for approval.
5. Material replacement strategy shall be provided in a method statement.

E. Warranties:
1. Manufacturer warranties documents shall be submitted, ensure forms have been

completed in Client's name and registered with manufacturer.
2. System warranties & Installer warranties shall be submitted.

F. Glass risk assessment as per CIRIA 0632 and CE marking wherever applicable.
G. Embodied carbon assessment and EPD’s.
3.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Façade submittals shall be transmitted with a copy of approved submittal form.

B. Façade Submittals shall be delivered to the appointed Façade Consultant at the relevant
working team business address.
C. Electronic documents (soft copy):
1. Submit one electronic copy in .pdf PDF format; an electronically marked up file will
be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible files will be
rejected.
D. Samples:
1. Submit 3 pieces.
2. Samples shall be submitted with relevant material submission.

E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project and coordinate submission of related items.
F. Allow for a minimum of 10 (ten)working days review period excluding delivery time to and
from the Main Contractor, for every submittal to be reviewed by Façade Consultant.
G. Identify variations from contract documents and product or system limitations that may be
detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
H. Allow for pace on the submittal documents for Façade Consultant and Architect review
stamps.
I. Revised submittals shall bear similar reference number to initial submission with updated
revision.
J. Revised submittal shall include a clear identification of all changes made since previous
submission. Changes to be tracked.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 40 50 – FAÇADE QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Contents
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
1.4 DEFINITIONS
1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.6 LOCAL REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.7 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
1.8 FAÇADE DESIGN CRITERIA
1.9 MATERIAL AND ACCESSORIES
1.10 TRACEBILITY
1.11 INSPECTION AND TESTING
1.12 DESIGN LIFE AND WARRANTY
2 PRODUCTS ( NOT USED )
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SITE CONDITIONS
3.2 EXAMINATION
3.3 WORKMANSHIP
3.4 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

01 40 50 Facade Quality Requirements
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Description
This section documents the overall quality requirements for façade systems.
B. Related Sections
1. 01 00 00 _ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
a. 01 30 50_Facade Administration Requirements
6. APPENDICES
1.2 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION / DESIGN RESPONSIBILITIES

A. This facade package – along with the associated project documentation - indicates the
design intent, the required /desired shape, geometry, orientation and appearance of the
visible components and the minimum acceptable standard to which the installation must be
designed, tested, fabricated, and installed.
B. The contractor will continue the design process to arrive at a fully developed design against
which the project can be built.
C. As performance-based documents, this package does not provide full details of the proposed
systems. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to inform itself of the full extent and detailing
of the Works and make all necessary monetary and time allowances.
D. The Specification is divided into sections for convenience. All parts of the Specification are
mandatory, including the Appendices.
E. Should conflicting details be identified, they are to be referred to the Employers
Representative for verification.
F. Drawings which accompany this specification are deemed to be for-intent purposes only.
Where dimensions are provided, these are to be considered as required-for-aesthetic
reasons where dimensions are not provided the drawings must not be scaled.
G. The Contractor can provide proposals which vary from those detailed within the façade intent

drawings as long as these proposals represent the same or higher quality, do not deviate
from the architectural intent and the minimum performance requirements noted within this
specification, subject to approval from the client's representative.
to:
M. NEOM Requirements/Guidelines.
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS
B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.
C. AAMA: American Aluminium Manufacturers Association.
D. AC: Air conditioning.
E. AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction.
F. ASCE: American Society of Civil Engineers.
G. ASNT: American Society for Non-destructive Testing.
H. BoH: Back of house.
I. BMU: Building maintenance unit.
J. BS: British Standard.
K. BS EN: British Standard European Standard.
L. EAD: European Assessment Documents.
M. FLS - Fire life safety.
N. IBC: International Building Code.
O. GFRC: Glass Fibre Reinforced Concrete.
P. MEP: Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing.
Q. NCR: Non-conformance report.

R. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
S. OITC: Outdoor-indoor transmission class.
T. STC: Sound transmission class.
U. PCN: Personnel Certification in Non-Destructive Testing.
V. SBC: Saudi Building Code
W. UBC: United Building Code.
X. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers.
Y. LEED - Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Main Contractor: Contractor appointed by client to conduct the construction works.
B. Façade Sub-Contractor: Contractor appointed by Main Contractor to coordinate, design,
engineer, test, attain approvals, procure, fabricate, deliver and install the façade system
works.
C. Façade Specialist Sub-Contractor: Contractor appointed by Main Contractor to coordinate,
design, engineer, test, attain approvals, procure, fabricate, deliver and install the specialist
façade system works, such as stone, GFRC.
D. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and
after execution of the Work to evaluate those actual products incorporated into the Work
and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager.
E. Defect liability period (DLP): it is a set period of time after the construction of the project has
been completed, during which the Main Contractor and its Sub-Contractors have the right
and must return to the site to remedy any defects. These defects must be put right by the
Contractor at the Contractor's own expense.
F. Mock-ups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mock-ups are
constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination,
testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate
compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mock-ups are not Samples. Unless
otherwise indicated, approved mock-ups establish the standard by which the Work will be
judged.
G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for
installation of the Work and for completed Work.
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
The below standards shall be applicable. Where similar requirements are stipulated, most onerous
requirements shall be complied.
A. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
High-Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminium Extrusions and Panels.
B. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary specification, performance requirements and test procedures for
superior performing organic coatings on aluminium extrusions and panels.
C. AAMA 501.2- Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed
Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems

D. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel
E. ASTM A480 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless
and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strips
F. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless-
Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
G. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Sheet and Plate
H. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles, And Tubes
I. ASTM D1929 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics
J. ASTM D2244 - Standard Practice for Calculation of Colour Tolerances and Colour
Differences from Instrumentally Measured Colour Coordinates
K. ASTM D4214 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior
Paint Films
L. ASTM D7091 - Standard Practice for Non-destructive Measurement of Dry Film Thickness
of Nonmagnetic Coatings Applied to Ferrous Metals and Nonmagnetic, Nonconductive
Coatings Applied to Non-Ferrous Metals
M. ASTM E34 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Aluminium and Aluminium-
Base Alloys
N. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2016.
O. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.
P. ASTM E94 - Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination; 2004 (Reapproved 2010).
Q. ASTM E164 - Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of Weldments; 2013.
R. ASTM E165/E165M - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General
Industry; 2012.
S. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across
the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
T. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference;
2014.
U. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference;2000 (Reapproved
2016).
V. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2016.
W. ASTM E488/E488M - Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete
Elements; 2015.
X. ASTM F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, And Studs
Y. ASTM F594 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts
Z. ASTM E695 - Standard Test Method of Measuring Relative Resistance of Wall, Floor, And
Roof Construction to Impact Loading
AA. ASTM E709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing; 2015.
BB. ASTM E716 - Standard Practices for Sampling and Sample Preparation of Aluminium and
Aluminium Alloys for Determination of Chemical Composition by Spectrochemical Analysis

CC. ASTM E966 - Standard Guide for Field Measurement of Airborne Sound Insulation of
Building Facades and Facade Elements; 2010.
DD. ASTM E1332 - Standard Classification for Rating Outdoor-Indoor Sound Attenuation;
2010a.
EE. ASTM E1444/E1444M - Standard Practice for Magnetic Particle Testing
FF. ASTM E2486/E2486M - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Class PB and PI
Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS); 2013.
GG. ASTM F436: Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
HH. ASTM F606: Standard Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical Properties of
Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners, Washers, Direct Tension Indicators, And
Rivets
II. ASTM F844: Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for
General Use
JJ. ASTM F959: Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension
Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners, Inch and Metric Series
KK. ASTM F1470: Standard Practice for Fastener Sampling for Specified Mechanical Properties
and Performance Inspection
LL. ASTM F3125: Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts and Assemblies,
Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, Inch Dimensions 120 Ksi and 150 Ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength, And Metric Dimensions 830 MPa and 1040 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength
MM. AISC 348 – Specification for structural joints using high strength bolts
NN. AISC 360 – Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings
OO. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings
PP. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010, with 2013
Supplements and Errata.
QQ. ASHRAE 90.1 Users Manual.
RR. Aluminium Design Manual.
SS. UBC - Uniform building code; 1997.
TT. BS 3692: ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts. Specification
UU. BS 4190: ISO Metric Black Hexagon Bolts, Screws and Nuts. Specification (British
Standard)
VV. BS 4320: Specification for metal washers for general engineering purposes. Metric series
WW. BS 4464: Specification for Spring Washers for General Engineering and Automobile
Purposes. Metric Series (British Standard)
XX. BS 4933: Specification for ISO Metric Black Cup and Countersunk Head Bolts and Screws
with Hexagon Nuts (British Standard)
YY. BS 7543 - Guide to durability of buildings and building elements, products and components;
2015.
ZZ. BS 8414:2015 Fire performance of external cladding systems.
AAA. BS 8539 - Code of practice for the selection and installation of post-installed anchors in
concrete and masonry
BBB. BS 6001: Sampling Procedures for Inspection by Attributes. Sampling Schemes Indexed
by Acceptance Quality Limit (AQL) For Lot-By-Lot Inspection (British Standard)
CCC. BS 7543: Guide to durability of buildings and building elements, products and components

DDD. BS EN 755 - Aluminium and Aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles
EEE. BS EN 1999-1-4 - Eurocode 9. Design of Aluminium structures. Cold-formed structural
sheeting; 2007+A1:2011.
FFF. BS EN 14399-1: High-strength structural bolting assemblies for preloading
GGG. BS EN 62275 - Cable management systems. Cable ties for electrical installations
HHH. BS EN 12020 - Aluminium and Aluminium alloys - Extruded precision profiles in alloys EN
AW-6060 and EN AW-6063 - Part 1: Technical conditions for inspection and delivery
III. BS EN 12600 - Glass in building. Pendulum test. Impact test method and classification for
flat glass
JJJ. BS EN 13501 - Fire classification of construction products and building elements; BS EN
13501.
KKK. BS EN 62305-1 - Protection against lightning. General principles; 2011.
LLL. BS EN 62305-2 - Protection against lightning. Risk management; 2012.
MMM. BS EN 62305-3 - Protection against lightning. Physical damage to structures and life
hazard; 2011.
NNN. BS EN 62305-4 - Protection against lightning. Electrical and electronic systems within
structures; 2011.
OOO. BS EN ISO 3506 - Mechanical properties of corrosion-resistant stainless-steel fasteners.
Bolts, screws and studs
PPP. BS EN ISO 4032: Hexagon regular nuts (style 1). Product grades A and B
QQQ. BS EN ISO 4033: Hexagon high nuts (style 2). Product grades A and B
RRR. BS EN ISO 6946: Building components and building elements. Thermal resistance and
thermal transmittance. Calculation method; 2007.
SSS. BS EN ISO 10077-2 - Thermal performance of windows, doors and shutters. Calculation of
thermal transmittance. Numerical method for frames; 2012.
TTT. BS EN ISO 10848-1 - Acoustics. Laboratory measurement of the flanking transmission of
airborne and impact sound between adjoining rooms. Frame document; 2006.
UUU. BS EN ISO 10848-2 - Acoustics. Laboratory measurement of the flanking transmission of
airborne and impact sound between adjoining rooms. Application to light elements when
the junction has a small influence; 2006.
VVV. BS EN ISO 10848-4 - Acoustics. Laboratory measurement of the flanking transmission of
airborne and impact sound between adjoining rooms. Application to junctions with at least
one heavy element; 2010.
WWW. BS EN ISO 12631 - Thermal performance of curtain walling. Calculation of thermal
transmittance; 2012.
XXX. BS EN ISO 17025 - General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration
laboratories
YYY. BS EN ISO 2360: Non-Conductive Coatings on Non-Magnetic Electrically Conductive Base
Metals. Measurement of Coating Thickness. Amplitude-Sensitive Eddy-Current Method
(British Standard)
ZZZ. EAD 330232-01-0601 Mechanical fasteners for use in concrete
AAAA. EAD 330008-03-0601 Anchor channels
BBBB. IBC 2009
CCCC. NFPA 251 - Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Resistance of Building Construction and

Materials; 2006.
DDDD. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; NFPA 255.
EEEE. NFPA 257 - Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies; 2012.
FFFF. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics
of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components;
2012.
GGGG. NFPA 780 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems
HHHH. ISO 9001 - Quality Management
IIII. ISO 14001 - Environmental Management
JJJJ. ISO 45001 – Occupational health and safety
KKKK. ISO 9712: Non-destructive testing — Qualification and certification of NDT personnel
LLLL. ISO 12944 - Paints and varnishes: Corrosion protection of steel structures by protective
paint systems — Part 5: Protective paint systems
MMMM. ISO 15686-1 - Buildings and constructed assets -- Service life planning -- Part 1: General
principles and framework; 2011.
NNNN. ISO 17065 - Conformity assessment: Requirements for bodies certifying products,
processes and services
OOOO. ISO 17020 - Conformity assessment — Requirements for the operation of various types
of bodies performing inspection.
PPPP. Local (country/ State / Province )civil defence and building authority guidelines.
QQQQ. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
RRRR. ASTM A 82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
SSSS. ASTM A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
TTTT. ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
UUUU. ASTM A 616 - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for
VVVV. ASTM A 617 - Standard Specification for Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for
WWWW. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-
Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
XXXX. ASTM A 775 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars.
YYYY. ASTM A996 - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for
ZZZZ. ASTM B 370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction.
AAAAA. ASTM C 67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay
Tile.
BBBBB. ASTM C 216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from
Clay or Shale).
CCCCC. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
DDDDD. ASTM C 652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made

From Clay or Shale).
EEEEE. ASTM D 1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or
Expanded Rubber.
FFFFF. ASTM C 1088 - Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made from Clay or
Shale.
GGGGG. ASTM C 216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from
Clay or Shale).
HHHHH. ASTM E 96, “Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials”
IIIII. ASTM C 109, “Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars”
JJJJJ. ASTM D 1475, “Standard Test Method for Density of Liquid Coatings, Inks, and Related
Products”
KKKKK. ASTM C 1549, “Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near
Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer”
LLLLL. ASTM C 1583, “Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Concrete Surfaces and
the Bond Strength or Tensile Strength of Concrete Repair and Overlay Materials by Direct
Tension (Pull-off Method)”
MMMMM.ASTM D 1653, “Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Organic
Coating Films”
NNNNN. ASTM D 2369, “Standard Test Method for Volatile Content of Coatings”
OOOOO. Brick Industry Association (BIA) Technical Notes on Brick Construction 20 - Cleaning
Brickwork.
PPPPP. SBC 201 General
QQQQQ. SBC 302 Structural - Construction
RRRRR. SBC 305 Structures - Masonry Structures
SSSSS. NZS 4297-1998 Engineering design of earth buildings
TTTTT. NZS 4298-1998 Materials and workmanship for earth buildings
UUUUU. NZS 4299 - 1998 Earth buildings not requiring specific design
VVVVV. AS NZS 2699.1-2000 Built-in components for masonry construction Part 1: Wall ties
WWWWW. AS NZS 2699.2-2000 Built-in components for masonry construction Part2:
Connectors and accessories
XXXXX. AS NZS 2699.3-2002 Built-in components for masonry construction Part 3: Lintels and
shelf angles (durability requirements)
YYYYY. NZS 4203:1992 General structural design and design loadings for buildings
ZZZZZ. ASTM-C67 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay
Tile.
AAAAAA. Brick Development Association (BDA) Design Notes
BBBBBB. National House Building Council (NHBC) Movement Joints in Masonry Walls –
Technical Guidance (2016) by
CCCCCC. National House Building Council (NHBC)
DDDDDD. TMS 402/602-16 Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry
Structures
EEEEEE. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 / 602-16 Building Code Requirements for Masonry

Structures
FFFFFF. ACI CODE-530/530.1-13 Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry
GGGGGG. Reference Standard
HHHHHH. ASCE 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
IIIIII. ACI 530-11 Building Code Requirements and Specifications for Masonry
JJJJJJ. Structures
KKKKKK. AS/NZS2699.1:2000 Built-In Components for Masonry Construction Part 1: Wall ties
LLLLLL. AS/NZS2699.2:2000 Built-In Components for Masonry Construction Part 2: Connectors
and Accessories
MMMMMM. AS/NZS2699.3:2000 Built-In Components for Masonry Construction Part 3:
Lintels and Shelf Angles (Durability Requirements)
NNNNNN. AS 3700 Masonry Structures
OOOOOO. BS EN 771-3+A1 Specification for Masonry Units – Part 3: Aggregate concrete
masonry units (Dense and Lightweight Aggregates)
PPPPPP. BS EN 845-1 (2013) Specification for Ancillary Components for Masonry – Part 1: Wall
Ties, Tension Straps, Hangers and Brackets
QQQQQQ. PD 6697: 2019 Recommendations for the design of masonry structures to BS
EN 1996-1-1 and BS EN 1996-2
RRRRRR. BS 5628 Code of Practice for the Use of Masonry
SSSSSS. BS 5268-6.1 BS 5268-6.1: 1996 (Annex B)
TTTTTT. ASTM E1300 Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings
1.7 LOCAL REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. This project is located at a site under the jurisdiction of Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
B. It is the Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor 's responsibility to
ensure that all local regulations are complied with. Including but not limited to:
1. Local (country/ State / Province) civil defence and building authority guidelines.
2. Local Fire Regulation
3. Client's requirements
4. Operator's requirements
C. Each product, and system shall satisfy all the performance requirements of the project
façade specification and International Standards mentioned herein.
D. Latest current edition of the below listed international Standards references may apply,
subject to acceptance from Architect and Façade Consultant. No other National or
International standards will be accepted:
1. Local (country/ State / Province) civil defence and building authority guidelines.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
3. International Building Codes (IBC 2009)
4. British European Standard or British Standard (BS EN or BS)

5. Australian New Zealand Standard (AS NZS)
6. Curtain Wall and Cladding Technology Standards (CWCT)
7. Deutsches Institute for Normung (DIN)
8. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
9. Uniform Building Code (UBC)

E. Approved Manufacturer's Guidelines
1. Unless the Specification or the required International Standard stipulates higher

requirements, manufacturer's design guidelines must be complied with.
2. Façade Subcontractor shall seek Manufacturer's design review for non-standard

application to ensure Manufacturer's full warranty is obtained.
F. Specified works shall be designed, procured, supplied, delivered, coordinated, tested,
manufactured and installed with their interfaces, attachments, accessories, connections as
listed herein or shown on contract drawings.
G. Provide loading calculations to verify wind load (if the wind tunnel test is not applicable),
traffic impact load and seismic load per local and relevant international code requirements.
H. The specifications stipulate minimum performance requirements. The tender drawings
indicate the design intent and define the required geometry, alignment, and setout of visible
components.
I. Subcontracting of works is only allowed if prior approval from the Client has been obtained.
J. The below requirements shall be read as additional to those of the Main Contractor’s
requirement. Where a conflict or discrepancy is present, it shall be highlighted at the kick-
off meeting and a resolution agreed.
1.8 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality
levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are
different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall
be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable
limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or
maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect
for a decision before proceeding.
C. Conflicts between the specifications and the construction documents. The most stringent
requirement is the governing one.
D. Conflicts on specification requirements: The most stringent requirement will govern.
1.9 FAÇADE DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Basic Function
1. Provide essentially a weathertight, insulated separation between exterior and interior

space, that keeps out weather, trespassers, and animals / insects, while providing
convenient movement of occupants between inside and outside, and desirable
natural light, and views from inside to outside.

2. Building envelope shall be designed to provide a safe structurally sound protective
skin to the occupants of the building. External elements such as wind, imposed
loads, seismic load, building movement, shall be accommodated in the design.
3. Anchorage to block wall or concrete blocks are not permitted. Façade Subcontractor
and Facade Specialist Subcontractor shall design, supply and install additional
structural support frame for support for façade works, in case no structurally steel
framing or concrete is provided.
B. Amenity and Comfort Criteria
1. Psychometric conditions:
a. The energy performance of the entire envelope shall satisfy the performance
requirements as stipulated by within the project Tender Documentation and any
sustainability performance criteria, whichever is more onerous.
b. Design Facades to psychometric requirements, such as air temperature and
humidity, indicated in MEP Specifications for climate conditions throughout the year.
c. Installation temperature: When assessing thermal issues of the facade, it shall be
assumed that during its lifespan, façade components will be exposed to surface
temperature as below;
1) Maximum surface temperature
- Dark Coloured Profiles: 80oC
- Light Coloured Profiles: 65oC
2) Minimum Surface temperature
- Internal profile: 15oC
- External profiles (pressure plates and caps): 5oC
- Dimensions shown in dimensioned component drawings shall be
measured at 30 °C.
2. Psychometric conditions:
a. Provide continuous insulation over entire enclosure to meet thermal insulation
performance.
b. Façade thermal calculation shall be conducted using ‘THERM 7.7’ and/or ‘WINDOW
7.7’ (or latest version) or equivalent software programs. The software shall be
validated by running the sample calculation as described in BS EN ISO 10077-2. The
validation report shall be attached to the project calculations as proof of calibration of
the analysis.
c. Calculation shall representation of the proposed facade designs’ buildup and material
properties and meet thermal and declared sustainability performance requirements.
d. Connections through insulating layers shall be improved and incorporate thermal
breaks, be isolated or insulated to reduce thermal bridging and condensation risk.
e. The U-value calculations shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN ISO 6946,
and BS EN ISO 10077-2.
f. The calculation shall clearly indicate whether component method or single
assessment method (as per BS EN ISO 12631) is applied.
g. The following are façade thermal performance requirements:
1) Overall Overall Glazed Curtain Wall (including perimeter conditions):
max 1.7 W/m2K.
2) Overall Opaque Cladding (including perimeter conditions):
max 0.3 W/m2K.
Note: it is recommended to assign the heat transfer at the junction between the opaque and
glazed systems to glazed assemblies.
C. Condensation:
1. Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-contractor shall submit, as a

minimum, dew point calculations based on the following:
2. Proposed Façade Buildup and relevant materials information
3. 10 years psychometric data through yearly seasonal conditions
4. Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-contractor shall design Façade

System such that dew point is maintained in front of vapor membrane, condensation
shall not, under any circumstances form on the internal surfaces of any framing
members, faces of panels, fixings, within spandrel cavity or other components.
5. Where condensate forms in front of vapor membrane and behind cladding material,
design shall expel any condensate formed to the exterior surface.
6. Condensation shall not lead to degradation of performance, damage or staining of

the façade components and its interfacing materials.
D. Solar performance:
1. Glazing Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC), Visual Light Transmittance and
reflectance values are as listed in Section 08 81 23 Facade Glazing. The values listed
are minimum performance values.
E. Water Penetration Resistance:
1. The facades, including any incorporated operable sashes, and other interfacing shall
be designed to prevent leakage of water onto the internal faces.
2. The facades, and any incorporated opening lights, shall be designed to be ventilated
and drained such that any water which enters the system shall be drained to the
exterior via an appropriately designed water management system. The discharge of
all such water shall avoid producing unsightly staining or deposits.
3. Water infiltration performance of system shall be tested to ASTM E331.
4. Water shall not penetrate behind the air-seal line.

F. Air Infiltration Resistance:
1. All joints within the façade system and between the façade system and other works,
shall be designed to prevent air flow, from the exterior surface to the interior surface,
in the interests of:
a. Occupier comfort.
b. Ingress prevention of ambient moisture.
c. Reduction of dust / sand infiltration.
d. Limitation of heat loss.
2. Silicone joints on cladding system is not accepted as air sealed construction.
3. Air flow through building envelope shall be within limits stipulated in the technical
specifications. No concentrated airflow shall be allowed through the external
cladding, its closures, or any opening light or smoke ventilator fitted into the external
cladding. Terminations of the facade systems, and cladding shall be interfaced and
completely sealed against solid, non-air-permeable base structures, such as
concrete or plastered block work.
4. Where curtain wall and cladding interface with extraction vents, interfacing shall be
coordinated with MEP trades, and installed by Façade Subcontractor and Facade

Specialist Subcontractor, with mechanical protection (flashing) of membranes and
thermal insulation fillers.
5. Air permeability tests as per ASTM E283 shall be carried out on the performance
prototype, per the Tender Documentation.
a. Maximum: 1.2 m3/hr per m2 at 600Pa test pressure for fixed glazing, both exfiltration
and infiltration.
b. Maximum: 6.4 m3/hr per m2 at 300Pa test pressure for all operable vents, both
exfiltration and infiltration.
6. The entire building envelope shall be designed and constructed with a continuous air
barrier.
7. Air leakage for fenestration and doors shall be determined in accordance with
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A4408, NFRC 4009/ASTM E2837 or equivalent, with
a relevant local standard having precedence, as specified below. Air leakage shall
be labeled and certified by the manufacturer.
8. Air leakage shall not exceed the values specified in Local building code.
G. Acoustic:
1. Airborne Sound Transmission Resistance:

a. Acoustic performance and testing shall be in accordance with Acoustic Consultant
Report.
b. The complete façade, including framing and operable panels, shall meet the acoustic
rating requirement.
c. Acoustic performance of the final assemblies must be verified by off-site and on- site
testing where required by Acoustic Consultant.
d. Testing certificates shall be provided in accordance to ASTM E90 and classified in
accordance with ASTM E413. Both octave band values and single figure values shall
be provided for approval.
e. Where required, laminated glass may be used to achieve higher STC criteria.
Proposals for sound mitigation strategy shall be subjected to Consultant’s approval.
f. Wind generated noise:
1) All façade and support components shall be designed and installed to
prevent the generation and transmission of noise when exposed to
wind.
2) Wind generated airborne noise shall comply with requirements
stipulated within the acoustics requirements report.
3) No objectionable air, rattling and whistling noise at louvre / sunshade
blades / louvred screen locations.
H. Appearance:
1. General:
a. Overall aesthetic of the approved visual mock-up and design intent of contract
drawings shall be complied.
b. Exposed blade louvers: Concealed vertical mullions.
2. Silicone joints:
a. Provide even joint gap with even fill.
b. No sealant marks on adjacent surfaces will be acceptable.
c. Staining of sealant on adhered porous substrate is not acceptable.
3. Welded connections:
a. All exposed welded structures to be built as Architectural Exposed Steelwork,

category 3 where access is excess of 6m, category 2 otherwise.
4. Bolted connections:
a. Unless explicitly mentioned in tender contract documents or confirmed by Architect, all
fixings shall be concealed.
b. Any exposed fixings shall be countersunk fixings or pig-nose bolts, to aim the least
visual impact. Final decision shall be by Architect.
I. Health and Safety Criteria
1. Fire Resistance:
a. All materials and systems, and required testing, shall be subject to approval of Fire
Consultant, House of expertise and Local Engineer of Authority.
b. Any exterior materials forming the envelope enclosure shall be non-combustible, with
no exceptions. External envelope and cladding materials shall not be composed of
any materials which readily support combustion, and/or add significantly to the fire
load, and/or give off toxic fumes.
c. All cladding panels shall be tested and approved for the project designed makeup, for
its intended use as per ASTM E84, ASTM D1929, BS EN 13501-1, per local authority
and Fire Consultant’s requirement.
d. All assemblies shall be tested and approved for the project proposed configuration
and material makeup, for its intended use as per NFPA 285, and BS 8414, per local
authority and Fire Consultant’s requirement.
e. The fire safety design for the building will be based on the local civil defense
requirement and in accordance with any relevant local codes. These codes will be
applied to the building construction elements and fire protection system design.
f. No timber boarding, plywood backing, wooden packing shall be used.
g. Perimeter fire stopping details shall comply with the requirements of 07 84 53 Facade
Fire stopping and smoke seal.
h. Anti-slip material at main entrances
i. Anti-finger traps at operable vents (i.e. Windows and/or doors)
2. Child proofing:
a. Gaps in between balcony balustrade elements or those elements and interfacing
facade structures shall not exceed 100 mm or otherwise more onerous required by
local codes.
3. Vermin Resistance: Provide operable vents and ventilation openings with means of
keeping insects, birds, and animals out, where building operator requires.
4. Seismic Integrity: Ensure that no building part, cladding element, any attachment can
fall during or after a seismic event. No damage to facade elements, cladding panels,
glass, fixings or attachments are acceptable during design period of the building, with
the exception of sacrificial seismic joint covers, which must still remain attached to
the building at their original location.
5. Electrical Continuity and Earth Bonding:

a. Lightning protection strategy to be in accordance with the MEP Specification.
b. Main Contractor's team including the MEP Contractor and Façade Sub-Contractor
and Facade Specialist Sub-contractor, shall carry out all necessary coordination to
ensure lighting protection to earth bonding strategy as designed by MEP Consultant,
is implemented.
c. Façade design shall meet or exceed the requirements necessary for the envelope to
form part of the lightning protection system and to satisfy the requirements for earth
equipotential bonding without additional external bonding and straps to comply with
BS EN 62305-1, BS EN 62305-2, BS EN 62305-3, BS EN 62305-4, BS EN 62275.

d. The sections of the extrusions making up the cladding system shall be in sound
mechanical contact with each other to form a low electrical resistance. Required metal
material gauge, and all component parts shall match that specified within British
Standards for the material used. Continuity straps shall be provided between all
sections to form a complete faraday grid system for the buildings. The exact locations
of earthing points shall be coordinated with Main Contractor and MEP Contractor and
to be approved by MEP Engineer.
e. The conducting framing members shall have an electrical resistance not greater than
1.0 ohm when subjected to a 500-volt insulation test.
f. The Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-contractor shall design the
system to optimize grounding connections to building structure by strapping panels to
the adjacent panel and metal structure. Where there shall be no need for additional
earth straps, the cladding shall be earthed according to the given standards for its
design and fixings.
g. Earthing points shall be provided by Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist
Sub-contractor at bracket level spaced at heights as stipulated to meet lightning
protection strategy. Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-contractor
shall provide earthing straps and connection points from the building envelope to the
building conductor specified by MEP Engineer and in coordination with Main
Contractor.
h. All straps and connection points shall be concealed.
i. Discontinuity: Each discontinuous element shall be bonded to the lightning protection
system by the Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-contractor.
j. Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-contractor shall provide practical
justification of the electrical continuity as per designed. This can be carried out on site,
after 20m length of completed sectional installation.
J. Structural criteria
1. Dead Loads:
a. The facade systems shall be designed to transmit safely all dead loads to the primary
structure during its service life, via the support points provided for the purpose.
b. The facade systems shall be capable of accommodating the following dead loads
without any reduction in the performance:
1) The dead load shall be accommodated locally, and without causing
permanent deflections greater than 1mm, movements or induce
additional stress to infill panels and/or glass.
2) The dead loads derived from permanent fixtures, or services,
attached to either the internal or external surfaces.
3) Any dead loads shall be designed to act concurrently with the
maximum wind load, seismic, temperature and imposed loads.
4) The system shall resist a minimum of 1.5 times the design dead load
without permanent damage to panels or anchor, greater than 1.5mm.
2. Wind Loads:
a. The external cladding shall be designed to transmit the wind loads safely to the
primary structure during its service life, via support points designed for the purpose.
b. Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor shall provide wind load
calculations in accordance with ASCE 7 for the elements which are not covered by
the wind tunnel study report.
c. Where multiple specialty Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist
Subcontractor are engaged, all Façade Subcontractors shall adopt similar
methodology for project, parameters and standards for derivation of wind loads.
d. The preliminary facade design can be based on the following design assumptions:
1) Wind loading shall be acting perpendicular to the cladding.
2) Wind pressure shall take into consideration:
- Building importance

- Adjacent buildings,
- Topography
- Terrain conditions
- Exposure
- Porosity of building.
3) The system shall resist 1.5 times the design wind load without any
permanent damage to panels or anchors. Panel seals and
weathering's shall remain securely held, and gaskets where used
shall not be displaced.
4) Horizontal zoning of wind pressures to have lower design loads is not
permitted.
5) The system design shall include for any interaction at unit joints,
resulting from different pressures acting on contiguous units, where
wind pressure is not continuous through the entire façade elevation.
6) Wind pressure shall consider funneling effects between adjacent
buildings.
7) Wind pressure derivation shall take into consideration effects of panel
sizes.
8) Additional local pressures shall be calculated as ASCE 7 might need
to be applied in the proximity of louvers, overhangs, features,
canopies, large openings, partitions, balustrades, and corners zones.
These shall be additional to the wind loads as specified.
9) Any wind loads shall be designed to act concurrently with the
maximum dead load, seismic, temperature and imposed loads.
10) For systems where both surfaces are exposed such as canopies /
balustrades / partitions, effects of wind pressures acting on both
surfaces shall be accounted for.
11) For design of corner systems, Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade
Specialist Sub-contractor shall consider worst case combined effects
of wind loads with consideration for all wind directionalities, on both
surfaces forming the corner.
3. Live and Imposed Loads

a. General
1) The façade system shall be designed to safely transmit all live and
imposed loads to the building's structure during its service life, via the
points of support designed for the purpose.
2) The façade system shall be designed to accommodate the required
imposed loads without causing any damage or deterioration in its
performance.
3) Imposed loads shall be in accordance with ASCE 7 and Local
Building Code.
b. Barrier Horizontal loads: As per Local Building Code and imposed load mentioned in
the table 01, whichever is more onerous. The facade systems shall be capable of
accommodating the worst effect from following live loads without any reduction in the
performance.
1) External balustrade, and partition system: Systems shall be designed
to accommodate barrier loads in combination with full dead load and
25% of the design wind loading.
2) Envelope system: Systems shall be designed to accommodate barrier
loads in combination with full dead load and wind loading.

Code / Application Line Load Point Load (kN) Pressure
(kN/m) (kPa)
Vertical Load (to be applied in combination with 0.6 1 -

horizontal loads)
Horizontal Load for domestic and residential 0.74 0.5 1

(including stairs)
Horizontal Load for office and work Areas (including 0.74 0.5 1
stairs)
Horizontal Load for areas where people congregate 1.5 1.5 1.5
type 1
Horizontal Load for areas where people congregate 3.0 1.5 1.5
type 2(including corridors greater than 3m width)
Table 01: Unfactored Barrier Loads.
c. Loads in table 01 shall be treated as un-factored loads and as separate load cases.
d. Application of horizontal barrier load shall be in accordance with below requirements:
1) Line load for barrier loads shall be applied at 1.1 m above finished
floor level unless otherwise specified in the local code.
2) Pressure shall be applied at the entire face of the barrier and partition
up to 1.1m above finished floor level unless otherwise specified in the
local code.
3) Point loads shall be applied at any point up to 1.1m above finish floor
level that results in the most onerous stress and deflection on barrier.
4) All barriers shall withstand a point load of 0.89 kN to be applied at any
point at any directions, to the barrier up to 1.1m above finish floor
level. Location and application of load to results in the most onerous
stress and deflection on each of the below components and its
associated fixings;
- Infill material and
- Framing Elements
e. Non-trafficable overhead conditions:
1) Load allowance shall be made for occasional cleaning and shall be
equal to or greater than that which produces the worst load effect
from one of the following:
- A uniformly distributed load of 0.6 kN/m2 measured on a plan for
roof slopes of 30°deg or less.
- A uniformly distributed load of 0.6 (60 - a)/30 kN/m2 measured on
the plan for roof slopes (a) greater than 30° and less than 60°;
- A concentrated load of 0.9 kN
2) Load allowance shall be made for any occasional façade

replacement, and load shall be coordinated with façade maintenance
strategy to account for equipment, materials and personnel loading.
4. Impact Loads
a. The Façade system shall be designed to withstand the impacts occurring during its
service life, including normal occupancy and maintenance.

1) Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor shall
coordinate with the Façade Access Subcontractor to confirm all
loading imposed on the Facades and structure.
2) Safety and serviceability performance of system shall be considered
under impact loads.
3) No components of façade systems shall detach under impact loads
during maintenance or replacement of façade systems.
4) Human Impact Resistance:
- External Ground Floor:
o EIFS and insulated cement board system: Designed to resist
impact loads of medium impact resistance, up to 2m height
from finish floor level, in accordance with ASTM
E2486/E2486M without permanent damage to supporting
structure and exterior skin.
o Glazed Curtain Wall: Designed to perform to Class A, in
accordance to ANSI Z97.1, without permanent damage to
supporting structure and exterior skin.
- External Facades:
o EIFS and insulated cement board system: Designed to resist
impact loads of standard impact resistance, from 2m above
finished floor level to the rest of the building elevations, in
accordance to ASTM E2486/E2486M without permanent
damage to supporting structure and exterior skin.
o BMU Impact: Designed to resist impact loads specified in
Façade Access equipment’s manufacturers specifications.
5. Temperature Loads
a. Temperature gradient (IN-OUT): Performance of the façade system and its
components, shall be maintained under differential temperatures between the inside
and outside of the building envelope.
b. Façade shall be designed air temperature ranges below:
1) Winter inside: +18°C ~ +25°C
2) Winter outside: 5°C ~ +35°C
3) Summer Inside: +18°C ~ +35°C
4) Summer outside: +22°C ~ +60°C
c. Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor shall provide calculations

to;
1) Establish maximum thermal stresses developed in materials
(especially brittle materials such as glass). Provide calculations to
justify the strength of the materials or components is adequate to
accommodate thermally induced loads in addition to other applied
loads such as dead / self- weight/ wind / seismic / imposed or any
other loads, as reasonably expected during the service life of the
project.
2) Establish any changes in dimensions and shape of Façade
Components (Centre-to-Edge or Warm-to-Cold Side) due to changes
in services temperature. Façade System shall be designed to
accommodate such dimensional or shape changes with no reduction
in the specified performance.
3) No permanent deformation of the component due to design loads is
acceptable
6. Seismic Loads
a. The Facade Systems and its fixings and connections shall be designed to

accommodate seismic loading mentioned within the following standards, whichever
required by the local authorities and Structural Consultant:
1) Local Building Code
2) ASCE 7
3) UBC 1997
b. Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor shall design Façade

system to effectively transfer seismic loading back to the Primary structure. All such
loading and additional effects shall be coordinated with Project Structural Engineer
and Main Contractor.
c. Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor shall coordinate the
primary structures’ seismic movement with Project Structural Engineer and Main
Contractor.
d. The facade system shall be designed to accommodate the multi-directional
movements induced by any seismic loads.
e. No compromise in integrity of Façade system elements is allowed. No façade
element shall detach during or after a seismic event. Damage to cladding panels,
fixings or any attachments are not acceptable, except for sacrificial seismic joint
covers, which may be damaged but must remain attached to the Structure at their
original location.
f. Where multiple specialty Façade Subcontractors are engaged, all specialty Façade
Sub-Contractors shall adopt similar methodology, parameters and standards for
derivation of seismic loads.
7. Construction Temporary Loads

a. All elements for façade system shall be designed to accommodate:
1) Wind loading resulting from exposure on an open structure during
construction.
2) Any temporary access loads associated with construction to be
coordinated.
3) Other loads arising from the temporary or partial support of the
cladding components and assemblies shall be safe during lifting and
do not have to suffer damaging deflections during lifting or
transportation.
b. Deflection
1) Façade system shall be designed to meet deflection criteria as

stipulated below;
- Design of aluminium elements shall be in accordance with
Aluminium design manual, BS EN 1999, or Local Building Code,
whichever is more onerous.
- Design of mild steel and stainless steel shall be in accordance with
Local Building Code or AISC 360-2016, whichever is more
onerous.
- Deflection criteria shall meet maximum limits as stipulated within
the specification or the relevant codes, whichever is most onerous.
2) Design of Façade systems shall prevent permanent deformation

greater than 1mm, caused by its self- weight, wind loads, seismic
loads, maintenance loads and impact loads or the normal use to
which they will be subjected.
K. Movement Consideration:
1. General: Façade System shall be capable of accommodating the following

movements, as a minimum, without any reduction in the specified performance:

a. Deflection under design loads – self weight, deadload, imposed load, and seismic.
b. Movement due to cyclic wind loading.
c. Seismic movement of base structure.
d. Movement due to temperature gradient through building envelope.
e. Movement due to moisture content, either inside or outside the building
f. Movement resulting from difference in temperature in panels or cladding assembled
state, to an installed and envelope enclose state.
g. Movement due to pressure differential within building, and between internal and
external conditions.
h. Movement resulting from thermal expansion and contraction
i. Movement imposed during building maintenance
j. Any movement due to creep, shrinkage, settlement and racking of the base structure
k. Any movement due to base building erection
2. Primary Structure
a. Deflection, sway, creep, sagging of the primary structure
1) Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor shall be
responsible for coordination of all building movements with Structural
Engineer and Main Contractor.
2) Façade System shall be designed to consider all movements of the
primary structure and to ensure the system performance will not be
reduced from movements, combined or individually considered. No
system failure due to blocked movements or leakage due to
disengaged legs will be accepted during the service life period (60
years) of the project.
b. Building movement joints and seismic joints.
1) Refer to Primary structure’s structural drawings for the locations of
Building Movement Joints and for the locations of Seismic joints, if
any. Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor
shall coordinate the joint locations and sizes with the Main Contractor
as final verification.
2) Joint cover materials shall follow architectural intent.
3) Expansion Joints:
- Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor shall
design facade interfacing to ensure that building envelope is
completely watertight and airtight, whilst allowing anticipated
building movements as coordinated with Structural Engineer and
Main Contractor.
- Façade interface at expansion joints installation shall be tested to
ensure weathertightness, at the maximum and minimum limits of
anticipated movements. Weather-tightness shall be maintained
during and after a seismic event.
4) Seismic Joint:
- Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor shall design seismic joint covers
to allow for movements with no damage during normal building expansion movements and
elastic phase seismic movements.
- No panels or joint covers shall detach during a seismic event.
3. Base building tolerance accommodation criteria

a. Unless otherwise confirmed by the Main Contractor and structural engineer on tighter
values are received, the Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor
shall design all façade system bracketry to take into account the construction
tolerances of the concrete slab and steel structure as mentioned in the appendix.
b. 3-way adjustability shall be incorporated into bracketry design for façade elements to
enable on-site alignment within the stipulated tolerance limits, without site drilling of the
facade elements. Serrated or welded washers over slotted holes, cast-in channels,
etc. are deemed to be acceptable means of providing adjustability.

4. Durability criteria
a. Wind Resistance:
1) All components of the façade system shall be verified by calculations.
Calculations submitted shall provide justification of each component
transmitting wind loads through the intended load design path to the
Primary Structure.
2) Facade systems shall be further verified by Performance Testing,
carried out as per ASTM E330/E330M.
- Serviceability wind resistance requirement:
o Tests to be carried out at 100 % of both negative and positive
wind pressures, held for at least 10 seconds per increment in
accordance with test code.
o Deflection criteria shall be in accordance with this technical
specification.
o Maximum permanent deformation to the panels, including slip
of fixings, shall less than 1 mm.
o Integrity of system shall be verified after serviceability wind
resistance testing, through successful static water penetration
test.
o Structural safety wind resistance requirement:
o Tests to be carried out to 150 % of both negative and positive
wind pressures, held for at least 10 seconds per increment in
accordance with test code.
o Deflection criteria shall be in accordance with this technical
specification.
o Test shall prove façade system is designed to transmit the
proof load to the building's structure via the points of supports
with an adequate margin of safety of 1.5.
o No permanent damage to or detachment of framing members,
panels, or anchors is permitted.
o Framing members shall not be buckled. Panels, glazing beads,
and decorative capping pieces shall remain securely held, and
gaskets shall not be displaced.
o Test shall be conducted following all other serviceability tests
are completed and results found to be acceptable.
3) Façade System shall be designed to accommodation reoccurring

cyclic design wind loads, without any reduction in the specified
performance.
b. Corrosion
1) Uniform corrosion to the exposed surface must be prevented.
2) Façade systems, associated accessories, fixings and steel support
shall be designed for the following corrosivity environment and
durability in accordance with ISO 2944;
Exterior, in front of weather seal line: C5-H
Interior, behind weather seal line: C3-H
3) Facade systems shall be designed and installed to minimize effects of
corrosion, minimum considerations as below:
- Surface preparation of coating and application shall be carried per
benchmark installation approved by coating supplier, including
repair works.
- Designed to shed rather than trap water and allow complete
drainage.
- Designed to prevent of dirt build-up by allowing water/rain-washing
of exposed surfaces through grading and strategic placement of
weepholes

- Designed to eliminate condensation and/or promote ventilation to
allow drying of condensation or any penetrating water.
- On-site organic or metal coatings shall be prevented.
4) Any recorded-on site corrosion shall be recorded by the Main
Contractor and his relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade
Specialist Sub-contractor and reported immediately to the Architect
and Façade Consultant, prior to any further action.
5) Bimetallic Corrosion: At all locations where, different metals are
assembled, the Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist
Subcontractor shall be responsible for ensuring that electrolytic
corrosion will not occur. Measures to prevent the effects of galvanic
corrosion include but are not limited to:
- Design systems to eliminate moisture accumulation between
dissimilar metals.
- Electrically isolate dissimilar metals from each other.
- Avoid an unfavourable anode-cathode surface area ratio. Design
a larger anodic area to proportionally negligible cathodic area.
- If coupling of dissimilar metals is unavoidable, choose two that are
close together in the galvanic series.
- Coating systems shall not be considered as a form of bimetallic
separation.
6) All aluminium components shall not be in direct contact with
cementitious materials.
7) Use of metals outside the vapor barrier:
- All structural members, concealed or exposed, and glazing
channels, clamps, brackets, and attachments, outside the weather
seal line shall be:
o Stainless steel Grade 316 or
o Hot-dipped galvanized steel
o Hot-dipped galvanized steel with coating for architecturally
exposed steel, to meet C5-H corrosion resistance class
o Aluminium coated to AAMA 2605, and
o with minimum C5-H class corrosion resistance treatment.
- All stainless-steel sheets for external applications outside the

weather seal line, shall meet ASTM A480/A480M, ASTM A666
and be of minimum Grade 316. Surface finish shall be selected to
ensure no corrosion or pitting will occur when exposed to external
environment for the project
- All fixings outside the vapor barrier shall be stainless steel 316.
8) Infestations: Materials used in the manufacture of the external

cladding, or its components, shall not be liable to infestation attack by
micro-organisms, fungi, insects or other vermin.
9) All material in contact with each other shall be compatibility tested to
ensure that are no staining, no decrease in strength, no change in
material properties and sufficient adhesion is achieved.
Manufacturer’s approval and endorsement of material usage with its
adjacent material shall be provided for items mentioned in the non-
exhaustive list below.
- Sealant – Glass
- Sealant – Aluminium
- Sealant - Coated Aluminium
- Sealant – Glass Fibre Reinforced Concrete
- Sealant - Exterior insulation and finish systems, EIFS
- Sealant - Setting Blocks
- Sealant – Gaskets

- Sealant - Glazing Tape
- Sealant - Backer Rod
- Sealant - SGP laminate
o Sealant – Butyl Tape/Seal
o Sealant - Thermal break materials
o Sealant - Waterproofing membranes/Flashing
10) Water Penetration Resistance: Façade Systems shall be designed to;

- Prevent all water, moisture, and condensation from entering
assemblies.
- Where minor ingress of water within façade system occurs, façade
system shall ensure all minor ingress is expelled to exterior face of
façade.
- No water ingress to the internal spaces, behind weather seal line,
is permitted.
c. Temperature Considerations: Allow for daily expansion and contraction within and
between elements without causing detrimental effect to components and anchorage.
d. Metallic Coated PVDF or powder coated applied to aluminium to meet the following
requirements:
1) Exterior, in front of weather seal line and interior with swimming pool:
AAMA 2605 or Qualicoat 3
2) Interior, within weather seal line: AAMA 2604 or Qualicoat 2
e. Interior Conditions: Comply with requirements for interior finish. Façade

Subcontractor shall ensure internal surfaces of the perimeter facades are coordinated
with interior finishes, and meet Architect / Interior Designer’s requirements. Façade
Subcontractor shall provide angles and brackets as required for receiving internal
finishes. Any fixings and penetrations shall be introduced into Façade components by
Façade Subcontractor only.
5. Operation and maintenance criteria

a. Reglazing, re-cladding requirements:
1) Unless approval from Architect and Façade Consultant was obtained,
Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-contractor shall
ensure Façade panels are designed for external replacement by
means of direct access, without progressive dismantling of the
façade. Glazed window systems shall be replaceable from internal
space.
2) Where indicated in the Façade replacement strategy, Facades shall
be designed for maintenance, materials and access loads where
facades are to be designed as access for maintenance and
replacement.
3) Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor shall
provide operation and maintenance manual including and not limited
to:
4) Frequency of maintenance,
5) List of Suitable Cleaning Agents for each material,
6) Detailed procedure description of reglazing, re-cladding and other
repair works,
7) Procedure shall be illustrated with photos of correct practice,
8) Markup on shop drawings to show access to concealed screws etc.
9) The Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor shall
verify the system's ability for re-glazing by on- site demonstration.
10) All cladding panels shall be demountable with minimal effects to the
surrounding panels. Method of demounting panels shall be submitted
for approval during design stage for approval by Façade
Subcontractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor.

11) Reglazing is only permitted for localized breakage conditions. No
mass re-glazing is permitted by this Contract.
b. Ease of cleaning: Design glazed openings to permit the exterior surface to be

cleaned from inside or outside without removing window sash.
c. Decorative screens installed on top of the glazed assemblies at Wadi Residences,
shall be easily openable for maintenance/access to the glazing.
1.10 MATERIAL AND ACCESSORIES

A. Extruded Aluminium: BS EN 1999-1-4, BS EN 12020-1, BS EN 755-1, ASTM B221, ASTM
B209, ASTM A666, ASTM E34, ASTM E716and ASTM E209
1. All extruded Aluminium framing members shall be produced with heat treatable 6061
or 6063 temper T5 and T6 alloys, unless shown otherwise on Approved Drawings.
2. All brackets to be 6061 or 6082.
3. Carry out design in accordance with BS EN 1999.
4. The minimum wall thickness of the extrusions shall be sufficient to meet the structural
requirements, adequate to receive concealed fixings including flush countersunk
screws where required, eliminate the risk of distortion of finished surfaces, and not
less than the following minimum requirements:
a. Structural sections: 2.5mm
b. Non-structural sections: 1.5mm
B. Sheet Aluminium: As specified in Section 07 42 13 Metal Cladding and Screen systems
and this specification.
C. Fasteners:
1. Stainless steel fasteners: BS EN ISO 3506-1 and ASTM F593/4

a. All fasteners in front of weather seal line shall be minimum 316 or A4 grade.
b. All fasteners behind of weather seal line shall be minimum 304 or A2 grade.
2. Mild steel hexagon bolts and screws: BS 3692, BS 4190 and ASTM F3125
3. Mild steel hexagon nuts: BS EN ISO 4032, BS EN ISO 4033 and ASTM F3125
D. Square shall be used with bolt and nut.
E. Where exposed to vibration or risk of loosening, self-locking nuts, chemical product for
securing the nut, or locking nut shall be used.
F. Bolted Connections shall ensure sufficient engagement is provided between bolt and nut.
All bolted connections be installed with minimum 3 threads of the bolt threaded beyond the
thickness of the nut, as criteria of acceptance.
G. Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor shall show documentation
that the manufacturer of the
1. Stainless steel fasteners are compliant to ASTM F1470.
2. Mild Steel fasteners are compliant to ASTM F606

H. Locknuts shall be provided for all vertical bolts in tension.
1. Mild steel countersunk head screw and bolt: BS 4933 and ASTM F3125
2. High strength bolts: BS EN 14399-1, and ASTM F3125

3. Expansion anchors: Include manufacturer's appraisal for the application.
4. Chemical anchors: Include manufacturer's appraisal for the application.
5. Washers: BS 4320 and ASTM F844/F436

a. Spring washers: BS 4464 and ASTM F436. Spring washers or locknut shall be used
for all fixings, unless otherwise noted.
b. Where hole for connection is more than 1mm larger than outer diameter of
bolt/anchors, minimum 4mm thickness square washer shall be applied. Washers
shall be locked into position when final adjustment of the bracket is completed.
I. Tapered washers: shall be used where bearing faces are not parallel. Prevent washer from
turning during tightening.
J. Load indicating washers: To be placed under the bolt head or stationary nut with structural
bolts to ensure accurate tension. Use hardened steel washer with the turning nut. Prevent
the bolt from turning. ASTM F959.
K. Finishes:
1. Internal: All internal and concealed bolts, nuts, washers shall be spun galvanized,
zinc plated.
2. External: All external or exposed bolts, screws, nuts and washers shall be austenitic
stainless-steel Type 316 S16 (PD 970). External mentioned herein shall be any
position in front of the air seal line. Internal shall be any position behind the air seal
line.
L. Faying surfaces:
1. In snug-tight and fully tensioned bearing connections, paint is permitted on the faying
surfaces. In slip-critical connections, paint coating must be qualified and tested in
accordance with the AISC S348 and offer a defined slip-coefficient.
2. Steel 25mm or thicker shall be checked for deformities such as bowing, twist or
rippling, which may reduce the slip factor to below the design limit. Any remedial
measures must be approved.
M. Re-tightening of bolts: Not allowed. Bolt assemblies that have been fully tightened and
subsequently released are to be discarded.
N. Cast-in Channels: Shall be minimum grade S235, hot dip galvanized.
1. channels shall be hot rolled or temperature-controlled roll shaped. Cold formed not
allowed.
2. Prying forces due to eccentric loading shall be taken into consideration in design.
3. Submit manufacturer's endorsement for non-typical applications.
4. Carry out laboratory and field pull-out testing, as specified in this specification.
5. ETA approved minimum characteristic steel resistance under fatigue load of 2.5kN
for 10^6 cycles or higher.
O. Shimming: Solid Aluminium, solid steel or hard plastic. Plastic or EPDM shimming shall only
be used where only compression forces transfer and have a minimum shore A durometer
hardness of 80.
1. Shimming to be single piece, or pieces welded together, where lateral forces may
transfer through the connection.

2. Shimming limits shall not exceed 4/3rd of the diameter of the bolt. Shimming
thickness limits shall be verified by calculations and stated on drawings. Shimming
beyond the limits shall be verified by additional bolt bend checking.
3. In general, shimming should be avoided and two-piece brackets, serrated plates,

slotted holes, threaded rods or other adjustable methods shall be implemented as
system solution.
4. Plastic Timber boarding, plywood backing, wooden packing is not allowed.

P. Finishes
1. All coating and finish systems shall be applied by paint system approved applicators.
2. Superior performance organic coating system: AAMA 2605 or Qualicoat 3, multiple

coats, thermally cured polyvinylidene fluoride system. Apply 3 coat system, with
Kynar 500 resin, with dry film thickness of 30 microns (+/-5 microns range), measured
in accordance to ASTM D7091.
a. Measure and record film thicknesses minimum twice for each batch
b. Sampling procedure shall comply BS 6001-0, ISO 2859-1 level 2.
3. Superior performance organic coating finish: AAMA 2605 or Qualicoat 3, single

coats, thermally cured fluoropolymer system. Minimum dry film thickness of 50
microns, when measured in accordance with EN ISO 2360.
a. Measure and record film thickness minimum twice for each batch
b. Sampling to be in accordance with BA 6001-0
4. High Performance Organic Finish: AAMA 2604 or Qualicoat 2; single coats, thermally
cured super durable system. Minimum dry film thickness of 60 microns, when
measured in accordance with EN ISO 2360.
a. Measure and record film thicknesses minimum twice for each batch.
b. Sampling shall be in accordance with BS 6001-0.
Anodized coating: AAMA 2603 or Qualicoat
5. Finish shall meet the follow requirements:

a. Chalking: No more than that represented by a No.8 rating based on ASTM D4214.
b. Colour Retention: No fading or Colour change in excess of 5 Hunter Colour difference
units, calculated in accordance with ASTM D2244.
c. Gloss Retention: Minimum of 30 percent gloss retention, when tested in accordance
with ASTM D523.
6. Hot dip galvanized corrosion protection of mild steel: As specified in Section 05 12

10 Façade Structural Framing.
a. Coated Galvanized system:
1) Corrosion protection offered by the Coated Galvanized sheet shall be
C3-H for applications behind weather seal line, in accordance with
ISO 12944-5.
2) Corrosion protection offered by the Coated Galvanized sheet shall be
C5-H for applications in front of weather seal line, in accordance with
ISO 12944-5.
3) Where coated galvanized sheet forms a part of a fire rated assembly,
- Coating system shall provide the required low flame spread
qualities as required by Local authorities, House of expertise and
Architect of record.
- Primer and paint system shall be procured from a single source.

- Coating shall be applied by an applicator certified by the paint
system manufacturer.
- Visible coated steel shall meet the following visual criteria;
o AESS Category 2 where component is at 6m from closest
standing view point.
o AESS Category 3 for conditions not covered by condition
mentioned in item i.
Q. WARRANTY
1. Refer to this section of specification for warranty requirements.
2. Failure includes, but shall not be limited to the following:

a. Peeling or blistering of paint,
b. Cracking of paint film,
c. Crazing of paint film.
1.11 TRACEBILITY
A. All fabricated panels shall be provided with logical referencing system to ensure full
traceability for materials and all assembly processes.
B. Panel installed on elevation shall bear individual unique referencing to provide the following
information:
1. Panel assembly date – assembly and supervising personals
2. Panel glazing date - assembly and supervising personals
3. Material information – all product reference numbers, material production and expiry
date, tests results, quality control reports including test results.
1.12 INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. All inspections and tests will be attended and witnessed by:
1. Main Contractor
2. Client or Client's representative
3. Design Architect and Local Architect
4. Facade Consultant
5. Façade and Façade Specialist Subcontractor

B. Factory inspections:
1. Main Contractor and his relevant Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist
Subcontractor shall invite, with minimum notice of 8 working days, project team and
Facade Consultant to be present at all inspections.
2. Inspections shall occur within 2 weeks of the start of project production or when the
first 50m2 of panels are being assembled, whichever is sooner.
3. Inspections shall occur whilst project manufacture is ongoing.

C. Performance testing:
1. Main Contractor and his relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-
contractor to arrange, with at least two weeks’ notice, for project team and Facade
Consultant to witness all testing.

2. Charges for Façade Consultant’s time for additional testing at a later date, as a result
of any failure in testing, shall be borne Main Contractor and his relevant Façade Sub-
Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-contractor.
3. All performance mock-ups shall be fabricated from actual project materials and
finishes, including all typical components occurring on the project. Assembly to be
exactly as per project arrangement and approved shop drawings.
4. Testing laboratories shall be certified to comply to BS EN ISO/IEC 17025, ISO/IEC

17020, ISO 9001, ISO 14001, ISO 45001 and meet local accreditation requirements
for the test for which the laboratories will carry out.
5. All testing shall only be carried out by an internationally accredited testing house
currently certified by UKAS, or IAS, or local accreditation institutes and currently
certified to carry out the said testing and/or inspection by the local authorities and to
be approved by the Facade Consultant.
a. If the proposed facility does not fully meet the criteria and the consultant's approval,
test shall be either carried out, or repeated in a pre-approved facility as listed here:
1) Al Futtaim Element
2) Thomas Bell Wright
6. Facade Consultant shall be requested to witness all testing with sufficient notice of
at least 2 weeks. All tests shall be witnessed, successfully completed and approved
by the Architect and Facade Consultant prior to the manufacturing and the installation
of the system. Works carried out prior to approval from Façade Consultant and
Architect shall be at the Main Contractor and his relevant Façade Subcontractor and
Facade Specialist Subcontractor's own risk and might result in abortive works. The
Facade Consultant will not give approval unless the test is witnessed in its entirety,
along with necessary or specified equipment calibrations and calibration.
7. Test shall be carried out based on AAMA, ASTM standards.
8. Tests shall be conducted in sequence. No test shall be carried out unless all previous
tests in the sequence have been passed to the satisfaction of the testing authority.
9. Performance mock-ups will also be evaluated as a workmanship control sample

visual mock-up.
10. Internal finishes, if not deemed as an integral part of the façade design’s
performance, shall be omitted in the test.
11. Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor can submit existing test
reports to verify the performance of proprietary systems in a configuration equal or
greater than the project requirements. Final acceptance of the existing test as
substitute for actual testing shall be subject to the Architect and Façade Consultant.
Such data can only be accepted only if;
a. Tested system configuration is the same or more onerous than that of the project
proposed, and
b. Tested conditions are the same or more onerous than the project requirements, and
c. Tested system is as per that proposed for the project, and
d. Test report is provided by an accredited testing laboratory acceptable by Architect and
Façade Consultant, and local authority.
12. Modifications:
a. In the event of the failure of any material, component or assembly of the external
cladding, corrections and modifications shall be made and fully documented with a

detailed written description of the remedial work together with drawings to explain the
corrections and modifications.
b. All modifications, alterations, additions, other noncompliance of the specimen passing
the test compared with the original design need to be addressed in subsequent
drawing, calculation, and material submissions, method statements, factory and site
QA/QC procedures and at site installation. If the approved changes result in added
material or extra work, no additional fee can be claimed by the Main Contractor and
his relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-contractor, as the
changes are necessary to achieve the defined performance.
c. No change, modification, alteration, addition can be carried out on the performance
specimen that cannot be approved for the proposed system or design not in
compliance with this specification or the relevant international codes. A technical
rejection of the documentation of the modified system will result in the need of new
system concept and new performance testing.
d. All changes, modifications and alterations required are to be agreed with the Facade
Consultant and Architect, before re-testing commences. Testing restarted without
agreement may result in the need for new performance testing. Should this be the
case no additional fee can be claimed by the Main Contractor and his relevant
Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor.
e. If any modification is made to the Mock-up, including dismantling and re- assembly,
the test authority can request that the sequence shall begin again at the first test. This
requirement is not applicable to glass breakage during the wind resistance safety test
when replacement of a pane of glass may be carried out without re-starting the whole
sequence.
D. Site inspections:
1. Main Contractor and relevant Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist

Subcontractor shall invite, with minimum notice of 8 working days, project team and
Facade Consultant to be present at site inspections.
2. Inspections shall occur within 2 weeks of the start of project installation or testing
when the first 40m2 of panels are being installed, whichever is sooner.
3. Main Contractor and his relevant Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist
Subcontractor shall co-ordinate and ensure Façade Consultant and Architects’
presence for the following, as a minimum;
a. All benchmark installations, for areas up to 40m2.
b. follow-up inspections,
c. general progress inspections,
d. non-typical conditions inspections,
e. interfaces work sample inspections,
f. witnessing site testing.
g. All invitations shall be given with a minimum of 8 working days’ notice. Main
Contractor and his relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-
contractor shall ensure that inspections and testing shall be carried out at the onset of
installation to allow any required proposed rectification or remedial works to be
submitted, reviewed and approved. Access and relevant personnel assistance shall
be provided.
h. Third Party access:
1) Main Contractor and his relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade
Specialist Sub-contractor shall invite and arrange access to
representatives of suppliers, manufacturers, independent testing
agencies to carry out inspections, survey, measurements and testing
required for quality control purposes or as prerequisite to warranties
and sign-off or required by this Specification.
E. Fixing/anchorage testing:

1. All anchors shall be tested and approved to EAD 330232-01-0601.
2. All cast in embeds shall be tested and approved to EAD 330008-03-0601.
3. For any anchor design conditions that is not per dimension or conditions for which
the basis of ETAG or EAD’s approval was given, Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade
Specialist Sub-contractor shall provide required anchor testing to further justify the
anchor performance under project conditions.
4. Laboratory embed and anchor pull out tests:

a. Tests shall include all cast-in plates, cast-in channels, cast-in studs, other structural
embeds, and all anchor types, including and not limited to chemical anchors,
expansion bolts, high strength bolts to concrete substrate.
b. Tests shall use the same mixing ratio, type and strength of concrete as the project
condition.
c. The tested embeds and anchors shall be installed based on worst case
manufacturing tolerance, and construction tolerances.
d. Number of tests shall be determined to comply with all of the following:
1) Min 12 numbers of each type
e. Perform pull-out test according to ASTM E488/E488M with the following holding
points, with min. 30 seconds hold time:
1) 1.5 x design load: No permanent deformation of the anchor or chips
and cracks of the concrete
2) 2x design load: No failure of the anchor, no chips or cracks of the
concrete.
3) 3x design load: No failure of the structural concrete.
4) Failure load: apply load until structural failure of either the cast-in or
the surrounding concrete. Record load and failure mode.
f. Provide report illustrated with photographs.
g. Test to be performed by accredited independent testing agency.
5. On -site embed and anchor pull out tests:

a. Embeds: Tests shall be performed on extra embeds cast at the time of casting the
working project embeds. Façade Project embeds shall not be used for testing.
b. Post-fixed anchors: Install extra anchors for testing to the same slab but at
intermediate locations of the project anchors. Project anchors shall not be used for
testing.
c. Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-contractor shall provide proposals
to Façade Consultant regarding the configurations of the embeds and anchors to be
tested. As a minimum, worst case installed embedment, spacing and edge distance
shall be considered.
d. On-site Tests shall be tested as below:
1) Min 5 numbers of each configuration/type or
2) Min 2% of the total number of the project embeds, whichever is more
onerous.
3) Nondestructive tests;
- Min 5 numbers of each configuration/type or
- Min 2% of the total number of the project embeds, whichever is
more onerous.
- Perform pull-out test according to ASTM E488/E488M and BS
8539, with the following holding points, with min. 30 seconds hold
time:
- 1 x design load: No permanent deformation of the anchor or chips
and cracks of the concrete
4) Destructive tests:
- Min 2 numbers of each configuration/type

- 1.5 x design load: No failure of the anchor, no chips or cracks of
the concrete.
- 3 x design load: No failure of the structural concrete.
- Provide report illustrated with photographs.
- Test to be performed by Accredited Independent Testing Agency
or Anchor manufacturer. Testing agent for anchors shall be
conducted by personnel who;
o Are competent and certified in carrying out the required testing
and
o Have knowledge of anchor being tested as to how the tested
anchor works, how they are installed and how tested anchor
are likely to fail.
5) Stud bolt and screw pull-out test:
- Stud bolts and screws shall be pull tested to 2 times the design
pull load with no sign of fatigue to the fixing and base material.
- Min 12 numbers of each type to be tested.
6. High-Strength Bolts: Field-bolted connections shall be verified using testing in

accordance with AISC 348, testing at least 5% of bolts at each connection.
7. Torque testing: All (100%) installed fixings shall be torque tested and clearly marked
if satisfactorily tested. All torque tests shall be clearly recorded. Over torqued
anchors shall not be used and remedial proposal shall be submitted for approval.
F. Weld Testing:
1. Weld Testing shall be conducted by

a. Inspector who are certified to conduct the required inspections and tests to below
requirements;
1) PCN Level 2 and 3 in compliance with ISO 9712:2012 or
2) ASNT Certification and Qualifications for nondestructive test
personnel and
3) Any additional certification required by any relevant local authorities.
b. Testing laboratory who are accredited to

c. Pre-approved tests laboratories are listed below;
1) Intertek
2) Elements
3) Equivalent approved laboratories by local authorities to conduct said
works
2. Following tests shall be conducted for fillet welds;

a. 100% Visual Inspection and;
b. 30% Liquid penetrant inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E165/E165M
or
c. 30% Magnetic particle inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E709, ASTM
E1444/E1444M;
d. 5% Radiographic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E94 or
e. 5% Ultrasonic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E164.
f. Should any weld tests/ inspections fail, an additional 5% samples of the total number
of welds shall be tested.
g. All failed tests shall be recorded. remedial methods implemented and retests shall be
conducted and recorded.
h. Where liquid penetrant or magnetic particle inspection is performed, testing shall be
carried out prior to application of finishing or corrosion protection.
3. Following tests shall be conducted for partial and full penetration Butt/Groove welds,

corner and lap welds;
a. 100% Visual Inspection and;
b. 30% Radiographic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E94 or
c. 30% Ultrasonic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E164.
d. Should any weld tests/ inspections fail, an additional 5% samples of the total number
of welds shall be tested.
e. All failed tests shall be recorded. remedial methods implemented and retests shall be
conducted and recorded.
G. Acoustic field test:
1. Carry out acoustic testing, including field measurements of internal noise levels and
flanking noise testing, unless it is otherwise proven and accepted by the Acoustic
Consultant that the required acoustic performance is met.
2. Tests required for verification of design for the acoustic separation and/or quality of
installation, shall be per stipulated by Acoustic Consultant.
3. Tests required shall be per stipulated by Acoustic Consultant. Required testing may
be laboratory testing prior to the start of major procurement, or can be carried out on
site after the first benchmark installation is completed. Final decision shall be by
Acoustic Consultant.
4. Flanking transmission to be tested in accordance with tests as stipulated by Acoustic

consultant.
H. Inspections and tests outside the KSA:
1. If the inspection or testing facility is outside the KSA, the following costs shall be
borne by Main Contractor and his relevant Façade Subcontractor and Facade
Specialist Subcontractor.
a. Airfare: Economy class for flights shorter than 3 hours, and Business class for flights
longer than 3 hours
b. Transfer in location of residence and Inspection destination
c. Accommodation (minimum 4 star) and
d. Reasonable meal expenses.
1.13 DESIGN LIFE AND WARRANTY

A. The design service life of the Façade Systems shall be 60 years, from the point of final
handover of Façade Contract.
B. Warranty period mentioned, shall commence from day of Final Handover of the entire
contract package to the Client.
C. Where product warranties do not satisfy general system warranty requirements, back-to-
back warranties are required to meet system warranty requirements. Warranty for coatings,
paints, silicones, adhesives, etc. shall cover from the building site installation, and not from
manufacturing. Shelf life cannot be accepted instead of application warranty.
D. The Performance Criteria shall be satisfied for the full-service life of the façade system,
which starts from the practical completion date of the building.
Component Warranty Predicted Maintenance level

(years) service
life
(years)
Structural elements, steelwork, cables, 12 60 Repair only

tension cables/rods SECTION 01 40 50 – FAÇADE QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

Component Warranty Predicted Maintenance level
(years) service
life
(years)
Steel fixing brackets, connections 12 60 Repair only

Stainless steel components 12 60 Repair only
Aluminium framing 12 60 Repair only
Fixings, bolts, anchors 12 60 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
Solid Aluminium Sheets 12 25 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
Aluminium Expanded mesh 12 25 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
Aluminium flashings 12 25 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
Anodizing 12 30 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
Superior Performance Organic Finishes 20 50 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
High-Performance Organic Finishes 15 40 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
Polyester powder coating 10 30 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
Sealed Insulated Glass Units 12 25 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
Glass Coatings 12 25 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
Laminated Glass (PVB / SGP) 10 25 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
EIFS (Exterior Insulation and Finish 15 25 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
System)
GFRC Panels 20 60 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
Gaskets 12 25 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
Silicone weather sealants 12 25 Scheduled maintenance plus Repair
Structural silicone sealants 12 50 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
Thermal insulation 12 25 Repair only
Vapor barriers 12 60 Repair only
Waterproofing membrane 12 60 Repair only
Galvanizing 12 60 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
Fire stopping 12 60 Repair only
Stone Masonry 25 60 Repair Only
Cement board 15 25 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
Precast Panels 12 60 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
Side hung and sliding Door 10 20 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
Proprietary systems (ironmongery, 2 5 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
revolving doors,
Electrical etc.) (door shutters,
components 2 5 Scheduled maintenance plus repair
sensors, lights, vent openers, automatic
Polycarbonate 20 60 Repair only
doors,
Blue etc.)
Wall Façade / Cladding 15 60 Repair only
E. All primary components shall include all structural elements and load bearing components.
All primary components shall perform in accordance with the service life of the project,
requiring occasional repair.
F. All secondary components, such as internal linings, exposed finishes to metal components,
operable, glazing, gaskets and compression seals, sealants, etc. - shall be designed to
allow ease of replacement without compromising the structural and weatherproof integrity
of the external cladding or necessitating progressive dismantling of the external cladding.
G. Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor shall provide with the operation
and maintenance manual, the required maintenance, replacement periods, and methods of
replacement.
H. Refer to ISO 15686-1 for life cycle and BS 7543 for maintenance Level requirements.
I. The following table summarizes the warranty, service life and maintenance expectation
requirements. Refer to each specification sections for specific requirements.

PRODUCTS ( NOT USED )
PART 3 EXECUTION
SITE CONDITIONS
A. Façade Subcontractor and Facade Specialist Subcontractor shall undertake a detailed
survey of preceding Main Contractor's works including but limited to;
1. Location and level (flat and evenness) of cast-in channels,
2. Alignment, set out and finish of concreting and steelworks, and
3. Alignment, finish and setout of masonry works

B. Such preceding survey shall verify suitability of the installed works to receive the Façade
brackets and interfacing works. The Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-
contractor shall co-ordinate with the Main Contractor if such in any other way not suitable
for his installation. The Main Contractor and his Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade
Specialist Sub-contractor shall jointly propose methods of rectification works where
necessary to ensure timely delivery of installation. Deviations shall be recorded in the form
of drawings (plans and elevations from datums that were provided by the Main Contractor).
C. Commencement of installation by the Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-
contractor shall be deemed as acceptance of the Main Contractor’s preceding installed
works.
D. Main Contractor and his Façade Sub-Contractor shall co-ordinate to ensure all the
necessary remedial proposals are submitted to related consultant for approval in a timely
manner so as not to delay the contract program. Contractors shall assume approval
process will require a number of revisions and time submittals accordingly.
E. Neither Main Contractor nor Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-contractor
shall have any claim or right of action against the Client arising from work executed or to be
executed by others.
EXAMINATION
A. Acceptable Testing Agencies
1. Testing laboratories shall be UKAS certified. Laboratories shall be currently certified
to carry out the said testing and/or inspection by the local authorities. The following
are the pre-approved laboratories:
2. Al Futtaim Element
3. Thomas Bell Wright
4. Testing laboratories shall be certified to comply to BS EN ISO/IEC 17025, ISO 17065,

ISO/IEC 17020, ISO 9001, ISO 14001, ISO 45001.
5. Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-contractor shall not use a facility
related with his own organization.
B. Test and Inspection Log
1. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a log of all tests and inspections conducted to
include, as a minimum,
a. Date test or inspection was conducted.
b. For site test, specific location of tests shall be recorded.
c. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
d. Date test or inspection results.
e. Identification of testing agency conducting test or inspection.
f. Photographs of tested samples. For material test, photos shall show;

1) relevant dimensions and
2) before testing and mode of pass/ fail after testing.
C. WORKMANSHIP
1. Façade engineering submittals shall comply and be aligned with the requirements
listed in Section 01 40 50 - Façade Quality Requirements with regards to the façade
systems, materials, accessories, and any other relevant item.
2. Façade System concept drawings:

a. For façade systems concept approval, Relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and/or
Façade Specialist Sub-contractor shall submit a package of façade concept system
drawings capturing the fundamental design principles for the proposed façade
systems, for Façade Consultant’s review and approval.
b. The first package of façade concept system drawings shall be received no later than
two weeks from the kick-off meeting.
c. The first package of façade concept system drawings shall be substantiated by
preliminary structural calculation set (Moment of inertia calculation).
d. The first façade system concept drawings shall include General Notes. The General
Notes shall be updated and resubmitted along with every submission, and shall
include the below listed information, as a minimum:
1) Design codes.
2) Design criteria such as:
- Design stresses.
- Deflection criteria.
- Thermal performance.
- Fire rating.
- Acoustic rating.
3) Detailed description of all façade materials and finishes.
4) Movement allowances, tolerances and adjustments.
5) Façade component full technical details.
6) Material codes, part schedules (hardware, fixings, gaskets, etc.).
7) Glazing performance.
3. Shop Drawings Package:

a. Upon approval of the façade concept system drawings (Status A or B), a complete
façade detailed drawing package shall be submitted, with substantiating structural
calculations.
b. Shop drawings packages submitted without structural calculations documents will be
rejected Status C without review.
c. In the case of the use of a trademarked product prior to the first submission, relevant
drawings and their supporting calculations shall be endorsed by their respective
specialist manufacturer to verify suitability of material usage in proposed design and
confirm their back-to-back warranty for the given application. Such items include
typical and non-typical use of:
1) Silicones,
2) Anchors,
3) Embeds,
4) All other trademarked products and materials.
d. Detailed shop drawings package shall include and represent all aspects of the
proposed façade systems including:
1) Overall elevations, plans and sections, with partial plans, section call
outs. With reference to the following as a minimum:
- Wind load on building / Wind load zones.
- Façade cladding system types.
- Acoustic performance / associated glass build-up.

- Unit numbering systems.
- Settings of Operable sashes.
- modulation and setting out.
- Emergency egress requirements.
- Minimum movement and seismic joint locations.
- Visible MEP items.
2) Complex geometries shall be analysed and verified using 3D (three

Dimensional) studies, assemblies and interfaces shall be developed
where required.
3) Third-party Specialist Façade Checking Engineer shall submit and
verify a relevant resume and certificate of chartership.
4) System detailed shop drawings shall be developed and submitted in
1:2 and 1:5 scale. Details include and are not limited to the following:
- Partition wall interfaces of core and shell buildings.
- Vertical and horizontal details of all typical and non-typical
conditions, showing the actual proposed configuration with all
attachments and interfaces.
- Sequence diagrams.
- Details of fabrication, assembly, installation and fixing anchorage
of the façade system.
- Complex details and interfaces in 3D illustrations.
- Coordinated MEP Interface details.
5) Façade Consultant has the right to request additional plans, sections,

details, views, isometric drawings, etc. for better understanding of the
proposed solution.
6) All drawings shall be clearly cross-referenced “parent to child” and
“child to parent”.
7) All drawings shall be fully coordinated with other trades.
8) All details shall be fully coordinated with engineering justification as
well as thermal performance.
9) All details shall be full dimensioned and annotated.
10) All drawings shall be issued in .dwg (CAD) format, and .pdf (PDF)
formatted for legible printing in A3 paper size.
11) All drawings to allow space for Architect and Façade Consultant
review stamps.
12) Contract Documents shall not be used to re-create shop drawings.
13) Shop Drawings shall indicate the following information:
- Façade geometry.
- Base building tolerance values and line illustrating the extents of
stated tolerance.
- Façade movement allowance values.
- Expansion joint movement allowance values.
- Weld types.
- Fastener types, grade, edge distances, centres, embedment
depths, shimming limits, etc.
- Material grades, thicknesses, finishes, etc.
- All seen and critical dimensions.
- Structural sealant bites,
- Differentiate between shop and field fabrication.
- Reference to the relevant calculation package.
4. Calculations:
a. All submitted façade system drawing packages shall be supported by structural
calculations and verifications. Shop drawings and its associated calculations shall be
provided concurrently. Calculations with no shop drawings, and vice versa, results in

immediate rejection of submission.
b. The submitted calculations must sufficiently and adequately demonstrate that the
Relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and/or Façade Specialist Sub-contractor’s
proposed systems meet the structural and performance criteria set out in this
specification.
c. Calculations shall describe the software and its version used to perform the analysis.
d. In case Façade Subcontractor meets various requirements contradicting one another,
the façade contractor shall contact the design team (and Façade Consultant) for
clarification.
e. In case of parallel requirements sourced from different documents/codes/standards,
the most onerous requirement shall be followed.
f. The calculations must be documented in a sequential, and detailed method to allow
clarity and understanding of how the results have been derived.
g. Calculations shall be developed in a clear and structured formatting.
h. Revised calculation documents shall clearly identify all changes made since previous
submission.
i. Façade Consultant has the right to request additional calculations and engineering
checks where necessary.
j. Each structural calculation documents shall be reviewed and approved by Façade
Consultant and other relevant parties. Calculation submittal shall include the following
information, as a minimum:
1) Wind pressure calculations. Where wind tunnel test is not available
or required.
2) Justification of movement allowance within the system. Concept
design proposal shall be based on Building movement values from
Structural Engineer. All movements shall be confirmed by the Main
Contractor at the onset of construction. Calculations shall include as
a minimum:
- Calculations for horizontal and vertical movement incorporating the effects
of:
o Thermal expansion/contraction.
o Inter-story drift.
o Fabrication tolerance,
o Live load deflection,
o Vertical displacement due to interstudy drift.
o Seismic load or movement.
o Column shortening.
o Any movement at expansion joints.
o Wind load deflection.
o Superimposed dead load deflection.
o Diagrams of each typical façade condition in design, maximum
opening and maximum closing conditions.
3) Cast-in, embed anchors and shimming limits calculations shall be

submitted. To be issued as a high priority within two weeks of
contract award. Calculations must include a derivation of the loads
applied. Embeds shall take into consideration concreting tolerances,
relevant load offsets, bearing distance, as a minimum.
4) System calculations. Including checks and verification of all structural
elements, such as all framing members, all brackets, all anchors, all
fixings, all connector pieces, all extrusions, all glasses, all structural
sealants, all special elements, etc. Including the connections and
interfaces of these elements. Each system calculation package
should contain the following sections as a minimum:
- Specified Design Criteria.
- List of codes used excerpts where necessary.
- Reference number of the relevant shop drawings.
- Reference of engineering software used.

- Excerpt of relevant elevation, plan, section, and detail drawings.
Including dimensions, mark-ups of acting force locations,
eccentricities, and restraints.
- All coefficients and variables used shall be clearly described and
explained.
- Suppliers’ documents, such as product data sheets, supplier's
calculations, suppliers written acceptance of the application, etc.
- Movement and concrete tolerance to be accounted for, for the
relevant system.
- Calculations shall be set out to follow load path, and load transfer
path diagrams.
- All values derived and adopted within the calculations shall be
referenced.
- Diagrams of relevant details, specific for the calculation in
question, shall be dimensioned with all set out and offsets for load
application and resistance.
- All typical, worst case and non-typical conditions.
- High-resolution computer model output diagrams, showing
ultimate factor of safety, actual / allowable stress, and deflection
ratios.
- Dimensioned die drawings with structural properties.
- Page numbering.
- Façade acoustic calculations. Testing instead of calculation is
preferred and can be opted for.
- Checks of non-structural elements. Where inadequate stiffness,
fixation, twist, etc., could case undesired visual effects.
- Secondary steel support calculations. Including connection
design.
- U-value calculations and condensation checks. Where computer
simulation software is used provide calibration check. U-value
calculations shall prove compliance of the system’s assembly,
including all thermal bridge conditions (example: perimeter details,
corners, localized bracket penetrating thermal line).
5. Material submissions:
a. Material submissions and relevant sample submissions shall be submitted together in
one submittal.
b. Material submissions will be for materials of identical type, quality, origin,
manufacturer, surface treatment, etc., to that of the proposed project materials.
c. Satisfactory material submittals approval shall be done prior to the final approval of the
system drawings and calculations.
d. Material submission shall include as a minimum:
e. Extracts from relevant specification(s).
1) Specification(s) compliance statement.
2) Detail drawings showing locations of material(s).
3) Sample warranty, or back-to-back warranties, as required by the
project specification.
4) Details of product manufacturer (ISO certifications).
5) Product technical data sheets showing compliance to specification(s)
requirements.
6) Products covered by the general warranty do not require individual
warranties; see specification section relating to warranties and
service life for specific requirements.
7) Statement of project service life, as required by the project
specification.
8) See specification section relating to warranties and service life for
specific requirements.

9) Additional information should be included as required by the specific
material. Including but not limited to:
10) Product testing data as required supporting specification compliance.
11) Sample mill certificates.
12) Manufacturing standards.
13) Compatibility statements.
14) Local (country/ State / Province) Authority approval and testing
certification.
15) Where catalogue pages are included containing multiple products the
relevant sections should be highlighted or irrelevant sections
obscured or removed, keeping the submission concise. Volumes of
irrelevant submittals pages will be grounds for submission rejection.
6. Benchmark Sample Submission:

a. Sample submissions shall be accompanied by the relevant material submission.
b. All samples submitted will be identical in type, quality, origin, manufacturer, surface
treatment, etc., to that of the proposed project materials and items.
c. Final approval of system drawings and calculations may be withheld until satisfactory
samples have been submitted and approved.
d. Unless otherwise requested, a minimum of 3 samples shall be submitted for review to
consultants. Upon approval of the material submission and benchmark sample
review. One approved sample shall be return to site for benchmark control (see item 5
below). The other approved sample shall be sent to Façade Sub-Contractor’s
facilities. The final approved sample shall be kept with the Architect at the Architect’s
office.
e. Additionally repair sample shall be provided to ensure that repair sample is approved
for benchmark.
f. Approved samples will be retained in a sample room on site until final handover.
These samples will be used a as control samples when inspecting the project works.
Samples cannot be incorporated in the contract works.
g. The Client may request further samples above the number and sizes indicated until
the proposed element or material meets their requirements. No additional costs shall
be charged to Client for such additional samples.
h. Further samples above the indicated number and size as requested, shall be
provided free of charge, for material testing or performance testing purposes.
7. Method statements:
a. The method statement shall be entirely project specific and describe the activities and
methods proposed to be used. Where possible is shall include illustrations, diagrams,
and pictures, where possible.
b. It is preferable that individual method statements for each system/process are
submitted.
c. The method statements shall include but not be limited to the following:
1) Off-site fabrication, manufacture, and testing.
2) Off-site integration of works by others (Façade Access equipment for
example).
3) Methods of handling, and transportation including storage.
4) Site organization.
5) Construction and installation sequences.
6) Necessary coordination items with other trades.
7) Temporary works.
8) Access proposals.
9) Off-site quality control procedures.
10) On-site quality control procedures.
11) Site testing and commissioning.
12) Protection.

13) Removal of excess sealant from glazing and metal cladding.
14) Touch-up and repair methods.
15) Final cleaning.
16) Inspection test plans.
17) Inspection checklists.
18) Re-glazing and cladding replacement.
d. Main Contractor and his relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and/or Façade Specialist
Sub-contractor shall put in place a procedure of joint inspection, rejection/acceptance
of base structure or cast-in placement.
e. Main Contractor and his relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and/or Façade Specialist
Sub-contractor shall put in place procedure for remedial works approval to allow
rectification works to be reviewed and approved prior to continuation of other trades.
Such procedures shall be submitted for Consultant’s approval prior to
commencement of works.
WORKMANSHIP
A. The standard of workmanship for the Contract Works shall be established by the approved
samples, mock up, and benchmark inspected sample works. All subsequent work will be of
a quality which shall meet or exceed that of the said samples, mock-up and benchmark
works.
B. Workmanship not to the approved standard will be rejected by the Client or related
consultant, and shall be rectified or replaced by the Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade
Specialist Sub-contractor at his own expense including moving or removing otherwise
approved installed cladding components that also need to be done at the Façade Sub-
Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-contractor 's expense and then the reinstalled works
need to be re-inspected and tested per Façade Consultant’s request.
C. All façade works shall be carried out in accordance to approved drawings and methods.
Any works carried out prior to approval shall be at the risk of the Façade Sub-Contractor
and Facade Specialist Sub-contractor. Any re-work, removal of installed and time delays
resulting from installation of unapproved works, shall be at the expense of the Façade Sub-
Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-contractor.
D. No work shall be covered up or put out of view without the agreement of the Facade
Consultant, Consultant shall be given at least 2 weeks’ written notice for the examination,
and review of any installed works prior to closing out.
E. All penetration through facades shall be designed, coordinated and submitted for approval
prior to commencing the works.
REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. Façade Sub-Contractor and Facade Specialist Sub-contractor shall provide any permitted
repairs and protection works to ensure installed works are of quality and finish that meets
the project specification, prior to handover of the works. No damage, and/or stains to any
installed façade materials will be accepted.
B. Installed Façade Works exposed by or for quality-control service activities, shall be
protected.
C. Protection of installed works shall not impart any stains, scratches or deformation once
removed.
D. Repair and protection of Façade works are Contractor's responsibility.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 03 49 00 – GLASS FIBRE REINFORCED CONCRETE
Contents
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
1.5 SYSTEM WRITEUP
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.9 MOCK-UP
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.11 BENCHMARK INSTALLATION
1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.13 SEQUENCING
1.14 WARRANTY
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTED MANUFACTURER
2.2 FAÇADE SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA
2.3 MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
2.4 FABRICATION
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.6 REPAIRS
3.7 CLEANING

SECTION 03 49 00 GLASS FIBRE REINFORCED CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Description
1. Glass fibre reinforced concrete (GRC/GFRC) cladding system, consisting of GFRC

panels, supporting frame, anchors, and connection hardware.
2. Waterproofing and flashings (including interfacing).
3. Insulation and vapor barrier (including interfacing).
4. Testing and Quality Control.
5. Grouting at sill joints.
6. Caulking of Joints.
B. Related Sections
b. 01 40 50_Facade Quality Requirements
5. APPENDICES
This specification shall be read in conjunction with any other tender documents including but not
limited to:


M. NEOM Requirements / Guidelines.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS

F. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
G. AAMA: American Aluminium Manufacturers Association
H. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
I. AISI – American Iron and Steel Institute.
J. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers.
K. AISC (MAN): Steel Construction Manual.
L. AESS: Architectural Exposed Structural Steel.
M. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.
N. AWS: American Welding Society.
O. BS: British Standard.
P. BS EN: British and European Standard.
Q. SBC: Saudi Building Code(s).
requirements shall be complied. Consult with Project Engineer and Consultant for final decision
for code compliance.
A. Local (country/ State / Province) civil defence and building authority guidelines.
B. Practical Design Guide by International GRC Technical committee.
C. PCI Manuals: Comply with the requirements and recommendations in the following PCI
manuals unless more stringent requirements are indicated:

D. PCI MNL 128 - Recommended Practice for Glass Fibre Reinforced Concrete Panels.
E. PCI MNL 130 - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Glass Fibre
Reinforced Concrete Products.
F. PCI MNL 117 - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Glass
fibre reinforced Concrete Products.
G. CEN/TR 15739 - Precast concrete products - Concrete finishes - Identification.
H. ASTM A36/ A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
I. ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
J. ASTM A653/ A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
K. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless-Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
L. ASTM A780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip
Galvanized Coatings.
M. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
N. ASTM C39/39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens.
O. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
P. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
Q. ASTM C494/ C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
R. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
for Use in Concrete.
S. ASTM C947 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Properties of Thin-Section Glass-Fibre-
Reinforced Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading).
T. ASTM C948 - Standard Test Method for Dry and Wet Bulk Density, Water Absorption, and
Apparent Porosity of Thin Sections of Glass-fibre Reinforced Concrete.
U. ASTM C979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Coloured Concrete.
V. ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates
for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation.
W. ASTM C1228 - Standard Practice for Preparing Coupons for Flexural and Washout Tests on
Glass Fibre Reinforced Concrete.
X. ASTM C1229 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Glass Fibre Content in Glass
Fibre Reinforced Concrete (GFRC) (Wash-Out Test).
Y. ASTM C1230 - Standard Test Method for Performing Tension Tests on Glass-Fibre
Reinforced Concrete (GFRC) Bonding Pads.
Z. ASTM C1560 - Standard Test Method for Hot Water Accelerated Aging of Glass-Fibre
Reinforced Cement-Based Composites.
AA. ASTM C1666/C1666M -Standard Specification for Alkali Resistant (AR) Glass Fibre for
GFRC and Fibre-Reinforced Concrete and Cement.
BB. ASTM D578 - Standard Specification for Glass Fibre Strands.
CC. ASTM D1577 - Standard Test Methods for Linear Density of Textile Fibres.
DD. ASTM D2244 - Standard practice for Calculation of Colour Tolerances and Colour
Differences from Instrumentally Measured Colour Coordinates.

EE. ASTM D2256 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Yarns by the Single-Strand
Method
FF. ASTM D3800 - Standard Test Method for Density of High-Modulus Fibres.
GG. ASTM D4963 - Standard Specification for Alkali Resistant (AR) Glass Fibre for GFRC and
Fibre-Reinforced Concrete and Cement.
HH. ASTM F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs.
II. BS EN ISO 12944 - Paints and varnishes. Corrosion protection of steel structures by
protective paint systems.
JJ. ISO 1461 - Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles. Specifications
and test methods.
KK. ASCE/SEI 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
LL. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code – Steel.
MM. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
NN. AWS D1.4 - Rebar Welding Procedures and Requirements.
OO. AWS D1.6 - Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel.
PP. AISI's North American Architectural Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members.
QQ. BS EN 1170-2 - Test method for glass-fibre reinforced cement.
RR. GRCA Specification for the manufacture, curing and testing of Glass fibre Reinforced
Concrete (GRC) Products.
SS. SSPC- SP 6/NACE No. 3 - Commercial Blast Cleaning.
TT. Specification for the manufacture, curing and testing of GRC products – Concrete Society.
UU. EN 15191 - Glass fibre reinforced concrete products - Classification of glass fibre reinforced
concrete performances.
VV. EN 15422 – Precast concrete products – Specification of glass fibres for reinforcement of
mortars and concretes.
WW. BS EN 1008 – Mixing water for concrete.
XX. SBC 201 General
YY. SBC 302 Structural - Construction
1.5 SYSTEM WRITEUP
A. Refer to Appendix A for system writeup.

B. Refer to Tender Documentation for details and locations of relevant systems.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
Submittal requirements and procedures shall be compliant with minimum requirements stipulated
in Section 01 30 50_Façade Administration Requirements.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include GFRC design mixes.
1. Data sheets on each proposed product to include, as a minimum:

a. Product data sheet, to confirm compliance with requirements stipulated in this
specification, shall include all physical and performance characteristics.
1) Sand

2) Portland Cement
3) Water
4) Alkali resistant glass fibres
5) Admixtures and Curing Agents
6) Sealer
7) Pigments, where applicable
8) Facing Materials
9) Sealant suitable for application on porous material
10) Anchors and inserts
11) Proposed corrosion treatment for metal components
b. Recommendations and requirements for storage and handling of proposed product.

c. Fabrication instructions and recommendations.
d. Warranty for product finish, as specified herein.
e. Product’s proof of compliance with local and project specific fire performance
f. Sample of warranty.
g. Manufacturer data sheets for all proprietary items.
h. Any information as required by Project Consultant.
B. Certificates:
1. Mill certificates for all metal works.
2. Test reports on components for GFRC.
3. Compatibility and adhesion tests for all sealant used.
4. Welder Certificates, to include types of welds the mentioned welder is qualified to

conduct.
5. Quality Assurance Records including LOP and MOR test coupon readings to verify
design assumptions.
6. Material and system warranties.
7. Any required engineering judgement.
8. Certification of all installers were for proprietary systems.
9. Certification of welders and inspector to substantiate qualifications of the personal to

conduct works.
10. PCI Factory Certification
11. Compliance to local fire codes including approval from local authorities.
C. Calculations:
1. Façade movement allowance including and not limited to relative movement between
support points, thermal movement, racking of the panels and relevant joint size.
2. Thermal performance analysis, including all thermal bridges (fixing points, junctions
with other systems, corners, slabs, column locations, and similar).
3. Acoustic performance analysis.
4. Derivation of safety factors.

5. Test reports for test coupons as verification of all design assumptions.
6. Complete System structural engineering verification.
7. Anchor/Embed calculations.
D. Working Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for GFRC panels and support
structure, including adjacent work and connection details, including but not limited to the
following:
1. Structural analysis data signed and endorsed by the IStructE Qualified Professional
Engineer responsible for their preparation.
2. Panel elevations, sections, and dimensions.
3. Thickness of facing mix, GFRC backing, and bonding pads for typical panels.
4. Finishes.
5. Joint and connection details.
6. Erection details.
7. Support frames, including sizing of members, strength, connection details,

professionally prepared calculations, material properties, certification, and other
information required for structural analysis of the performance of work.
8. Panel frame details for typical panels including sizes, spacing, thickness, and yield
strength of various members.
9. Location and details of connection hardware attached to the structure.
10. Size, location, and details of flex, gravity, and seismic anchors for typical panels.
11. Other items sprayed into panels.
12. Erection sequence for special conditions.
13. Relationship to adjacent materials.
14. Description of loose, cast-in, and field hardware.
15. Any other information as required by Architect and Façade Consultant.

E. Samples for finish selection:
1. For all exposed components.

a. Minimum three number, 30 mm long, of finished exposed face of GFRC showing the
full range of colours and textures specified. These samples are for Colour finish
selection only.
b. Once finish is selected, provide additional 3 samples demonstrating aesthetic of
repair/ touch-up for 80mm x 80mm patch damage.
c. Three number of all exposed accessories such as sealant, fixings.
F. Approval samples:
1. Minimum Three number, 400 x 400mm minimum sized sample GFRC samples,
demonstrating project interfacing detail for the main system(s) such as joints and

corners.
2. Three number, 300 x 300mm, minimum samples of each backpan, infill panel,
cladding.
3. Three number minimum samples of each bolt, anchor, screw, pin, rivet, and other
fixings.
4. Three number minimum samples of each embed or cast-in.
5. Three number, 100 x 300mm, minimum samples of flashing and water proofing.
G. Maintenance Data:
1. Maintenance Data for all supplied materials
2. Care instructions and warranty requirements.
H. Quality Assurance Submittals:
1. Qualification Data: For qualified GFRC manufacturer, including proof of current Glass
fibre reinforced/ Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI) Plant Certification.
2. Test reports verifying characteristics of the project specific GFRC design during pre-
design and production stages. Tests shall include and not limited to:
a. Washout Tests
b. Density
c. Tensile and Flexural/ LOP and MOR – Yield, and Ultimate
d. Modulus of elasticity
e. Shear Strength: Interlaminar and In-plane Shear
f. Compressive strength
g. Impact resistance
h. Embed / Bonding pad tests.
i. Coefficient of thermal expansion
j. Fire Tests as required by fire consultant and local authority having jurisdiction.
3. Welding test reports.
4. Anchor test reports.
5. Proposed Welders’ certifications.
6. Steel Sheet Certification: For steel sheet used in cold-formed steel panel framing.
7. Mill Certificates: For structural-steel shapes and hollow structural sections used in
panel framing.
8. Source Quality-Control Test Reports: For GFRC, inserts, and anchors.
A. Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 50_Façade Quality

Section for project base design criteria.
B. System Description: Unless specified otherwise, colours and patterns shall be as selected
by the Architect from the manufacturer’s standard range of colours and patterns.

C. Façade contractor to design GFRC panel for condition during lifting, separate calculation
shall be provided to analysis panel considering support at lifting locations.
1. The appearance of the exposed concrete surface shall comply with the following
requirements according to standard CEN/TR 15739 - Precast concrete products -
Concrete finishes - Identification. The following appearance criteria shall be followed:
a. Texture to exceed requirements for class T(3).
b. Colour to achieve class C(4).
c. Mean colour, chosen by the agreement between the parties.
2. Structural Performance: GFRC panels, including panel frames, anchors, and

connections, shall withstand the following design loads as well as the effects of
thermal- and moisture- induced dimensional changes within limits and under
conditions indicated:
a. Dead Loads: Refer to the Structural Specification.
b. Live Loads: Refer to the Structural Specification.
c. Seismic Loads: Refer to the Structural Specification.
d. Project-Specific Loads: Refer to the Structural Specification.
e. Design panel frames and connections to accommodate deflections and other building
movements.
f. Design panel frames to transfer window loads to building structure.
3. Deflection Criteria:
a. In case of dead load out-of-plane deflection of GFRC panels shall be limited to L/500
or 5mm.
b. In case of wind load and live load out-of-plane deflection of GFRC panels shall be
limited to L/360 or 10mm.
c. Deflection limit for supporting steelwork shall be limited to L/360.
4. Flatness Criteria
a. Flatness to exceed requirements for class P(3).
b. GFRC in-service flatness to be such that no visible dimpling between intermediate rib-
stiffeners occurs under imposed and permanent loading as described in Section 01
40 50.
A. Reference Standards and Regulatory Requirements:
1. Where there are in existence International Standards or Codes applicable to the

Work of this Section, the Façade and GFRC Specialist Sub-Contractor may choose
to provide products, as accepted by the Architect or Façade Consultant, which
comply with those standards in lieu of the standards specified herein. In either case,
the recommendations and requirements of such Standards shall be considered
minimum standards for the products, materials, or assemblies in question.
2. Nothing herein shall relieve Façade and GFRC Specialist Sub-Contractor of its
responsibility to provide a higher standard than the relevant Code or Standard, where
that is required to comply with other parts of the Architectural Specification.
3. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that participates in PCI's Plant

Certification Program and is designated a PCI-Certified Plant for Group G - Glass
Fibre Reinforced Concrete and is certified for GFRC production or Equivalent.
a. Certification shall be maintained throughout the production of the glass fibre reinforced
concrete units. Production shall immediately stop if at any time the manufacturer’s
certification is revoked, regardless of the status of completion of the Work. Production
will not be allowed to re-start until necessary corrections are made and certification

has been re-established. In the event certification(s) cannot be re-established in a
timely manner, causing project delays, the manufacturer, at no additional cost, will
contract out the remainder of the units to be manufactured at a PCI certified plant.
b. Manufacturer's responsibility includes fabricating and installing GFRC panels and
providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility for GFRC panels.
c. Engineering responsibility includes preparation of Working Drawings and
comprehensive engineering analysis, based on GFRC production test values, by a
qualified professional.
d. Provide statements, on company letterhead, attesting to the following:
1) Production capacity.
2) Capability to develop Working Drawings and details for the Work
using BIM (Building Information Modelling).
3) Capability to provide material and finish samples.
e. Professionals: Provide information about the following:

1) Entity or person(s) which will provide structural calculations.
2) Entity or person(s) which will carry out visual and performance mock-
up testing.
f. Experience: 8 years' minimum successful experience on projects providing GFRC

assemblies of similar complexity.
g. Previous projects: Successfully completed 5 minimum GFRC projects of scope, type,
and size similar to proposed Project.
1) Provide project location address, brief description, notional cost, date
of completion, and reference contact, including name, title, telephone
number, and email address, for at least three representative projects.
4. Installer qualifications: Installer experienced in erecting custom designed GFRC

assemblies and acceptable to manufacturer for installing proposed structure.
a. Experience: 8 years' minimum successful experience on projects erecting GFRC
assemblies.
b. Previous projects: Successfully completed 5 minimum GFRC projects of scope, type,
and size similar to proposed Project.
5. Steel Sheet Certifications: Obtain mill certificates signed by manufacturers of steel

sheet, or test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating that steel sheet used
in cold-formed metal panel framing complies with requirements including uncoated
steel thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical
requirements, and galvanized-coating thickness.
6. Steel Sheet Certifications: Obtain mill certificates signed by manufacturers of steel

sheet, or test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating that steel sheet used
in cold-formed metal panel framing complies with requirements including uncoated
steel thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical
requirements, and galvanized-coating thickness.
7. Mill Certificates: Obtain certified mill test reports from manufacturer of structural-steel
shapes and hollow structural sections used in panel framing indicating compliance of
these products with requirements.
8. Single Source Responsibility: Provide design, engineering, and custom fabrication

for GFRC and supply of all components, materials, and products based on a single
manufacturer of sole responsibility for all GFRC systems, including those specified
herein. Provision of products from numerous sources for site assembly without
complete single source design and supply responsibility is not acceptable.

9. PCI Manuals: Comply with requirements and recommendations in the following PCI
manuals unless more stringent requirements are indicated:
a. PCI MNL 128, "Recommended Practice for Glass Fibre Reinforced Concrete
Panels."
b. PCI MNL 130, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Glass Fibre
Reinforced Concrete Products."
10. AISI Specifications: Comply with AISI's North American Architectural Specification
for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, and relevant local Codes.
11. Mock-ups: Build mock-ups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards
for fabrication and installation. Refer to Architect for size and configuration of visual
mock-up.
a. Build mock-up of typical GFRC trim installations for review by the Engineer, including
joints, column covers, soffit, interior wall units and the like. Refer to the Design
Drawings for more information.
b. Do not proceed with installation of GFRC units until mock-up is accepted by the
Architect.
12. GRC cladding edges to be temporary protected when external access is in operation
to avoid damages or breakage on GRC cladding edges.
1.9 MOCK-UP
A. Visual mock-up:
1. Build mock-ups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
fabrication and installation.
2. Build mock-up of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.
3. Include typical components, attachments to building structure, and methods of

installation.
4. Include window opening with GFRC returns.
5. Include Corners and coping.
6. Include sealant-filled joint complying with requirements in Section Pr_30_31_76-

Façade Sealants.
7. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mock-ups may become part of

the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
a. Visual mock up shall be erected to
1) Review and finalize the material and finishes selection.
2) Review and finalize jointing and interfacing details.
8. Submit location, size, and other requirements for visual mock-up, based on
agreement with the Architect. Unless otherwise required by the Client, the mock-up
shall be erected on the actual site.
9. Submit diagram drawings describing the entire mock-up for discussion on the design
meeting. Diagrammatic shall, as a minimum, show
a. The extent of mock-up
b. Overall sizing of profiles and interfacing details
c. Finishes including type and colour.

10. This mock-up shall be approved by the Client and Architect, prior to ordering of
materials. Procurement of materials and fabrication works carried out without
approval of the visual mock-up will be at the Façade and GFRC Specialist Sub-
Contractor's own risk and may result in abortive work.
a. Façade and GFRC Specialist Sub-Contractor to arrange for the project team and
Façade Consultant to view the visual mock-up.
b. Shall repeat viewings of the visual mock-up at a later date be required, the time
charge of the Façade Consultant shall be paid.
c. The visual mock-up will be removed and disposed of if directed.
A. GFRC System shall comply with project conditions as stipulated Section 01 40 50- Façade
Quality Requirements.
B. Installation shall be carried out in environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and
ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results.
A. The first 4 GFRC panels installation of each system type shall be inspected as quality
benchmark. Panels horizontal and vertical joints to be visible for alignment check.
B. The Façade and GFRC Specialist Sub-Contractor shall give notice and hold further works
until the benchmark is signed off. The Façade and GFRC Specialist Sub-Contractor shall
arrange site access.
C. The approved benchmark shall be protected and used as a Quality Benchmark (in terms of
quality, materials, and workmanship) for the remainder of the Works. The protection shall be
removed and replaced when directed or damaged.
A. General.
1. Panels skins shall be supported and shall not be subjected to any loads during
storage or transport.
2. Protective separation materials shall be provided at points of contact. All blocks,

packing and protective materials shall not cause damage staining or any
disfigurement of the panels.
3. Staggered and uneven blocking is not permitted to prevent risk of deformation and
cracks to panels.
B. Handle and transport GFRC panels to avoid damage.
1. Place non-staining resilient spacers between panels.
2. Support panels on non-staining material during shipment.
3. Protect panels from dirt and damage during handling and transport.
C. Store GFRC panels to protect from contact with soil, staining, and physical damage.
1. Store panels at sheltered locations to prevent any staining and damage.
2. Store panels with non-staining resilient supports in same positions as when

transported.
3. Store panels on firm, level, and smooth surfaces.
4. Place stored panels so identification marks are clearly visible.
1.13 SEQUENCING
A. All panels shall be demarcated to allow for full traceability of materials, fabrication, testing
and assembly process.
B. Demarcation shall be unique to each panel.
C. Demarcation of each panel, along with all associate information for full traceability of
information relating to each panel, shall be kept for 10 years.
1.14 WARRANTY
A. See Section For base warranty requirements, refer to Section 01 40 50- Façade Quality
Requirements
B. Colour Retention: No fading or colour change more than 5 Hunter colour difference units,
calculated in accordance with ASTM D2244.
C. System Warranty: Provide joint written warranty by manufacturers and installer on the works
for a 20-year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
D. Warranty: Warranty Period: The manufacturer warrants that the delivered material supplied
will conform to samples and to specifications and will be free from defects in workmanship
or material under normal use and conditions. Should defects, attributable to the
manufacturer, appear within this period, the manufacturer has the option of replacing or
repairing the defective material subject to approval by the Employer’s Representatives.
1. Warrantees to commence from the day of issuance of the clients taking over
certificate for the works.
E. Defects include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, puncturing, flaking.
2. Deterioration of framing and accessory metals and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
3. Failure to comply with the performance requirements as stated in this specification

and the Façade Performance Requirements set out in the Façade drawing package.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturer/Supplier of materials shall be registered with local civil defence with valid
license.
B. Experienced Manufacturer having successfully completed a minimum of eight previous
projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special
requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Components: Obtain components from authorized distributors.
D. To be NEOM approved manufacturers/suppliers.
A. For base design criteria, refer to 01 40 50_Façade Quality Requirements.

B. Façade and GFRC Specialist Sub-Contractor shall work with Main Contractor and all trades
under Main Contractor to provide a coordinated design that meets required performance as
stipulated by the most onerous conditions of Project Specifications. All testing and required
verification to justify performance shall be provided.
C. The Façade and GFRC Specialist Sub-Contractor shall include all labour, materials, tools,
equipment, and services required to manufacture, deliver, furnish, and install all items
necessary for the proper execution as required by job conditions to provide a complete
installation.
D. Façade and GFRC Specialist Sub-Contractor is responsible for samples, preparation and
submittal of Working Drawings and calculations, for review by the design team. Façade and
GFRC Specialist Sub-Contractor’s final engineered design shall be based on mutually
agreed upon design as submitted by Façade and GFRC Specialist Sub-Contractor for review
and acceptance by Architect or Façade Consultant.
A. Mold materials:
1. Moulds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free,
that will provide continuous and true GFRC surfaces; nonreactive with GFRC and
capable of producing required finish surfaces.
a. Mould-Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid-release agent that will not bond
with, stain, or adversely affect GFRC surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface
or joint treatments of GFRC.
2. Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement, and configuration indicated.
Provide solid backing and form supports to ensure that form liners remain in place
during GFRC application. Use with manufacturer's recommended liquid-release
agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect GFRC surfaces and will not
impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of GFRC.
3. Surface Retarder: Chemical liquid set retarder capable of temporarily delaying

hardening of newly placed GFRC face mix to depth of reveal specified.
B. GFRC Materials:
1. All materials used shall be provided by one manufacturer using one brand, type, and
colour throughout the project. For instance, cement shall be from one supply and

manufacturing source.
2. GFRC supplied, shall as a minimum meet, the following requirements.

a. Spray Method: Grade 18 and 18P
b. Premix Method: Grade 10 and 10P
c. Extreme Dimensional Variations: Max 0.6-1.2mm/m
d. Water Adsorption: Max 5-11%
e. Minimum bulk dry density: 1800kg/m3
f. Minimum wet bulk density: 2000kg/m3
3. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150; Type I, II, or III.

a. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, use white of same type, brand, and
source throughout GFRC production.
b. Metakaolin: ASTM C 618, Class N.
Cement shall be used in the order of age and as soon as possible, or maximum within
a week of delivery, to minimize effects of strength lost due to age.
4. Glass Fibres: Alkali-resistant continuous filament fibre developed and formulated to

have high strength retention in hydraulic cement environments. Fibres shall have a
minimum zirconia content of 16%, 25mm to 50mm long, specifically produced for use
in GFRC, and complying with PCI MNL 128 and 130.
5. Sand: Washed and dried silica, complying with composition requirements in ASTM
C 144; passing No. 20 sieve with a maximum of 2% passing No. 100 sieve.
6. Facing Aggregate: ASTM C 33, except for gradation, and PCI MNL 130, 6mm
maximum size.
a. Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts with cement or
causes staining; to match sample.
b. Fine aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand with a maximum of 5 percent passing
a No. 100 sieve and a maximum of 3 percent passing a no. 200 sieve.
7. Colouring Admixture: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments, or

coloured water- reducing admixtures, temperature stable, nonfading, and alkali
resistant.
8. Water: Potable; clean and free from deleterious matter that may affect colour stability,
setting, or strength of GFRC and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 130 and
ASTM C1602.
9. Polymer-Curing Admixture: Acrylic thermoplastic copolymer dispersion complying

with PCI MNL 130.
10. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, containing not more than 0.1% chloride
ions.
11. Sealer: Sealer shall be adopted to reduce moisture adsorption and efflorescence.
Sealer used shall be water compatible with based GFRC substrate, and vapour
permeable. Area of application of sealer shall not result in any staining of GFRC.
C. Anchors, connectors and miscellaneous materials:
1. Panel Anchor Clips: ASTM A 666, Type 316, of grade suitable for application.
2. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM F593, Alloy 316, hex-head bolts, and studs;
stainless- steel nuts; and flat, stainless-steel washers.

a. Lubricate threaded parts of stainless-steel bolts with an anti-seize thread lubricant
during assembly.
3. Stainless-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 276, with minimum mechanical properties

of PCI MNL 117, Table 3.2.3.
4. Panel fixation system to be designed to allow for individual panels replacement.

D. Panel frame materials:
1. Cold-Formed Steel Framing: Conform to PCI MNL 128 and Manufacturer's standard
C-shaped steel studs, complying with AISI's "North American Specification for the
Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members", whichever is more onerous and
shall be minimum uncoated steel thickness of 1.25mm, with stiffened flanges, U-
shaped steel track, and of the following steel sheet:
a. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653M, structural-steel sheet, Z275 zinc coating,
of grade required by structural performance of framing.
2. Steel Channels and Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M, finished as follows:

a. Organic Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-Paint 20 on surfaces prepared to comply with
SSPC- SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
E. GFRC Mixes:
1. Face Mix: Proportion face mix of Portland cement, sand, facing aggregates, and
admixtures to comply with design requirements.
2. Polymer-Curing Admixture: 6 to 7% by weight of polymer-curing admixture solids to

dry Portland cement.
3. Air content: 8 to 10 percent as per ASTM C185.
4. Colouring Admixture: Not to exceed 10% of cement weight.
F. Finishes:
1. Finish exposed-face surfaces of GFRC as follows to match approved design

reference sample and mock-ups. Panel faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, or
other obvious defects.
2. Finishes - Refer to Architectural Package for detailed finishing requirements:
3. Exposed faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners,
including false joints, shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed-face
surfaces of GFRC to match approved design reference sample and mock-ups and
as follows:
a. As-Cast-Surface Finish: Provide custom surfaces as determined by the architect as
part of the selection sample process for acceptable custom surface, air voids, sand
streaks, and honeycomb, with uniform colour and texture.
b. Textured-Surface Finish: Impart by custom form liners as determined by the architect
as part of the selection sample process.
c. Retarded Finish: Use chemical-retarding agents applied to concrete forms and
washing and brushing procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix
surfaces after form removal.
d. Sand- or Abrasive-Blast Finish: Use abrasive grit, equipment, application techniques,
and cleaning procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces.
e. Acid-Etched Finish: Use acid and hot-water solution equipment, application

techniques, and cleaning procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix
surfaces.
f. Graphic Concrete Pattern: Custom graphic concrete pattern per panel as determined
by the architect.
g. Colour: Custom colour determined by the architect as part of the selection sample
process.
h. Aggregate: Custom aggregate colour and size as determined by the architect as part
of the selection sample process.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Panel Frame Fabrication:
1. Welding shall conform to AWS D1.1, 1.2, and 1.3, as applicable.
2. Welding electrode shall match based metal.
3. Fabricate panel frames and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with
components securely fastened, according to Working Drawings and requirements in
this Section.
a. Fabricate panel frames using jigs or templates.
b. Cut cold-formed metal framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
c. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding. Comply with AWS D1.3
requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and
methods used in correcting welding work.
d. Weld flex, gravity, and seismic anchors to panel frames.
4. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies, if necessary, to withstand handling,

delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies in a manner that prevents
damage or significant distortion.
5. Galvanizing Repair: Touch up accessible damaged galvanized surfaces according

to ASTM A 780.
6. Painting Repair: Touch up damaged painted surfaces using same primer.
B. Mold Fabrication:
1. Construct molds that will result in finished GFRC complying with profiles, dimensions,
and tolerances indicated, without damaging GFRC during stripping. Construct molds
to prevent water leakage and loss of cement paste.
a. Coat contact surfaces of molds with a form-release agent.
2. Place form liners accurately to provide the finished surface texture indicated. Provide
solid backing and supports to maintain the stability of liners during GFRC application.
Coat form liner with form-release agent.
3. Locate, place, and secure flashing reglets accurately.
C. GFRC Fabrication:
1. Proportioning and Mixing: For backing mix, meter sand/cement slurry and glass
fibres to spray head at rates to achieve design mix proportions and glass-fibre
content according to PCI MNL 130 procedures.
2. Spray Application: Comply with general procedures as follows:

a. Spray or place face mix in thickness indicated on Working Drawings.

b. Proceed with spraying backing mix before face mix has set, using procedures that
produce a uniform thickness and even distribution of glass fibres and matrix.
c. Consolidate backing mix by rolling or other technique to achieve complete
encapsulation of glass fibres and compaction.
d. Measure thickness with a pin gage or other acceptable method at least once for each
0.5 m² of panel surface. Take not less than six measurements per panel.
3. Hand form and consolidate intricate details, incorporate formers, or infill materials,
and over spray before material reaches initial set to ensure complete bonding.
4. Attach panel frame to GFRC before initial set of GFRC backing, maintaining a
minimum clearance of 13mm from GFRC backing, and without anchors protruding
into GFRC backing.
5. Build up homogeneous GFRC bonding pads over anchor feet, maintaining a

minimum thickness of 13mm over tops of anchor feet, before initial set of GFRC
backing.
6. Inserts and Embedment: Build up homogeneous GFRC bosses or bonding pads over
inserts and embedment’s to provide sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply
with design requirements.
7. Curing: Employ initial curing method that will ensure sufficient strength for removing
units from mould. Comply with PCI MNL 130 procedures.
8. Panel Identification: Mark each GFRC panel to correspond with identification mark
on Working Drawings. Mark each panel with its casting date.
9. GFRC panels shall be designed considering loads during manufacturing and delivery
to site and must ensure no structural damage and permanent deformation.
D. Fabrication Tolerances:
1. Manufacturing Tolerances: Manufacture GFRC panels so each finished unit

complies with PCI MNL 130 for dimension, position, and tolerances.
a. Overall, Height and Width of Units, measured at the Face Adjacent to Mould: As
follows:
b. 3m or less, plus, or minus 3mm.
c. More than 3m, plus or minus 3mm per 3m; 6mm maximum.
d. Edge Return Thickness: Plus 12mm, minus 0mm.
e. Architectural Facing Thickness (min. 3mm): plus 2mm, minus 0mm.
f. Backing Thickness: Plus 5mm, minus 0mm.
g. Panel Depth from Face of Skin to Back of Panel Frame or Integral Rib: Plus 10mm,
minus 6mm.
h. Angular Variation of Plane of Side Mould: Plus, or minus 0.8mm per 75mm of depth
or plus or minus 1.5mm total, whichever is greater.
i. Variation from Square or Designated Skew (Difference in Length of Two Diagonal
Measurements): Plus, or minus 3mm per 3m or plus or minus 6mm total, whichever
is greater.
j. Local Smoothness: 4mm per 3m.
k. Bowing: Not to exceed L/250 unless unit meets erection tolerances using connection
adjustments.
l. Length and Width of Block Outs and Openings within One Unit: Plus, or minus 6mm.
m. Location of Openings within Panel: Plus, or minus 5mm.
n. Maximum Permissible Warpage of One Corner out of the Plane of the Other Three:
1.5mm per 300mm of distance from nearest adjacent corner.

2. Position Tolerances: Measured from datum line locations, as indicated on Working
Drawings.
a. Panel Frame and Track: Plus, or minus 6mm.
b. Flashing Reglets at Edge of Panel: Plus, or minus 6mm.
c. Inserts: Plus, or minus 13mm.
d. Special Handling Devices: Plus, or minus 75mm.
e. Location of Bearing Devices: Plus, or minus 6mm.
f. Blackouts: Plus, or minus 6mm.
3. Panel Frame Tolerances: As follows:

a. Vertical and Horizontal Alignment: 6mm per 3m.
b. Spacing of Framing Member: Plus, or minus 10mm.
c. Squareness of Frame: Difference in length of diagonals of 10mm.
d. Overall Size of Frame: Plus, or minus 10mm.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality-Control Testing: Establish and maintain a quality-control program for manufacturing

GFRC panels according to PCI MNL 130.
1. Test materials and inspect production techniques.
2. Quality-control program shall monitor glass-fibre content, spray rate, unit weight,
product physical properties, anchor pull-off and shear strength, and curing period and
conditions.
3. At the beginning of each shift: Slurry consistency slump tests shall be conducted or
provide a meter reading at mixer. Test results and recordings shall be provided upon
request.
4. Slurry Unit Weight test to ASTM C138 shall be performed once per day prior to the
start of production, along with slurry temperature readings. Test results and
recordings shall be provided upon request.
5. Spray Flow Rate (Bucket Test) and Fibre Roving chopping rate (Bag Test) check
shall be conducted daily before start of production and after extended shutdown, to
determine Fibre Content. Test results and recordings shall be provided upon
request.
6. AR Glass fibre test shall be conducted in accordance with BS EN 1170-2 or GRCA

requirements, at least once per day per spray station.
7. Prepare test specimens and test according to ASTM C 1228, PCI MNL 130, and PCI
MNL 128 procedures.
8. Compressive tests shall be conducted to ASTMC39.
9. Test GFRC inserts and anchors according to ASTM C 1230 to validate design values.
A minimum of 15 tests shall be conducted for each embedment configuration.
Maximum standard deviation of test results shall not be greater than 10%. Design
shall be based on lowest test result. As a minimum, the following tests shall be
conducted.
a. Tension Bonding Tests
b. Shear test
10. Produce test boards, shall be sprayed alongside the same way as project panels for
which it represents. Test boards shall be prepared at a rate not less than one per

work shift per operator for each spray machine and for each mix design.
a. For each test board, determine glass-fibre content according to ASTM C 1229. For
Alkali Resistant glass fibre content, tests shall be conducted once per day per spray
station, as a minimum.
b. For Bulk Density, water adsorption, porosity tests, shall be carried out once monthly,
in accordance ASTM A948.
c. For compressive strength based on ASTM C39/C39M.
d. For Tensile, Flexural Strength and Modulus of Rupture tests based on ASTM C947/
ASTM C1230, the tests shall be, minimally conducted at the following frequency on 7,
14 and 28 days and Not less than 40 samples to determine the characteristic Values
and Be aged tested to ASTM C1560 prior to structural tests, and At a frequency no
less than twice a week during production per spray station or every 10 tons of GFRC
produced, whichever is greater.
e. Premix: Once per week per mixer or every 10 tons of GFRC produced, whichever is
greater.
f. Shear Tests
1) Interlaminar
2) In plane Shear
g. Anchor tests and weld tests shall be conducted as required in Section 01 40
50_Facade Quality Requirements. Where single test board fails to meet the minimum
design criteria, GFRC at risk shall be those produced between the previous comply
board and the next complying board. GFRC produced and represented by the failed
testing shall be rejected and shall not be used for the project.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine structure and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare and clean all surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install clips, and other accessories required for connecting GFRC panels to supporting
members and backup materials.
B. Lift GFRC panels and install without damage.
C. Install GFRC panels level, plumb, square, and in alignment. Provide temporary supports and
bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment of panels until permanent
connections are completed.
D. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width.
E. Remove projecting hoisting devices.
F. Connect GFRC panels in position by bolting or welding, or both, as indicated on Working
Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as possible after
connecting is completed.
G. Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1/D1.1M, AWS D1.3 and AWS D1.6 requirements
for welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
H. Protect GFRC panels from damage by field welding or cutting operations, and provide non-
combustible shields as required.
I. At bolted connections, use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent loosening
of nuts.
A. Erect GFRC panels to comply with the following noncumulative tolerances:
1. Plan Location from Building Grid Datum: Plus, or minus 6mm.
2. Top Elevation from Nominal Top Elevation: As follows:

a. Exposed Individual Panel: Plus, or minus 6mm.
b. Nonexposed Individual Panel: Plus, or minus 13mm.
c. Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 6mm.
d. Nonexposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 13mm.
3. Support Elevation from Nominal Elevation: As follows:

a. Maximum Low: 13mm.
b. Maximum High: 6mm.
4. Maximum Plumb Variation over the Lesser of Height of Structure or 100 Feet: 25mm.

5. Plumb in Any 3m of Element Height: 6mm.
6. Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Edges: 4mm.
7. Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Faces: 4mm.
8. Face Width of Joint: As follows (governs over joint taper):

a. Panel Dimension 6000mm or Less: Plus, or minus 4mm.
b. Panel Dimension More Than 6000mm: Plus, or minus 8mm.
c. Maximum Joint Taper: 6mm.
d. Joint Taper in 3m: 4mm.
9. Opening within panel face: +/- 5mm.
10. Location of opening within panel: +/- 3mm.
11. Differential Bowing, as Erected, between Adjacent Members of Same Design: 6mm.
A. Throughout the installation, the Façade and GFRC Specialist Sub-Contractor must establish
and maintain an inspection procedure to assure compliance of the installed GFRC with
contract requirements. Non-compliant work must be removed and replaced or corrected in
an approved manner.
B. The inspection procedures, from acceptance of deliveries through the installation of sealants
and final acceptance must be performed by qualified inspector trained by the manufacturer.
No start of work on the GFRC erection is allowed unless the inspector is present at the job
site.
3.6 REPAIRS
A. Repair will be permitted provided structural adequacy of GFRC panel and appearance are
not impaired, as approved by the Client.
B. Mix patching materials and repair GFRC so cured patches blend with colour, texture, and
uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces.
C. Prepare and repair accessible damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint
according to ASTM A 780.
D. Wire brush, clean, and paint accessible weld areas on prime-painted components with same
type of shop primer.
E. Remove and replace damaged GFRC panels when repairs do not comply with requirements.
3.7 CLEANING & PROTECTION
A. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to GFRC manufacturer's written

instructions. Clean soiled GFRC surfaces with detergent and water, using soft fibre brushes
and sponges, and rinse with clean water.
B. Waste Management Separate and dispose of waste in accordance with the Project’s Waste
Management Plan.
END OF SECTION 03 49 00

SECTION 05 12 10 – FAÇADE STRUCTURAL FRAMING
Contents
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
1.5 LOCAL REFERENCE STANDARDS SUBMITTALS
1.7 FAÇADE DESIGN CRITERIA BENCHMARK INSTALLATION
1.8 MATERIAL AND ACCESSORIES DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.9 COORDINATION
1.10 WARRANTY
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA
2.2 SUPPORT STEELWORK
2.4 FABRICATION
2.5 FINISHES
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.6 PROTECTION
3.7 CLEANING
SECTION 05 12 10 - FAÇADE STRUCTURAL FRAMING

05 12 10 Façade Structural Framing
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Description
1. Finished Façade Structural steel framing members for façades systems.
2. Connections.
3. Base plates, shear stud connectors.
4. Grouting under base plates.
5. Testing and quality control.
B. Related Sections
5. APPENDICES
to:

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
Q. SBC: Saudi Building Code(s).
requirements shall be complied. Consult with Project Engineer and Consultant for final decision
for code compliance.
A. Local (country/ State / Province )civil defence and building authority guidelines.
B. AWS Codes and Standards.
C. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; 2011.
D. AESS – Architectural Exposed Structural Steel Requirements, AISC.
E. ASTM A90 - Standard Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles
with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings.
F. ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products.
G. ASTM A143 - Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip
Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement.
H. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) On Iron and Steel
Hardware.
I. ASTM A239 - Standard Practice for Locating the Thinnest Spot in a Zinc (Galvanized)

Coating on Iron or Steel Articles.
J. ASTM A283 - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon
Steel Plates.
K. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium- Nickel
Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications;
2016.
L. ASTM A370 - Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel
Products.
M. ASTM A480/A480M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat- Rolled
Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 2016a.
N. ASTM A384 - Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During
Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies.
O. ASTM A385 - Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip).
P. ASTM A505 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-
Rolled, General Requirements.
Q. ASTM A568 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-
Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements.
R. ASTM A572 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
Structural Steel.
S. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless-
Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.
T. ASTM A1030 - Standard Practice for Measuring Flatness Characteristics of Steel Sheet
Products.
U. ASTM A1058 - Standard Test Methods for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products—Metric.
V. ASTM B6 - Standard Specification for Zinc.
W. ASTM B633-07 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and
Steel.
X. ASTM B244 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Anodic Coatings on
Aluminium and Of Other Nonconductive Coatings on Nonmagnetic Basis Metals with Eddy-
Current Instruments.
Y. ASTM E894-88 (2010) Standard Test Method for Anchorage of Permanent Metal Railing
Systems and Rails for Buildings.
Z. ASTM E935-13e1 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing
Systems and Rails for Buildings.
AA. ASTM E1558 - Standard Guide for Electrolytic Polishing of Metallographic Specimens;
09(2014).
BB. BS 1449-1.1 - Steel plate, sheet, and strip. Carbon and carbon-manganese plate, sheet,
and strip. General specification; 1991.
CC. BS 4479-2 - Design of articles that are to be coated. Recommendations for electroplated
and autocatalytic coatings; 1990.
DD. BS 4479-3 - Design of articles that are to be coated. Recommendations for conversion
coatings; 1990.
EE. BS 4842 - Specification for liquid organic coatings for application to aluminium alloy
extrusions, sheet, and preformed sections for external architectural purposes, and for the
finish on aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed sections coated with liquid
organic coatings; 1984.

FF. BS 4479-1 - Design of articles that are to be coated. General recommendations; 1990.
GG. BS 7079 - General introduction to standards for preparation of steel substrates before
application of paints and related products; 2009.
HH. BS EN ISO 1461 - Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles.
Specifications and test methods; 2009.
II. BS EN ISO 1519 - Paints and varnishes. Bend test (cylindrical mandrel); 2011.
JJ. BS EN ISO 2081 - Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Electroplated coatings of zinc with
supplementary treatments on iron or steel; 2008.
KK. BS EN ISO 9712 - Non-destructive testing. Qualification and certification of NDT personnel;
2012.
LL. BS EN ISO 14732 - Welding personnel. Qualification testing of welding operators and weld
setters for mechanized and automatic welding of metallic materials; 2013.
MM. BS EN ISO 9606-1 - Qualification testing of welders. Fusion welding. Steels;2013.
NN. BS EN 287-1 - Qualification test of welders. Fusion welding. Steels; 2011.
OO. BS EN 1993-1-1 - Eurocode 3. Design of steel structures. General rules and rules for
buildings; 2005+A1:2014.
PP. BS EN 1993-1-10 - Eurocode 3. Design of steel structures. Material toughness and through-
thickness properties; 2005.
QQ. BS EN 1993-1-5 - Eurocode 3. Design of steel structures. Plated structural elements; 2006.
RR. BS EN 1993-1-8 - Eurocode 3. Design of steel structures. Design of joints; 2005.
SS. BS EN 10025-1 - Hot rolled products of structural steels. General technical delivery
conditions; 2004.
TT. BS EN 10056-1 - Specification for structural steel equal and unequal angles. Dimensions;
1999.
UU. BS EN 10210-2 - Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain steels.
Tolerances, dimensions, and sectional properties; 2006.
VV. BS EN 10021 - General technical delivery conditions for steel products; 2006.
WW. BS EN 10296-1 - Welded circular steel tubes for mechanical and general engineering
purposes. Technical delivery conditions. Non-alloy and alloy steel tubes; 2003.
XX. BS EN 10297-1 - Seamless circular steel tubes for mechanical and general engineering
purposes. Technical delivery conditions. Non-alloy and alloy steel tubes; 2003.
YY. BS EN 10296-2 - Steel tubes for precision applications. Technical delivery conditions.
Welded cold sized tubes; 2005.
ZZ. BS EN 10305-1 - Steel tubes for precision applications. Technical delivery conditions.
Seamless cold drawn tube; 2002.
AAA. BS EN 10305-2 - Steel tubes for precision applications. Technical delivery conditions.
Welded cold drawn tubes; 2002.
BBB. BS EN 10305-3 - Steel tubes for precision applications. Technical delivery conditions.
Welded cold sized tubes; 2002.
CCC. BS EN 10305-5 - Steel tubes for precision applications - Technical delivery conditions.
Welded and cold sized square and rectangular tubes; 2003.
DDD. BS EN 10143 - Continuously hot-dip coated steel sheet and strip. Tolerances on dimensions
and shape; 2006.
EEE. BS EN 10346 - Continuously hot-dip coated steel flat products for cold forming technical

delivery conditions; 2015.
FFF. BS EN ISO 12944-2 - Paints and varnishes - Corrosion protection of steel structures by
protective coating systems - Part 2: Classification of environments; 2015.
GGG. BS EN ISO 12944-4: Paints and varnishes — Corrosion protection of steel structures by
protective paint systems — Part 4: Types of surfaces and surface preparation.
HHH. BS EN 13438 - Paints and varnishes. Powder organic coatings for hot dip galvanized or
sherardised steel products for construction purposes.
III. EN 1011-1 Welding — Recommendations for welding of metallic materials.
JJJ. EN 1090 - Execution of steel structures and aluminium structures.
KKK. ISO 8501 - Corrosion Protection of Steel Structures by Painting.
LLL. SBC 201 General
MMM. SBC 302 Structural - Construction
1.5 LOCAL REFERENCE STANDARDS SUBMITTALS

A. See 01 40 50_Façade Quality Requirements, for submittal requirements and procedures.
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer data sheets for all items.
2. Certificates:
a. Mill certificates.
b. Paint testing.
c. Welder’s Qualifications.
d. Weld certificates and test results Quality Assurance Records Supplier and trade
warranties.
C. Calculations:
1. System calculations.
2. Connection’s calculations.
3. Embed/anchor’s calculations.
D. Shop drawings:
1. Provide all drawings necessary to fully detail the support system(s) including all
typical and non-typical details.
E. Samples for material selection:
1. Two samples, 300 mm long, paint coated steel in each RAL colour, as requested by
the Architect. These samples are for colour finish selection only, hence a section
similar in material and size to the project required section may be used.
2. Two samples, 300 mm long of remedial coating, in selected RAL colour, as requested
by the Architect.
F. Approval samples:
1. Two samples, 300 mm long, minimum samples of steel built-up sections of each type
in mill finish, to demonstrate proposed weld quality.
2. Two samples of samples of each of the exposed and non-exposed weld connections.
3. Two samples minimum samples of each bolt, anchor, screw, pin, rivet, and other
fixing.
4. Two samples minimum samples of each embed or cast in.
5. Two samples minimum samples of each custom-made item, if any, taken from first
production.
G. Additional project specific items, as reasonably required.

H. Maintenance Data:
I. Maintenance materials:
1. Touch-up paint compatible with the project coatings and approved by the supplier(s)
of the project coatings to be kept in stock, one-litter canned spray paint for each 2000
m2 gross painted area.

A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with BS EN 1993 Design of steel
structures.
B. All coating shall be carried out by ISO 9001 qualified coaters.
C. Refer to Section 01 40 50 – Façade Quality Requirements for welding and welders’
certification requirements.
D. All fixings shall have traceable origin, labelled boxes, relevant certificates. The labelling or
stamping shall indicate size, grade, manufacturer.
E. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications:
F. Company specializing in manufacturing and installing steel structures with minimum 15
years of documented experience of projects in similar scale and quality.
1.7 FAÇADE DESIGN CRITERIA BENCHMARK INSTALLATION

A. The first 20 m2 of installation of each system type shall be inspected as quality benchmark.
B. The Main Contractor with his Façade Subcontractor and/or Façade Specialist Sub
Contractor shall give notice and hold further works until the benchmark is signed off. The
Main Contractor shall arrange site access.
quality, materials, and workmanship) for the remainder of the Works. The protection shall
be removed and replaced when directed or damaged.
D. Refer to finishes Section within this specification for quality and installation benchmark for
finish application.
1.8 MATERIAL AND ACCESSORIES DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect finished steel surfaces with wrapping.
1. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to steel when exposed to
sunlight or weather.
2. Submit protect wrapping intended to be used for the project for approval. Replace
protective wrapping within the time frame directed by the manufacturer.
B. Deliver products in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.
1. Protect finishes by applying heavy duty removable plastic film during production.
2. Package for protection against transportation damage.
3. Provide markings to identify components consistently with drawings. Exercise care
in unloading, storing, and installing members to prevent surface damage.
C. Store products protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature
conditions recommended by manufacturer.
1. Store in well ventilated space out of direct sunlight.
2. Protect from moisture and condensation with tarpaulins or other suitable weather
tight covering installed to provide ventilation.

3. Store at a slope to ensure positive drainage of any accumulated water.
4. Do not store in any enclosed space where ambient temperature can exceed 49 °C.
5. Avoid contact with any other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other
surface damage.
D. Rejected material shall be clearly marked (large red spray-painted X) and kept separate
until disposed.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Convene a conference approximately two weeks before scheduled commencement of the
Work. Attendees shall include Architect, Contractor and trades involved. Agenda shall
include schedule, responsibilities, critical path items and approvals.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Section 01 40 50 – Façade Quality Requirements, for base warranty requirements.

PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA

A. See Section 01 40 50 – Façade Quality Requirements, for base design criteria.
B. Refer to "Façade system design criteria" within each specification section for additional
design requirements.
C. Vertical Application.
1. Aluminium or steel framing:
a. Imposed/Live load and/or Wind load.
1) Deflection of framing elements shall not exceed
2) L/200 of the span for spans less than 3 m.
3) 5 mm + L/300 for spans in between 3 m and 7.5 m.
4) L/250 of the span for spans larger than 7.5 m.
2. Horizontal application.
a. Dead loads.
1) Out of plane deflection shall be limited to:
- L/360 or
- 5 mm or
- To be considered with grading as required to prevent water
stagnation on overhead glazing and whichever is most onerous.
b. Imposed/Live load and/or Wind load.
1) Out of plane deflection shall be limited to L/250 or 20 mm, whichever
is the lesser.
c. Deflection limit for cantilever frame shall be limited to L/175 or 20 mm, whichever is
lesser.
d. Deflection of louvers/ bris soleil shall be limited to L/90 or 30 mm whichever is the
lesser.
e. Deflection limit for metal balustrades to be L/60 for wind load and L/65 in case of live
load.
2.2 SUPPORT STEELWORK

A. Refer to relevant system drawings for details.
B. Structural steelwork shall be designed to withstand loading stipulated in Section 01 40 50
– Façade Quality Requirements and Section 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminium Curtain wall and
related section stipulated in Technical Documentation and relevant codes and standards.
C. Structural steelwork shall be designed to meet deflection criteria as stipulated in in this
section.
D. Supporting steelwork shall include but not be limited to that shown on the contract
drawings.
E. Steel work shall be fabricated/preassembled before delivery to site where possible.
F. Steel work layout to match joint location heights for direct connections via brackets.
G. Supporting steelwork shall allow for building movements and thermal expansion where
required.
H. Steel work shall meet corrosion protection requirements stipulated in Section 01 40 50 –
Façade Quality Requirements.
I. Surface treatment or coating system meant for corrosion prevention, shall be appropriate
for its application. In areas of damage hazard, Main Contract and Façade Subcontractor
shall provide a robust protective system in order to avoid damage to the proposed system

and maintain its corrosion prevention qualities.
J. Where used in areas of high pollutants and adjacent to swimming pools, steel work to meet
corrosion category C5-H High durability in accordance with BS EN ISO 12944-2 when
installed outside the weather seal (air and water) line.
K. Finish for all exposed steel structures to be built as Architectural Exposed Steelwork,
category 3 where access is excess of 6m, category 2 otherwise.
L. Surface treatment shall be suitable for high quality architectural paint coating for visible
steelwork.
M. Where coating system is adopted to provide corrosion resistance, surface preparation to
the mild steel shall be in accordance with requirements as stated by Coating system supplier
but shall at the minimum meet the following requirements.
1. The surface to be coated, shall be clean, dry, free from oil/grease.
2. Surface receiving coating shall be abrasive blast to Class Sa 2.5 to BS EN ISO
12944-4 and ISO 8501.
N. Where coating system is applied on hot dipped galvanized steel, and corrosion protection
is provided hot dipped galvanized, surface preparation of coating shall be coordinated
between galvanizer and coating supplier to ensure performance of the final product.
O. Painting system for steel shall comply with BS EN ISO 12944 class required in this
document.
P. Paint system must be capable of being re-coated in-situ to facilitate future maintenance
and to allow touching up of construction damage to match the performance criteria of the
coating.
Q. On-site welding is not permitted.
R. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC (MAN).
S. Where required an intumescent paint finish shall be provided. Intumescent paint specification
to be based on specifications from Fire Consultant and Structural Engineer.

A. Structural Steel Sections: Shall be designed according to Saudi Building Code and EN
1993.
B. Hot rolled steel: ASTM A505, A370 and ATSM A1058.
C. Hot rolled sections: Requirements per EN 1993.
D. Cold formed pre-galvanized steel sections: Requirements per EN 1993.
E. Steel sheet: ASTM A1031/A1031M and ASTM A568.
F. The use of mild steel is only permitted inside the vapor seal line or where the component is
readily accessible for regular inspection and maintenance and not adjacent to glass.
G. Structural steelwork shall be steel grade S275 (Grade 43) or S355 (Grade 50).
H. Wall thickness of structural components shall not be less than 6 mm.
I. Where mild steel sections or fabrications are hot dip galvanized, the mild steel shall have
a carbon equivalent (calculated by IIW formula) equal to or less than 0.43%. All welding
procedures shall be limited to a maximum carbon equivalent of 0.43%.
J. Weld throat thickness shall not be less than 4 mm.
Stainless Steel Brackets: ASTM A480, A480M, ASTM A666, Grade 316. Surface finish to be
selected to ensure no rusting will occur in exposure to marine environment. Rusting not
acceptable.

K. Non-shrink grout: Dry mix non-shrink cementitious grout with minimum compressive
strength of 40 MPa. Grout below base plate shall entirely fill the gap with no air bubble.
L. Shop and Touch-Up Primer for Steel Components: SSPC-Paint 25, zinc oxide, alkyd,
linseed oil primer.
M. Cast-in Channels: As specified in Section 01 40 50 – Façade Quality Requirements.
N. Fasteners: As specified in Section 01 40 50 – Façade Quality Requirements.
O. Shimming: As specified in Section 01 40 50 – Façade Quality Requirements.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. The Façade Subcontractor/Façade Specialist Subcontractor shall be entirely responsible
for the whole of the façade fabrication and shall ensure that such work is executed by
persons skilled in such fabrication, including all other components and elements to be used
in the works.
B. Commencement of fabrication and placing orders prior to receiving a "B" status from all
relevant Consultants will be at the Façade Subcontractor/Façade Specialist Subcontractor
's own risk.
C. All assemblies shall be fabricated in accordance with the approved working drawings and
in full conformity with the standards specified.
D. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.
E. Carry out weld testing as defined in Section 01 40 50 – Façade Quality Requirements.
F. The Façade Subcontractor/Façade Specialist Subcontractor shall allow for taking all the
necessary precautions to prevent damage cause by contamination, abrasion, or other
marring of surfaces.
G. The Façade Subcontractor/Façade Specialist Subcontractor shall be responsible for any
damage which may be caused to adjacent materials and special care shall be excised to
avoid such damage.
H. The façade subcontractor is responsible for ensuring that all interfacing trades are correctly
coordinated and captured within the shop drawings. Any items missing which cause a visual
impact to the project will be deemed rejected and requiring reworks to rectify.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Hot dip galvanized corrosion protection of mild steel:
1. Preparation: blast cleaning to ASTM A143, ASTM A384, ASTM B6 and ASTMA385
Part A1, grade Sa2 using chilled iron grit grade G24 to give course surface profile,
followed by acid pickling. Blast profile on steel shall be 40-60 microns in depth, and
be of sharp, jagged nature as opposed to "peen" pattern from shot blasting.
2. Hot-dip galvanized finish shall be in accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM A153
Concealed exterior steel: 100 micrometres.
3. Concealed internal steel: 75 micrometres (excluding swimming pool).
B. Regular sampling for Quality Assurance shall be carried out as per BS EN ISO 1461 Table
1.
C. The Contractor shall ensure that the galvanizing system used shall be sufficient to achieve
the design performance specification.
D. Galvanized surfaces which are to receive a subsequent paint finish shall be etch-primed or
pre-treated with a suitable mordant wash system in accordance with the recommendations
of the paint system manufacturer.
E. All scratched on site shall be repaired to meet project corrosion protection requirements.

F. All elements are to be pre-drilled, cut:
1. Electrodeposited zinc corrosion protection of mild steel: Electrodeposition of Zinc
coating Fe/ZN 13 as per ASTM B 633-07.
2. Powder coating: Components to be coated must comply with BS 4479-1, BS 4479-
2, BS 4479-3. Minimum dry film thickness of 60 microns, when measured in
accordance with ASTM B244. Powder coating shall not rely on to impart corrosion
protection properties.
3. Sampling to be in accordance with ASTM D7803-19 or BS EN 13438, at 4 hour
maximum intervals.
4. All material must have phosphate conversion pre-treatment fully in accordance with
the requirements of the powder manufacturer. Chromate pre-treatments are not
acceptable for this project. The conversion coating shall be thoroughly rinsed with
demineralized water prior to degassing of the metal in accordance with BS EN 13438.
5. The applicator must maintain daily detailed records relating to the condition of the
pre-treatment tanks including a daily assessment of the weight of surface conversion
coating. The conductivity of the final drains off from components exiting the final
demineralized water rinse tank shall be less than 100 μ51em" at 20 °C.
6. The metal surface after the conversion coating pre-treatment and prior to application
of the polyester powder coat must be free from dust or powder deposits. The
application of the finish shall be carried out immediately after degassing.
7. Substrate thickness is to withstand oven curing without significant distortion.
8. The coating applicator must exercise control on the temperature of the ovens,
bearing in mind that metal and not air temperature is of importance in addition to the
storing time.
9. Records of these conditions shall be kept and shall be available for inspection in the
event of a dispute as to the quality.
10. Ensure that deflection under the design load or thermal movement of background
metal of components will not be detrimental to powder coating.
11. It is not possible to carry out impact testing on production samples of customer
material. To confirm that an adequate chemical reaction has taken place during
curing a solvent test based upon part 15 of BS 4842 must be used for the purpose of
acceptance inspection.
G. Wet Paint system for Internal Steelwork: BS EN ISO 12944-2.
1. Acrylic polysiloxane system shall be used and tested under 10,000 hours QUV
resistance with gloss retention of above 50% as measured over this time period.
2. Coating system shall show no cracking or disbandment, when subjected to a 3/8th
inch mandrel bend test, in accordance with BS EN ISO 1519, after 28 days
weathering in a C3-H environment.
H. Wet Paint system for External Steelwork: BS EN ISO 12944-2.
1. All steelwork for external applications to be coated over hot dip galvanized steel.
2. Hot dip galvanized steel to be prepared by sweep blast cleaning to surface roughness
"fine (G)".
I. Main Contractor and his Façade Subcontractor/Façade Specialist Subcontractor shall
demarcate a specific area for installation which is coated under direct supervision of the
coating supplier as a benchmark for the application and performance of the coating.
J. The Façade Subcontractor and system supplier shall give a notice and hold further works
until the benchmark is signed off. The Façade Subcontractor / Façade Specialist
Subcontractor and system supplier shall arrange site access.
K. Location of approved benchmark installation shall be recorded for future reference.
L. Main Contractor and system supplier shall provide report documenting the following.
1. Date, time of application.
2. Location.

3. Name of attendees and applicators.
4. Photographic records of installation at every step, including any surface preparation.
5. Any remedial works conduct – cause and remedial action.
M. Approved benchmark installation shall remain as part of work and will be used as basis for
acceptance of remaining work.
N. Stainless steel finish: ASTM A240/A240M.
1. Unless indicated otherwise, all visible stainless steel shall have satin brushed, subject
to sample approval by the Architect.
2. Systematic passivating of the weld and heat-affected zone shall be undertaken
immediately after welding.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other related work.
B. Verify that anchorage devices have been properly installed and located.
C. Prior to taking over the work area, survey the completed structures and note where out of
tolerance discrepancy necessitates any action. Highlight these situations and propose
actions coordinate for solution the soonest.
D. Verify that Approved Status A or B documentation is available for the works prior to
installation. Proceed according to Approved documents.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Deliver anchorage items to be cast into concrete or built into masonry to appropriate
installer(s) together with setting templates.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during installation.
B. The Façade Subcontractor/Façade Specialist Subcontractor shall employ only competent
and experienced installers to carry out the curtain walling works. The Façade
Subcontractor/Façade Specialist Subcontractor shall provide and maintain records to
demonstrate the experience and related trainings of their installers.
C. Install works as per Approved Installation Method Statement.
D. Install all components to the arrangement and dimensions indicated and marked on the
shop drawings, within permissible deviations.
E. As installation proceeds, the Main Contractor and Façade Subcontractor/Façade
Specialist Subcontractor shall check the work and record all non-compliance. Remedial
proposals, deviations shall be agreed, approved, and documented.
F. The system and the system components shall not be cut, altered, deformed, shortened,
extended, modified on site without prior permission, documentation, verification, and
approvals.
G. Non-movement joints shall be rigidly secured.
H. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
I. Carry out all the necessary sighting and levelling to ensure all members are installed at
their correct levels, in proper alignment and relationships within the specified tolerances.
J. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
K. All joints must be square, true, and as indicated on the drawings and have allowances
were joint design call for expansion and contraction.
L. Do not install products that are defective, including warped, bowed, dented, and broken
members, and members with damaged finishes.
M. Do not handle or tool products during erection in manner that damages finish, decreases
strength, or results in visual imperfection or failure in performance. Return component parts
that require alteration to shop for re-fabrication, if possible, or for replacement with new
parts.
N. Site repairs are not permitted, but superficial damages may be adjusted with the consent
of the Façade Consultant. When deciding whether the damage was superficial,
consideration shall be given to its extent and location in relation to supports, fixings and

corners. Structural damages will not be allowed to be repaired on site under any
circumstances. Inform the Architect of any damage occurred on site for their consideration
and approval.
O. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired. All touch-up works to follow Approved Method Statement.
P. Separate dissimilar metals: use gasket fasteners, isolation shims, or isolation tape where
needed to eliminate possibility of electrolytic action between metals. Paint finish, powder
coating or anodizing finish will not be acceptable as bimetallic separator.
Q. Site welding is not permitted after glazing, metal cladding, aluminium framing has been
installed.

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 6 mm per story, non-cumulative.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 6 mm.
C. Steel be installed to the tolerances shown above unless façades system design requires
more onerous tolerances, in which case the façade system tolerances shall be used.

A. Refer to Section 01 40 50 – Façade Quality Requirements for base testing requirements.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion.
B. Protection to the façade works, frames, panels, units & elements shall be provided during
storage, transportation, during and after installation.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Ongoing cleaning:
1. Remove any concrete spill from the glazing, and exposed finished metal surfaces
within 10 minutes of the occurrence using a soft cloth.
2. Dust all sides, joints and surfaces of every unit, panel, element immediately prior
to installation at its final location.
3. Surfaces in contact with site-applied sealants shall be prepared according to the
sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.
Preparation includes, but not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
4. Remove any excess sealant by method acceptable to the sealant manufacturer.
Using scrapers is prohibited.
5. Allow for progressively cleaning of the Contract Works and maintain the area of
operations in a tidy fashion.
B. Final cleaning:
1. Remove protective film after installation of joint sealers, after cleaning of adjacent
materials, and immediately prior to completion of work. Do not exceed the
recommended time frame for protective film removal. Do not use metal scrapers,
acids or other removal techniques that may damage the coating of the panels.
2. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with
soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces
clean.
3. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 21 00 – FAÇADE THERMAL INSULATION
Contents
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTED MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
2.3 ACCESSORIES
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
3.4 INSTALLATION - FASTENERS
3.5 INSTALLATION - WATER RESISTANT, MINERAL WOOL, SEMI-RIGID BOARD
INSULATION
3.6 INSTALLATION – MINIRAL WOOL, BOARD SOFFIT INSULATION
3.7 INSTALLATION – MINERAL WOOL BATT INSULATION
3.9 PROTECTION
3.10 CLEANING

07 21 00 Facade Thermal Insulation
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Description
The section describes the following:
1. Thermal Insulation.
2. Accessories.
B. Related Sections
a. 07 42 13_ Metal cladding and screen system
b. 07 44 50_Cement Particle Board
c. 07 93 00_ Facade Sealants
6. APPENDICES
1.3 This specification shall be read in conjunction with any other tender documents including but not
limited to:

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS
A. ISO: International Organization for Standardization.
B. CAD: Computer-aided design.
C. PDF: Portable document format.
D. ICE: Institution of Civil Engineers
E. AAMA: American Aluminium Manufacturers Association.
F. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.
G. BS EN: British European Standard.
H. ISO: International Organization for Standardization.
I. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
J. MEP: Mechanical Electrical and Plumbing.
K. VOC: Volatile organic compounds.
L. QA: Quality Assurance.
M. QC: Quality Control.
N. DLP: Defect liability period.
O. SBC: Saudi Building Code.
The below standards shall be applicable. Where similar requirements are stipulated, most
onerous requirements shall comply.
A. BS EN 13162 - Thermal insulation products for buildings. Factory-made mineral wool (MW)
products. Specification.
B. BS EN 13501-1 - Fire classification of construction products and building elements.
Classification using test data from reaction to fire tests.
C. BS 3958-5 - Thermal insulating materials. Specification for bonded man-made mineral fibre
slabs.
D. EN ISO 354, Acoustics — Measurement of sound absorption in a reverberation room (ISO
354)
E. BS 3638-Method for the measurement of sound absorption coefficients (ISO) in a
reverberation room.
F. BS 874- Methods for Determining thermal insulating properties with definitions of thermal
insulating terms.
G. ASTM C518 – Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
H. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and
Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.
I. BS 874- Methods for Determining thermal insulating properties with definitions of thermal
insulating terms.

J. ASTM E84 (UL723)- Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
K. NFPA 285- Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of
Exterior Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components.
L. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fibre Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
M. ASTM C1104- Standard Test Method for Determining the Water Vapor Sorption of Unfaced
Mineral Fibre Insulation.
N. ASTM C303- Standard Test Method for Dimensions and Density of Preformed Block and
Board–Type Thermal Insulation.
O. ASTM C423- Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption
Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
P. ASTM C1338- Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation
Materials and Facings.
Q. EN 1609 – Thermal insulating products for building applications – Determination of short-
term water adsorption by partial immersion.
R. Local (country/ State / Province) civil defence and building authority guidelines.
S. SBC 201 General
T. SBC 302 Structural - Construction
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Provide as specified in Section 01 30 50 Façade Administrative Requirements.
Include three (3) panels of each type of insulation, minimum of 300 x 300mm in size.
B. Three (3) copies of descriptive literature from the manufacturer of the adhesive proposed.
C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations of each
accessory required.
D. Material Test Reports: Performance test report (including acoustic) and fire test report
performed by a qualified testing agency and statutory approval to the product indicated.
E. Compatibility Test Reports: To all wall substrates and other adjacent materials
F. Statutory Approval: Only non-combustible material, which is approved by local authorities
shall be used.
1. Proper and valid documentation attesting to the approval of the use as part of an
external wall cladding system shall be submitted prior to the installation occurring.
G. Compatibility and Adhesion Test: To any adhesive and plastering coats if it is used.

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by
the manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by an installer
with a minimum of five (5) years of demonstrated experience in installing similar products of
the same type and scope as specified.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials and accessories in insulation manufacturer’s original packaging with
identification labels intact and in sizes to suit the project.

B. Store insulation away from exposure to moisture and in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.

A. See Section 01 40 50 Façade Quality Requirements, for base warranty requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. Supplier of material shall be registered with local civil defense with a valid license.
B. Supplier of material shall have obtained Certificate of compliance from approved
certification body by Local Civil Defense for the proposed system.
C. Manufacturers must comply with the requirements of this section and must be submitted for
approval by the consultant.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Thermal insulation shall be fit for exterior use in rainscreen cavity walls, curtain wall
systems, soffits, and cavity wall systems.
2. Thermal insulation shall be foil-faced, water resistant, rot resistant, mold resistant and
compliant with BS EN 13162, and ASTM C612.
3. The following requirements shall be complied with:
4. Water resistant, considering moisture absorption in accordance with ASTM C1104.
5. Water vapor transmission in accordance with ASTM E96.
6. Fungi resistance with passed classification in accordance with ASTM C1338.
7. Insulation shall be designed for usage as required to meet the maximum thermal
transmission requirement stipulated for the façades and its associated interfaces.
8. Thermal insulation shall comply with the maximum acoustic project’s requirements in
accordance with EN ISO 354.
9. All thermal insulation shall be non-combustible have a fire classification of A1 in
accordance with BS EN 13501 and have a valid certification of compliance from local
fire authorities, where required.
10. Insulation density shall comply with ASTM C303, a minimum density of 60kg/m3 with
a maximum thermal conductivity λ = 0.04W/mK.
11. Dimensional stability and linear shrinkage shall comply with ASTM C356.
12. Insulation Thickness shall comply with the minimum thickness shown on drawings or
as required to meet the specified thermal performance of the building envelope and
its interfacing, whichever is more onerous.
13. The insulation shall not sag, delaminate, or otherwise deteriorate or reduce in
performance due to exposure to sunlight, water, or any other conditions to which it
might be subjected during construction and over its design lifespan. Thermal
insulation aluminium shall be continuous ensuring the permanency of the thermal
line.
14. Insulation Fasteners: Stick clips consisting of impaling pins secured to a base plate,
complete with self-locking washers (retainers) for the impaling pin, and with epoxy
adhesive for adhering the base plate to the substrate or IZ-P plastic stick clips.
15. Fixing pins: galvanized pins for interior use and stainless-steel Type 316 pins for
exterior use.
16. Adhesive: Thixotropic rubber/bitumen liquid emulsion, to BSI 3940 and which cures
to a tough black seamless, flexible waterproof, and vapor-proof membrane and
suitable for adhering insulation to concrete and masonry substrates, and compatible
with air/salt barrier.
17. Insulation and accessories shall comply with local authority requirements, including
civil defense.
18. NFPA 285 test shall be carried out for the whole system for the following cases:
a. If Rigid insulation/foam plastic insulation materials are used on the system.
b. If the insulation height is over 12 meters.
c. The air gap/cavity is more than 25 mm.
A. Plastic Board Rigid Insulation:

1. Rigid thermoset polyisocyanurate (PIR) Insulation board, as a part of the entire
roofing system assembly and the adjacent interfacing details.
a. The blowing agent shall have zero Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) and low Global
Warming Potential (GWP).
b. The material (as well as the roofing assembly) shall be tested against fire (and other
performance requirements as stated in the exterior roofing specifications) and shall be
approved by the local authorities.
c. It shall be mechanically fixed onto the substrate by fasteners, which is a part of the
tested roofing system.
d. Provide thickness as indicated on the drawings and/or as required to achieve the
specified U value (overall).
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Mechanical fasteners in accordance with insulation manufacturer's written
recommendations.
B. Insulation Clips: in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.
C. Adhesive: All-purpose construction adhesive in accordance with insulation manufacturer's
written recommendations.
D. All fasteners and anchors to be in accordance with the following criteria:
1. Fire performance: All fasteners can be only used if it is a part of the successfully
tested specimen in the firestop assembly test.
E. Insulation fixing: Provide proprietary stainless-steel mechanical fastening bracket and
anchors which is a part of the insulation system assembly.
1. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: To fix the mineral-wool board
insulation. Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of
thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place;
and complying with the following requirements: (only to be used in ‘dry zones’) Plate:
Perforated Stainless sheet, 0.762 mm thick by 50 mm square.
2. Spindle: Stainless steel; 2.67 mm (12GA) in diameter; length to suit depth of
insulation indicated.
3. The anchors shall be compatible with the approved perimeter firestop system.
4. Attach the pin by approved structural silicone. Self-adhesive stick pins to support
insulation are not allowed.
F. Driven Fasteners: (for all instances when fixing insulation to block work or concrete)
1. Type: Hammered into insulation or through holes and expands into backing.
2. Material: Non-ferrous metal. No plastic fasteners are allowed.
3. Available Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into Works include, but shall not be limited
to, the following:
a. Hilti
b. Fischer
c. Or approved equivalent

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Ensure surfaces are free of sand, grease, and other deleterious materials.
C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
D. Verify that the insulation boards and adjacent materials are compatible.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
C. Ensure vapour barrier is clean and dry.
D. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapour barrier, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapour barriers or of interfering with insulation attachment.
3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Commencement of work implies acceptance of substrate.
B. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s printed directions, except as otherwise
specified herein.
C. Ensure a uniform, continuous, thermal barrier, air barrier, and vapor barrier effect.
D. Where insulation, air barrier and vapor barriers are to be provided under other sections,
coordinate the Work such that continuity of thermal barrier, air barrier and vapor barrier, in
all cases, is achieved.
E. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls,
coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and
insulation encapsulates piping.
3.4 INSTALLATION - FASTENERS

A. Install insulation fasteners directly to substrate using epoxy adhesive. Support clips in place
until the adhesive has set. Do not apply fasteners to air/water barriers or waterproofing
membranes.
B. Arrange clips at a minimum 300mm centres, both ways, with 2 clips minimum for each full
board width and 4 clips minimum for each board length, or in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Where insulation occurs on the underside of horizontal
construction, provide each clip with a 50mm diameter self-locking washer-type retainer.
3.5 INSTALLATION - WATER RESISTANT, MINERAL WOOL, SEMI-RIGID BOARD INSULATION

A. After insulation fasteners are securely installed, apply a continuous coating of the Fluid
Applied to Air, Vapor, and Water Barrier Membrane System in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendation.
B. Place insulation boards directly on the waterproofing membrane, impaling them on clips
without bending pins. Cut insulation as required to fit snugly to pipes, ducts, and other items
that pierce insulation, and around openings and corners. Butt insulation boards tightly to
one another and stagger joints. Where substrate surface contains design irregularities, cut
out the back of board insulation as required and build up over cut-out areas on the other
side to ensure uniformity of thermal insulation. Ensure that there are no air pockets behind

insulation.
C. If, after installation, insulation is cut, or portions are removed, re-pack with loose insulation
and re-seal the surface using foil tape.
3.6 INSTALLATION – MINIRAL WOOL, BOARD SOFFIT INSULATION

A. Place insulation so that aluminium foil barrier is on the exposed face of boards. Ensure
continuity of foil-barrier over complete coverage of insulation, taping all joints with aluminium
foil tape. Make installation of tape continuous, free of wrinkles and fish mouths, and ensure
that foil tape fully and permanently adheres. Tape joints between the insulation and adjacent
construction.
B. If, after installation, insulation is cut, or portions are removed, re-pack with loose insulation
and re-seal the surface using foil tape.
3.7 INSTALLATION – MINERAL WOOL BATT INSULATION

A. Pack into closures, gaps and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings to maintain a
continuous thermal barrier for the building envelope.

A. Field Inspection:
1. Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for product installation review in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Record and report any inconsistencies from the manufacturer's recommendations
immediately to the Architect and Contractor.
3. Remedial works for the manufacturer’s comments shall be undertaken immediately
to the satisfaction of the manufacturer, works installed in the interim will not be
accepted unless approved by manufacturer.
4. Submit reports to Architect and Contractor within 2 days of visit.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged
products before Substantial Completion.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Progress Cleaning: Perform clean-up as work progresses.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 42 13 – METAL CLADDING AND SCREEN SYSTEM
Contents
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
1.5 SYSTEM WRITEUP
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1.8 MOCK-UP
1.11 WARRANTY
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.4 FABRICATION
2.5 MANUFACTURING AND FABRICATION ACCURACY
2.6 FINISHES
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.6 PROTECTION
3.7 CLEANING

07 42 13 Metal cladding and screen system
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Description
1. Exterior cladding consisting of solid aluminium or metal panel.
2. Metal flashing and trims for Curtain Wall Systems.
3. Infill panels, features, and back pains, as part of curtain walling.
4. Any framing or secondary support, and anchors to the base structure.
B. Related Sections
b. 07 44 50_Cement Particle Board
6. APPENDICES
limited to:

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
A. ISO: International Organization for Standardization.
B. CAD: Computer-aided design.
C. PDF: Portable document format.
D. ICE: Institution of Civil Engineers
E. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
F. AAMA: American Aluminium Manufacturers Association
G. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
H. AISI – American Iron and Steel Institute.
I. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers.
J. AISC (MAN): Steel Construction Manual.
K. AESS: Architectural Exposed Structural Steel.
L. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.
M. AWS: American Welding Society.
N. BS: British Standard.
O. BS EN: British and European Standard.
P. SBC: Saudi Building Code(s).
requirements shall comply.
A. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminium Extrusions and Panels (with Coil
Coating Appendix); 2013.
B. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminium Extrusions and Panels (with Coil
Coating Appendix); 2013.
C. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminium from Shop to Site; 2015.
D. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications; 2016.
E. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
F. ASTM A240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel
Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.
G. ASTM A480/A480M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat- Rolled
Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 2016a.
H. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless-
Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.

I. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Sheet and Plate;
2014.
J. ASTM C297jC297M - Standard Test Method for Flatwise Tensile Strength of Sandwich
Constructions; 2016.
K. ASTM D1781 - Standard Test Method for Climbing Drum Peel for Adhesives;1998
(Reapproved 2012).
L. ASTM D2244 - Standard Practice for Calculation of Colour Tolerances and Colour
Differences from Instrumentally Measured Colour Coordinates; 2016.
M. ASTM D4145 - Standard Test Method for Coating Flexibility of Pre-painted Sheet; 2010.
N. ASTM D4214 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior
Paint Films; 2007 (Reapproved 2015).
O. ASTM D523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss; 2014.
P. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2016.
Q. ASTM E 119- Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
R. AWS D1.6/D1.6M-2017 - Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel.
S. AWS 1.2 – Structural Welding Code.
T. BS 8414-1 - Fire performance of external cladding systems. Test method for non-
loadbearing external cladding systems applied to the masonry face of a building; 2015.
U. BS 8414-2 - Fire performance of external cladding systems. Test method for non-
loadbearing external cladding systems fixed to and supported by a structural steel frame;
2015.
V. BS EN 1999 – Design of Aluminium Structures; 2013
W. BS EN 1993 – Design of Steel Structures; 2005
X. BS EN 13501-1 - Fire classification of construction products and building elements.
Classification using test data from reaction to fire tests; 2007+A1:2009.
Y. BS EN 1396 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Coil coated sheet and strip for general
applications. Specifications; 2015.
Z. BS EN 485-1 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet, strip, and plate. Technical
conditions for inspection and delivery; 2016.BS EN 485-2 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys.
Sheet, strip, and plate. Mechanical properties; 2016.
AA. BS EN 485-2 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet, strip, and plate. Mechanical
properties.
BB. BS EN 485-3 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet, strip, and plate. Tolerances on
dimensions and form for hot-rolled products; 2003.
CC. BS EN 485-4 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet, strip, and plate. Tolerances on
shape and dimensions for cold-rolled products; 1994.
DD. BS EN 515 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Wrought products. Temper designations;
1993.
EE. BS EN 573-1 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Chemical composition and form of wrought
products. Numerical designation system; 2004.
FF. BS EN 573-2 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Chemical composition and form of wrought
products. Chemical symbol-based designation system; 1995.
GG. BS EN 573-3 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Chemical composition and form of wrought
products. Chemical composition and form of products; 2013.

HH. BS EN 10293 - Steel castings. Steel castings for general engineering uses.
II. BS EN 1396 - Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Coil coated sheet and strip for general
applications. Specifications.
JJ. BS EN ISO 1182 - Reaction to fire tests for products. Non-combustibility test;2010.
KK. BS EN ISO 9712 - Non-destructive testing. Qualification and certification of NDT personnel;
2012.
LL. BS EN 1364-3 - Fire resistance tests for non-loadbearing elements. Curtain walling. Full
configuration (complete assembly); 2014.
MM. BS EN 1364-4 - Fire resistance tests for non-loadbearing elements. Curtain walling. Part
configuration; 2014.
NN. BS EN ISO 14732 - Welding personnel.
OO. BS EN ISO 9606-1 - Qualification testing of welders. Fusion welding. Steels; 2013.
PP. BS EN ISO 9712 - Non-destructive testing. Qualification and certification of NDT personnel.
QQ. ISO 4628/3 - Paints and varnishes — Evaluation of degradation of coatings — Designation
of quantity and size of defects, and of intensity of uniform changes in appearance — Part
3: Assessment of degree of rusting.
RR. ISO 12944 Paints and varnishes — Corrosion protection of steel structures by protective
paint systems.
SS. ISO 7599 - Anodizing of aluminium and its alloys — Method for specifying decorative and
protective anodic oxidation coatings on aluminium.
TT. ISO 10074 - Anodizing of aluminium and its alloys — Specification for hard anodic oxidation
coatings on aluminium and its alloys.
UU. NFPA 251 - Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Resistance of Building Construction and
Materials; 2006.
VV. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
WW. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics
of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components;
2012.
XX. Local (country/ State / Province) civil defence and building authority guidelines.
1.5 SYSTEM WRITEUP

A. Refer to Appendix A for system writeup for each phase.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
Submittal requirements and procedures shall be compliant with minimum requirements stipulated
in Section 01 30 50- Façade Administration Requirements.
A. Product Data:
1. Data sheets on each proposed product to include, as a minimum, thickness, physical
characteristics, and finish, fire related performance and:
a. Product data sheet shall include all physical and performance characteristics.
e. Product’s proof of compliance with local and project specific fire performance.

f. Where MCM and honeycomb stiffened cladding sheets are accepted: Bonding
strength data, durability verification.
2. Certificates:
a. Mill certificates for all metal works.
b. Tests reports on Aluminium coating.
c. Tests reports on Paint proposed and applied.
d. Welder Certificates, to include types of welds the mentioned welder is qualified to
conduct.
e. Weld certificates and test results.
f. Quality Assurance Records.
g. Material and system warranties.
h. Any required engineering judgement.
3. Calculations:
a. Façade movement allowance including and not limited relative movement between
support points, thermal movement.
b. Thermal performance analysis.
c. System calculations.
d. Check non-structural elements where inadequate stiffness, fixation, twist etc. could
cause undesired visual effects.
e. Embed/ Anchor calculations.
4. Shop Drawings:
a. Submit all shop drawings as necessary to fully detail the façade system(s) to:
b. Include all typical and non-typical details.
c. Accommodate all requirements mentioned in system design criteria.
d. Include installation strategy.
e. Include replacement strategy.
f. Where requested by Architect or Consultant, provide 3-dimensional drawings to
demonstrate feasibility of design.
5. Test reports:
a. Metal panel shall be tested against EN 13501 to meet A1 criteria or otherwise
required by local authorities.
b. Metal panel shall be tested against ASTM D1929 to meet self-ignition criteria of not
less than 343oC or otherwise required by local authorities.
c. All test reports required by Local Civil Defence for Façade Fire Rated walls.
d. Compatibility statements.
e. Adhesion Test report
f. Tests reports on Aluminium coating.
g. Tests reports on Paint systems proposed.
h. Weld Test reports.
i. Anchor and/or Embeds Test reports.
j. Component test reports Including:
1) Durability
2) Bond strength
3) Combustibility
6. Samples for material selection:

a. For each product’s colour/finish specified by Architect, colour chips representing
manufacturer's full range of similar available colours shall be submitted.
b. Two numbers, minimum 300mm long paint coated or anodized proprietary aluminium
louver extrusions. These samples are for profile selection and may include materials
from several suppliers.
7. Approval Samples:

a. Minimum two numbers, 300 x 300mm samples, representing actual product in RAL
colour and texture requested by the Architect, for each product and finish specified.
b. Minimum two numbers, 50mm long samples of each gasket, backer rod, tape, and
glazing accessories.
c. Minimum two numbers, 300 x 300mm, samples of each membrane.
d. Minimum two numbers of samples of setting block.
e. Minimum two numbers of samples of each bolt, anchor, screw, pin, rivet, and other
fixing.
f. Minimum two numbers of samples of each embed/anchors or cast-in.
g. Minimum two numbers of samples of each custom-made item, if any, taken from first
production.
h. Following the approval of items above, provide minimum two numbers, 400 x
400mm, 4-way joint samples, with all gaskets and available accessories, for the main
system(s). Fabricated from the actual production materials, after start of production.
i. Additional project specific items, as reasonably required.
1) Operation and Maintenance Information
2) Maintenance Data for all supplied materials.
3) Care instructions and warranty requirements.
8. Maintenance materials: maintenance materials shall not be used during defects

liability period.
a. Metal cladding sheets: Minimum 1% replacement sheet or coil material for cladding
panel production.
b. 50m minimum of each bespoke concealed extrusion (e.g., cladding rails, stiffeners,
etc.).
c. 50m minimum of each gasket type.
d. Keep stock of all fasteners, etc. required to reinstate the spare pieces.
e. Touch-up paint compatible with the project coatings and approved by the supplier(s)
of the project coatings to be kept in stock, one-litre canned spray paint for each 2000

A. Source limitations for metal panels:
1. Obtain metal cladding panels, including related accessories, through one source
from a single manufacturer.
2. Obtain panels for cladding for each building from a single production batch.
B. Factory inspections:
1. Main Contractor shall arrange for the project team and Façade Consultant to carry
out factory inspections at the Façade Sub-Contractor's facility.
a. Factory visits shall include:
1) Pre-qualification visit.
2) Visit during manufacturing of the first 20m2 of each type of panels for
the project.
3) Manufacturing of panels.
2. Façade Sub-contractor shall ensure works are performed in accordance with AAMA
CW-10.
3. All coating shall be carried out by ISO 9001 qualified coaters, member of the
aluminium Finishing Association.
4. All welders shall be qualified to BS EN ISO 9606 for steel and stainless steel.
Welders’ certifications shall be submitted.
5. All weld inspectors shall be qualified to BS EN ISO 9712 for non-destructive testing.
6. All fixings shall have traceable origin, labelled boxes, relevant certificates. The
labelling on boxes and/or stamping on fixings shall indicate size, grade,
manufacturer.

7. All assemblies shall meet the requirements of the KSA Engineer of Record, local civil
defence authorities and House of expertise.
1.8 MOCK-UP
A. Visual mock-up:
1. Visual mock-up shall be erected to
a. Review and finalize the material and finishes selection and
b. Review and finalize jointing and interfacing details.
c. Review and finalize any feature geometry (capping, sunshades, and light
features/effect).
2. Submit location, size, and other requirements for visual mock-up, based on
agreement with architect.
meeting.
4. Unless otherwise required by the Client, the mock-up shall be erected on the actual
site.
5. Visual mock-up frame shall allow for a minimum of 6 sample; samples shall follow
project dimensions.
6. Visual mock-up shall include a representation of the adjoining external finishes.
7. Where visual mock-up configuration is to represent complex geometry, Architect can
require that the mock-up be erected in a way that allows flexibility, for changing
materials, colour, and adjustment of angles between panels.
8. This mock-up shall be approved by the Client and Architect, prior to ordering of
material. Fabrication carried out without approval of the visual mock-up will be at the
Façade Sub- Contractor's own risk and may result in abortive work.
B. Performance mock-up:
1. For testing requirements, refer to Section 01 40 50- Façade Quality Requirements.
2. Multi-story fire testing shall be carried out as per NFPA 285, BS 8414-1 or BS 8414-
2 by an independent testing agency, as approved by local authority.
3. Undertake separate testing for each multi-story cladding system.
4. Mock-up shall be installed and assembled as per project conditions using materials
proposed for actual project installation, and in accordance with project details shop
drawings. Workers engaged for installation of performance mock-up shall be
engaged for actual project installation.
5. The erected mock-up will also be assessed for:
a. Workmanship control sample.
b. System performance review.
c. Installation benchmark.
d. Where required, as a visual mock-up.

A. The first 40m2 panels of installation of each system type shall be inspected as quality
benchmark installation. Benchmark shall include:
1. Typical joints between panels and between floors.
2. Non-typical interfaces with other systems.
3. Corner conditions.
4. Horizontal and vertical joints shall be visible to check cladding alignment.
5. Any fixing and anchorage.
6. Waterproofing.
7. Performance based on field water and gutter testing.
B. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall give notice and hold further works until the benchmark is
signed off. The Main Contractor shall arrange site access.

quality, materials, and workmanship) for the remainder of the Works. The protection shall
be removed and replaced when directed or damaged.

A. Protect finished aluminium surfaces with low tac protection wrapping/film.
B. Protective wrapping/film shall be replaced within the time frame directed by the
manufacturer.
C. Deliver products in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with
1. Protect finishes by applying heavy duty removable plastic film during production.
Material used for such protection shall be easily removable from protected panel and
metal surfaces without leaving marks and any damage to protected metal panel.
Protective film material shall be suitable for use under the panel and metal surface
temperature during storage and installed conditions.
2. Protected Façade panels and materials shall be protected against transportation
damage.
3. Provide identification markings on products consistent with drawings.
4. Exercise care in unloading, storing, and installing panels and products to prevent any
damage, bending, warping, and twisting.
D. Store panels and products protected from exposure to weather conditions and at
temperature conditions beyond limits recommended by manufacturer.
E. Store panels and products in well-ventilated space out of direct sunlight.
F. Protect from moisture and condensation with tarpaulins or other suitable weather tight
covering to provide ventilated protection.
1. Store panels and products at a slope or in manner to prevent any accumulation of
water or debris on panels.
2. Do not store panels and products in any enclosed space where ambient temperature
can exceed 49°C, or any temperature that may result in damage to panels.
surface damage.
G. Rejected material shall be clearly marked (large red spray-painted X) and kept separate
until disposed.
H. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting wall panels to prevent bending,
warping, twisting, and surface damage.
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify location of structural members and openings in substrates by
field measurements before installation. Notify the Contractor for any ‘out-of-tolerance’
structures and discrepancies against the approved shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with panel installation to concrete or masonry substrates only
after completion of applying vapour membrane / damp proofing specified in “Liquid Applied
Damp proofing” and only if substrate is completely dry and if existing and forecast weather
conditions permit cladding to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.12 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits,
and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.13 WARRANTY
B. For base warranty requirements, refer to Section 01 40 50- Façade Quality Requirements
C. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's written warranty stating that the finish will perform
as follows for minimum warranty period mentioned in Section 01 40 50- Façade Quality
Requirements:
1. Chalking: No more than that represented by a No.8 rating based on ASTM D4214.
2. Colour Retention: No fading or colour change more than 5 Hunter colour difference
units, calculated in accordance with ASTM D2244.
3. Gloss Retention: Minimum of 50 % gloss retention, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D523.
4. Cracking: No visible cracking is permitted in accordance with ISO 4628/3.
5. Meet requirements of AAMA 2605 for panels outside weather seal line; AAMA 2604
for panels within weather seal line.
D. Materials Warranty: Provide written warranty from the MCM manufacturer stating that the
MCM sheets will perform as follows for a minimum of 12 years:
1. No delamination.
2. No bubbling.
3. No fatigue cracks.
4. No UV degradation.
E. System Warranty: Provide joint written warranty by manufacturers, applicator, and installer
on the works for a minimum of 12-year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. Manufacturer/ Supplier of materials shall be registered with Local Civil Defence with valid
license.
B. Manufacturer/ Supplier of materials shall have obtained Certificate of compliance from
approved certification body by Local Civil Defence for the proposed system.
C. Pre-approved materials and systems assembly by Local Authorities and House of
Expertise/ Engineer of Record.
D. Manufacturers of proposed materials and systems shall:
1. Have successfully completed a minimum of five similar previous projects, in nature,
size, location and extent to this Project.
2. Have projects as mentioned in item 1 above, shall have been in place for at least 8
years.
3. Is familiar with special requirements indicated.
4. Have complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
E. To be NEOM approved manufacturer/supplier.

A. For base design criteria, refer to 01 40 50- Façade Quality Requirements
B. Deflection criteria for metal cladding:
1. Shall be limited to L/90 but not more than 20mm out of plane.
2. In plane deflection shall be less than L/2000.
C. Systems shall be designed to allow for base building movements and thermal movements,
and to be adequately released to ensure no permanent deformation of the panels occurs
under serviceability conditions.
D. Systems shall be designed to allow for tolerance adjustability.

E. Systems shall be designed to satisfy thermal requirements and exhibit no detrimental
interstitial condensation.
F. Systems shall be designed to comply with durability and performance requirements.
G. Systems shall be designed to comply with fire and life safety requirements.

A. Use the thickness most appropriate for the use and in compliance with performance criteria,
but as a minimum, external solid sheet cladding and infill panels shall be 3mm minimum.
B. Sheet aluminium: ASTM B209.
1. Use the grade and temper most appropriate for the use and finishing process, but at
least complying with the following:
a. Solid aluminium cladding sheets shall be 5000 and 3000 series.
b. Anodized Solid aluminium cladding sheets shall be Grade 1100-H14.
2. Anodized coated aluminium: Fabricate aluminium sheets with J57S material, unless
otherwise required by the coater, using single production batch.
3. Use the thickness most appropriate for the use and in compliance with performance
criteria, but as minimum to comply with the following:
a. External solid cladding panels and copings: min. 3mm
b. Exposed panels and projecting features, subject to possible impact: min. 4mm
c. Backpans: min. 2mm
d. Louver blanking panels: min. 2mm
e. Internal sheeting: min. 2mm
f. Perimeter flashings: min. 1.5mm
g. Perimeter flashings, protected against impact: min. 1mm
C. Galvanized iron sheet back panel with zinc coating as per ASTM A 153.
D. Extruded Aluminium Profiles: Refer to 08 44 13.
E. Façade structural Support Steel Sections: Refer to 05 12 10.
F. Firestopping and Cavity Barrier: Refer to 07 84 53.
G. Anchorage and Cast-in Channels Refer to 01 40 50 and 08 44 13.
H. Fasteners: Refer to 08 44 13.
I. Shimming: Refer to 08 44 13.
J. Sealant: Refer to 07 93 00.
K. Thermal Insulation: Refer to 07 21 00.
L. Flashings:
1. Provide sheet metal flashings and trim as required for cladding system.
a. Shop form components to profiles, dimensions, and thicknesses indicated on
Drawings. Items to be provided include:
b. Aluminium flashing at bottom of air cavities and pressurized compartments to gravity
drain water from cavity.
c. Formed profiles fabricated and installed to shed water within horizontal joint condition
(non-continuous, interrupted at vertical U profile).
2. Aluminium flashing at windowsills, parapet caps, transition pieces to adjacent

materials and other exposed trim. Attach with clips or other means to avoid exposed
fasteners.
3. Form sheet metal fabrications in longest possible lengths. Turn back all exposed
edges to form hem. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward and
hemmed to provide drip.

2.4 FABRICATION
A. Façade Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the design, supply, assembly, and
installation of the entire façade fabrication.
B. Façade Contractor shall ensure that such work is executed by persons skilled in such
machining, preparation, fabrication, and assembly.
C. Commencement of any procurement and fabrication prior to receiving a "B" status from all
relevant Consultants will be at the Façade Sub-Contractor's own risk.
D. All assemblies shall be fabricated in accordance with the approved working drawings and
in full conformity with the standards specified.
E. All alignments of joints, corners, recesses, and installations shall satisfy requirements of
tender architectural drawings.
F. At 90° corner extrusions, where shown on Contract drawings, shall be sharp and precise
and worked to a radius of no more than 1mm.
G. The arris radius of any pressing shall be for 3mm aluminium sheet, outer radius maximum
4.5 mm, inner radius maximum of 1.5mm, for other material thicknesses the pressing radius
shall be agreed with the Façade Sub-Contractor.
H. All machining works shall be carried out in the shop to ensure close fitting, straight, flush
joints, alignment in all cases.
I. Wherever possible, Façade Sub-Contractor should optimize installation and assembly
quality to pre-assemble panels in the shop.
J. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall take all the necessary precautions to prevent damage
cause by contamination, abrasion, transportation, or other marring of surfaces.

A. A schedule of all proposed fabrication tolerances for components of the system and
associated works including size tolerances pressed metalwork constructions, ventilator
constructions, weather seals and aluminium sheet flatness tolerances, shall be submitted
to the Façade Consultant.
B. The most onerous requirements of the below shall be complied with.
1. Instructions and recommendations of metal sheet and wall system manufacturer, as
well as with approved shop drawings shall be complied.
2. Finished dimensions of completed panels, when erected, complies within the
following maximum permissible deviations:

Overall dimensions Up to 2m 2m-3m 3-4.5m
Width and Height +0/-1mm +0/-2mm +0/-3mm
Straightness of edges: Deviation from intended 1mm 2mm 3mm

line. any variation to be evenly distributed with
no sudden bends or irregularities
Squareness: Taking the longer of the 2 sides at 1mm 2mm 3mm

any corner as a base line, the deviation of
shorter side from perpendicular
Twist: Deviation of any corner from plane 1mm 2mm 3mm

containing the other 3 corners
Flatness: The deviation under a 1m straight edge

placed anywhere on a flat panel surface:
1mm
Joint Width +/-1mm
2.6 FINISHES
A. Superior Performance Organic Coating System: As specified in 01 40 50.
B. Superior Performance Organic Finish: As specified in 01 40 50.
C. High Performance Organic Finish: As specified in 01 40 50.
D. Corrosion protection of mild steel: As specified in 05 12 10 and 01 40 50.
E. Stainless steel finish: ASTM A240/A240M.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify materials are per approved material submittals, clean and free from damage, suitable
for installation.
B. Verify all dimensions, tolerances, and interfaces with other works.
C. Prior to taking over the work area, survey the receiving base structures and identify locations
where out of tolerance discrepancies require rectifications. Co-ordinate and propose
required rectifications for approval and action at the soonest.
D. Verify substrate on-site to ensure conditions are acceptable for installation in accordance
with manufacturers written instructions, and in accordance with set-out per approved
drawings.
1. Ensure that vapour seal/ damp proofing coating has fully cured.
2. Ensure that insulation panels have been installed and fixed according to approved
shop drawings and technical data.
E. Verify that anchorage devices have been properly installed and located, with manufacturers
written instructions, and engineering justifications.
F. Prior to installation, ensure the following are confirmed prior to proceeding with works.
1. Design documents, such as shop drawings and calculations, are approved.
2. Any mock-up and performance testing shall be approved.
3. All material submittals shall be approved.
4. Where required, approval from authority having jurisdiction shall be obtained prior to
installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare and clean all surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Carry out all setting outs of anchorages and member placements.
C. Deliver anchorage items to be cast into concrete to installers with setting templates.
D. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer under project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. During installation, all adjacent work areas and finish surfaces shall be protected from
damage.
B. Only competent and experienced installers shall be engaged to carry out the curtain walling
works. Records and related training of installers shall be maintained by Façade Sub-
Contractor on-site and provided for review upon request.
C. All works shall be installed per Approved Installation Method Statement.
D. Expansion joints must be installed to be ensure weathertightness under all operational
conditions without binding or causing noise or vibration.
E. Any expansion and movement joints shall be designed and installed to enable the designed
movement.
F. Provide thermal isolation, to meet thermal performance, where components penetrate or
disrupt building insulation.
G. All joints must have allowances were joint design call for expansion and contraction.
H. All fasteners and fixings are to be concealed, with no exposed screw or bolt heads or nuts,
unless indicated in tender intent drawings. Any Architect approved fixings must be colour
matched to the adjacent surfaces.

I. Install flashings as indicated on shop drawings at flashing butt joints, provide a lap strap
under flashing and seal lapped surfaces with a full bed of non- hardening sealant.
J. Install cavity barrier at each floor, and firestop/smoke seal at each floor slab edge, and at
required partition wall interface locations as per manufacturer and local authority standards.
K. Provide replacement of decorative clip-on component where severe surface damage
occurred. Remove and renew the components.
L. Apply bimetallic separators between dissimilar metals; use gasket fasteners, isolation
shims. Paint finish, powder coating or anodizing finish will not be acceptable as bimetallic
separator.
M. Avoid metal to metal contact.
N. Carry out all the necessary survey and levelling to ensure all members are installed at their
correct levels.
O. All systems and components shall be installed to the arrangement and dimensions shown
on the shop drawings, within stipulated maximum permissible deviations.
P. All assemblies and components shall be properly alignment, plumb and level, free of warp
or twist. Any panels and products that are defective, including warped, bowed, dented, and
broken members, and members with damaged finishes, shall be rejected and not be
installed.
Q. All assemblies and components shall be installed within specified dimensional tolerances
and aligned with adjacent works.
R. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall check the work and record all non-compliance as work
progresses. Such records of non-compliances shall be completely logged with maximum
of one week lag from time of installation. Non-compliance criteria shall be based upon
approved Façade Sub-Contractor’s in-house quality control, and Architect, and Façade
Consultant’s benchmark inspection reports.
S. Site repairs are not permitted, but superficial damages (minor touch-ups) may be adjusted
with the consent of the Façade Consultant. When deciding whether the damage was
superficial, consideration shall be given to its extent and location in relation to supports,
fixings and corners. Structural damages will not be allowed to be repaired on site under any
circumstances. Inform the Architect of any damage occurred on site for their consideration
and approval.
T. Prior to any superficial touch up on site, a sample of quality of work that underwent minor
touch-up, shall be submitted for benchmark approval. Touch-up minor damage of factory
applied finish following manufacturer’s approved Method Statement. Replace all
components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
U. Remedial proposals, deviations shall be documented, verified, agreed, approved, and
documented.
V. Site modification of profiles, brackets, anchorages, or any components forming part of the
façades, is prohibited.
W. Field cutting of panels by torch is not permitted.
X. The edge of composite panel shall not be exposed and unprotected. It shall be concealed
inside the panel cladding joints, or any means as recommended by the panel supplier and
approved by the Employer’s Representatives.

A. Offset from True Alignment Between Two Adjacent Members Abutting End to End, In Line:
0.75 mm, maximum.
B. Accuracy of cladding erection:

1. Level: +/-3mm over 9m, maximum.
2. Line: +/-3mm over 9m, maximum.
3. Plumb: +/-3mm in 9m, maximum.
4. Plane: +/-10mm over 10m of length and up to 20mm in 100m, max
5. Squareness: +/-1mm in any one-story height or structural bay width of 2m
and +/- 2mm overall.
C. Accuracy of junctions between components at joints:
1. Within the length of any joint (including in-line continuations across transverse joints)
the greatest width shall not exceed the least width by more than 10%. Any variation
to be evenly distributed with no sudden changes.
2. The offset in elevation between nominally in-line edges across a transverse joint shall
not be more than 10% of the width of the transverse joint.
3. The offset in plan or section between flat faces of adjacent panels across any joint
shall be not more than 10% of the width of the joint.
D. Overall deviation from lines and planes:
1. To be limited to long wave formations of minimum wavelength of 20m length with a
rate of exchange not exceeding 1:1000 and a maximum amplitude of 3mm.
2. The above shall be measured from an optical or laser reference line.

A. Façade Sub-Contractor shall discuss inspection review criteria with Architect and Façade
Consultant and engage trained representatives to inspect completed metal wall panel
installation, including accessories, based on agreed inspection criteria.
B. Metal wall that does not comply with specified requirements, shall be removed, and
replaced.
C. Façade Sub-Contractor shall ensure all tests and reports are conducted in a timely manner,
with sufficient provisions made for any required re-testing or follow-up rectifications and
inspections.
D. Any required additional tests, re-tests, and inspections shall be conducted at the Façade
Sub Contractor's expense, to verify compliance of rectifications or necessary additional work
with specified requirements.
E. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for any damage which may be caused to
adjacent materials and special care shall be exercised to avoid such damage.
3.6 PROTECTION
B. Protection to the façade works, panels, units, elements shall be provided during storage,
transportation, during and after installation.
C. Ensure that the protective coverings do not mark the surfaces they protect.
D. Protection must be removed in a manner that all finishes weather evenly to ensure colour
matching.
3.7 CLEANING
1. Weep holes and drainage channels shall be designed and kept unobstructed and
free of dirt and sealants.
2. Surfaces in contact with site applied sealants shall be prepared according to the
3. Remove any excess sealant by method acceptable to the sealant manufacturer, and

coated metal supplier. Using metal scrapers is prohibited.
4. Allow for progressively cleaning of the Contract Works and the area of operations
shall be kept in a neat.
B. Final cleaning:
1. Do not exceed the recommended time frame for protective film removal.
2. Immediately prior to handing over of works and completion of works, remove
protective film and provide final clean of façades.
3. Do not use metal scrapers, any chemical or other removal techniques that is not
stated in the and may damage the finish and performance of the installed materials.
4. Installed façade surfaces and products shall be cleaned as recommended
procedures and products as stipulated in fabricator/ manufacturer’s maintenance
manual. Only soft, clean wiping cloths shall be used.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 44 50 – CEMENT PARTICLE BOARD
Contents
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
A GENERAL
1.6 SYSTEM WRITEUP
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE (SINGLE SOURCE)
1.10 MOCK-UP
1.13 WARRANTY
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
3.3 STARTER BASE PROFILE
3.4 CORNER PROFILE
3.5 CONTACT AREAS
3.6 NON-CONTACT AREA
3.7 DECORATIVE FINISH
3.8 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATION
3.10 PROTECTION
3.11 CLEANING

07 44 50 Cement Particle Board
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Description
1. Design, supply, engineering, test, delivery, and installation of cement Particle Board.
2. All accessories and interfacing components.
B. Related Sections
6. APPENDICES

A. This specification shall be read in conjunction with any other tender documents including
but not limited to:
B. Architectural Tender Drawings and Specifications.
C. Structural Tender Drawings and Specifications.
D. Façade Engineering Drawings.
E. MEP Drawings and Specifications.
F. Acoustics Drawings and Specifications.
G. Building Maintenance and Access Tender Drawings and Specifications.
H. Security Design Documentation.
I. Interior Design Documentation.
J. Fire (FLS) Design Documentation.
K. Lighting and Signage Design Documentation.
L. Branded apartments, Service apartment and Hotel brand guidelines.

M. Saudi Building Code.
N. NEOM Requirements / Guidelines.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
A. SBC: Saudi Building Code.
Q. DPC: damp-proof course.
R. ETA: European Technical Approval.
S. ETAG: European Technical Approval Guidelines.
T. FPC: Factory Production Control.
U. VOC: Volatile organic compounds.
V. QA: Quality assurance.
W. QC: Quality Control.
A. ASTM B 117-Test Method for Salt Spray (Fog) Testing.
B. ASTM C 150-Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
C. ASTM C 612 - Specification for physical properties and requirements for Mineral Wool
Insulation.
D. ASTM C297 – Standard Test Method for Flatwise Tensile Strength of Sandwich
Construction.
E. ASTM C473 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products.
F. ASTM C 612-Specification for physical properties and requirements for Mineral Wool
Insulation.

G. ASTM C947 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Properties of Thin-Section Glass-Fibre-
Reinforced Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading).
H. ASTM C 1177-Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as
Sheathing.
I. ASTM C1186 - Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes
and Air Barrier Systems.
J. ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Fibre-Mat Reinforced Cementitious Backer
Units.
K. ASTM D 968-Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling
Abrasive.
L. ASTM D 968 - Standard Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by
Falling Abrasive.
M. ASTM D1037 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base Fibre and
Particle Panel Materials.
N. ASTM D 1970-Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous
Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.
O. ASTM D 2247-Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative
Humidity.
P. ASTM D2394 - Standard Test Methods for Simulated Service Testing of Wood and Wood-
Based Finish Flooring.
Q. ASTM D 3273-Test for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings.
R. ASTM E72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building
Construction.
S. ASTM E 84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
T. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
U. ASTM E 119-Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
V. ASTM E 283-Test Method for determining the rate of air leakage through the exterior
windows and doors under specified Pressure Differences across the Specimen.
W. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
X. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
Y. ASTM E1233 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Doors, Skylights, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Air Pressure Differential.
Z. ASTM E 2134-Test Method for Evaluating the Tensile-Adhesion Performance of an
Exterior Insulation and Finishing System (Cement Board).
AA. ASTM E2178-Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials.
BB. ASTM E2357 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier
Assemblies.
CC. ASTM D4060 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by The
Taber Abraser.
DD. ASTM E2485-Standard Test Method for Freeze / Thaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation
and Finishing Systems (Cement Board) and Water Resistive Barrier Coatings.
EE. ASTM E2486 - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Class PB and PI Exterior
Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS).

FF. ASTM E 2570-Test Method for Water-Resistive (WRB) Coatings used Under Exterior
Insulation and Finishing Systems (Cement Board) or Cement Particle Board with Drainage.
GG. ASTM Practice G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric
Materials to Fungi.
HH. ASTM Practice G22 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Plastics to Bacteria.
II. ASTM G 153-Recommended Practice casing for Operating Light-and Water-Exposure
Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) for Exposure of Non-metallic Materials.
JJ. ASTM G154-Recommended Practice for Operating Light-and Water-Exposure Apparatus
(Fluorescent UV-Condensation Type) for Exposure of Non-metallic Materials.
KK. ASTM G155 - Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of
Non-Metallic Materials.
LL. BS EN 318-Fibreboards. Determination of dimensional changes associated with changes
in relative humidity.
MM. BS EN 319-Particleboards and fibreboards. Determination of tensile strength perpendicular
to the plane of the board.
NN. BS EN 520 -Gypsum plasterboards. Definitions, requirements, and test methods.
OO. BS EN 12467 -Fibre-cement flat sheets. Product specification and test methods.
PP. ISO 12572-Hygrothermal performance of building materials and products - Determination
of water vapor transmission properties-Cup method.
QQ. BS EN 13859-2-Flexible sheets for waterproofing. Definitions and characteristics of
underlays. Underlays for walls.
RR. ISO 10456-Building materials and products -Hygrothermal properties -Tabulated design
values and procedures for determining declared and design thermal values.
SS. NFPA 268- Standard Test Method for Determining Ignitability of Exterior Wall Assemblies
Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
TT. NFPA 285-Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of
Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies containing Combustible Components Using
the multi-Scale, Multistory Test Apparatus.
UU. Local (country/ State / Province) civil defence and building authority guidelines.
VV. SBC 201 General
WW. SBC 302 Structural - Construction

A. General
The requirements detailed in the performance requirements Section 3 of the Façade Technical
Specifications shall also apply to all Cement Particle Board elements with the following
additions/amendments.
B. Performance Requirements
1. Thermal Performance Criteria (Exterior Walls)
a. Accommodate thermal and moisture differential thermal expansion and contraction
within the system components and with other systems.
b. The external wall shall have a U-Value of 0.3 W/m2k or as per the design
requirements.
2. Fire Performance
a. Fire Resistance (ASTM E 119): Passed 1 hour.
b. Ignitability (NFPA 268): No ignition at 12.5 kw/m2 at 20 minutes.

c. Intermediate Multi-Story Fire Test (NFPA 285):
1) Resist flame propagation over the exterior surface.
2) Resist vertical spread of flame within combustible
core/component of panel from one story to the next.
3) Resist vertical spread of flame over the interior surface from
one story to the next.
4) Resist lateral spread of flame from the compartment of fire
origin to adjacent spaces.
d. Full Scale Multi-Story with Dryvit FM products (corner test) ASTM E 84. Flame
Spread - Less Than 25; Smoke Developed - Less than 450.
3. Moisture Control
a. Prevent the accumulation of water behind the Cement Particle Board system, either
by condensation or leakage through the wall construction, in the design and detailing
of the wall assembly
b. Provide flashing and Cement Particle Board system accessories necessary to direct
water to the exterior where it is likely to penetrate components in the wall assembly,
including, above window and door heads, beneath window and door, sills, at roof /
wall intersections, decks, abutments of lower walls with higher walls, above projecting
features, and at the base of the wall.
c. Air Leakage Prevention: Provide continuity of air barrier system at windows, doors
and other
d. penetrations through the system with connecting and compatible air barrier
components to minimize condensation and leakage caused by air movement.
4. Weather-tightness
a. Resistant to water penetration from exterior into Cement Particle Board and
assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in
deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of Cement
Particle Board and assemblies behind it, including substrates, supporting wall
construction, and interior finish.
b. Cement Particle Board: Provide Cement Particle Board having physical properties
and structural performance that comply with the following:
1) Tensile Bond ASTM C 297/E 2134: Minimum 104 kPa (15 psi).
2) Freeze-thaw ASTM E 2485: No deleterious effects after 10
cycles.
3) Water Resistance ASTM D 2247: No deleterious effects after
fourteen days exposure.
4) Water Vapor Transmission ASTM E 96 Proc. B: Vapor
Permeable.
5) Air Leakage ASTM E 283: 0.6 l/min/m2 (0.002 cfm/sq. ft).
6) Air Permeance ASTM E 2178: 0.0006 l/s/m2 @ 75Pa (1.2x10-4
cfm/ft2 @ 1.6 psf) (Backstop NT)
7) Air Barrier Assembly ASTM E 2357: 0.05 l/sec m2 @300 Pa (<
0.001 cfm/ft2 @ 6.24 psf) (Backstop NT)
8) Structural Performance ASTM E 1233 Proc. A: Minimum 10
positive cycles at 1/240 deflection; No cracking in field, at joints
or interface with flashing.
9) Racking ASTM E 72: No cracking in field, at joints or interface
with flashing at net deflection of 3.2 mm (1/8 inch).
10) Restrained Environmental: 5 cycles; No cracking in field, at
joints or interface with flashing.
11) Water Penetration ASTM E 331: No water penetration beyond
the inner-most plane of the wall after 15 minutes at 137 Pa
(2.86 psf).
12) UV Exposure ASTM D 2898: 210 hours of exposure.
13) Accelerated Aging: 25 cycles of drying and soaking.
14) Hydrostatic Pressure Test AATCC 127: 21.6-inch water column
for 5 hours.
15) Surface Burning Characteristics ASTM E 84: Flame Spread -

Less Than 25; Smoke Developed - Less than 450.
5. Impact Resistance
a. Provide high impact resistance to a minimum height of 2.0 meters from finished
ground level at all areas accessible to pedestrian traffic and other areas exposed to
abnormal stress or impact and as indicated on Drawings. Provide for either of the
following:
1) Non-Contact Zones: One layers of standard Cement Particle
Board mesh - 160 g/m² to achieve medium impact resistance.
2) Contact Zones; Two layers of standard Cement Particle Board
mesh - 160 g/m² to achieve medium impact resistance.
b. Provide standard impact resistance to height above 2.0 meters to all areas not
accessible to pedestrian traffic and not exposed to abnormal stress or impact and as
indicated on Drawings.
c. Provide for one layer of standard Cement Particle Board mesh - 160 g/m² to achieve
standard impact resistance.
6. Joints
a. Design minimum 19mm wide expansion joints in the Cement Particle Board where
they exist in the substrate or supporting construction, where the Cement Particle
Board adjoins dissimilar construction or materials, at changes in building height, and
at floor lines in multi-level construction.
b. Design minimum 13mm wide perimeter sealant joints at all penetrations through the
Cement Particle Board (windows, doors, etc.).
c. Use compatible backer rod and sealant that has been evaluated in accordance with
ASTM 1382, "Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Properties of Sealants
When Used in Exterior Insulation Finishing System (Cement Board) Joints," and that
meets minimum 50% elongation after conditioning.
d. Design joints so that Air Barrier continuity is maintained across the joint and drain
joints to the exterior.
e. Elevations exceeding 24 m2 must have grooves or tape joints incorporated.
7. Bond Integrity
a. Resistant to free from bond failure within Cement Particle Board components or
between system and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire,
wind loads, weather, or other exposure conditions.
8. Strength and Load Resistance
a. Cement Board shall meet minimum requirements stipulated in ASTM C1325 and
project requirements, whichever is more onerous.
b. Design the Cement Particle Board system components to comply with the allowable
stress criteria as required to resist the loading applied to system. Loading imposed on
the system can include but not be limited to; wind, live and impact loads and all
thermal movements without damage or decrease in performance.
c. As a minimum, the Cement Particle Board system shall comply with project applied
loads under these tests.
1) ASTM E72 to determine the tensile, compression, flexural and
transverse strength.
2) ASTM C947: to meet minimum flexural strength of 5170kPa, or
as required by project, whichever is more onerous. The tested
flexural strength shall be tested in both wet and equilibrium
condition and meet minimum requirements under both wet and
equilibrium.
3) ASTM D2394: Compression Indentation Resistance.
4) ASTM D1037: shall show no damage to the system.
5) Transverse Wind Load ASTM E 330: Withstand positive and
negative wind loads as specified by the building code.
6) Deflection Criteria: Out of plane deflection of panels shall be
limited to L/360 or 15mm.
7) Deflection limit for supporting steelwork shall be limited to
L/360.
8) Deflection caused by the design wind load should be limited to

prevent cracking of system.
9. Bond Integrity
a. Ensure compatible and robust bonding between Cement Particle Board system and
components with any supporting wall construction, when exposed to fire, wind loads,
weather, or other in-service conditions.
b. Cement Particle Board system shall be tested to ASTM C297 systems to meet the
following requirements.
c. Bond strength shall be greater than 105kPa, and as required to meet the project’s
requirements.
10. Structural
a. Tensile Bond ASTM C 297/E 2134: Minimum 104 kPa (15 psi) - substrate or
insulation failure.
b. Transverse Wind Load ASTM E 330: Withstand positive and negative wind loads as
specified by the building code. Minimum 4.3 kPa (90 psf) 16-inch o.c. framing, 1/2-
inch sheathing screw attached at 203 mm (8 inch) o.c. (For higher wind loads contact
Dryvit Systems, Inc.)
c. Impact Resistance: In accordance with ASTM E 2486 (formerly EIMA Standard
101.86):
1) Standard - 146 g/m2(4.3 oz/yd2), Minimum Tensile Strength 27
g/cm (150 lbs/in). EIMA Impact Classification - Standard. EIMA
Impact Range 3-6 Joules (25-49 in-lbs).
2) Standard Plus - 203 g/m2(6 oz/yd2), Minimum Tensile Strength
36 g/cm (200 lbs/in). EIMA Impact Classification - Medium.
EIMA Impact Range 6-10 Joules (50-89 in-lbs).
3) Intermediate - 407 g/m2(12 oz/yd2), Minimum Tensile Strength
54 g/cm (300lbs/in). EIMA Impact Classification - High. 10-17
Joules (90-150 in-lbs).
4) Panzer 15 - 509 g/m2(15 oz/yd2), Minimum Tensile Strength
71 g/cm (400lbs/in). EIMA Impact Classification - Ultra High. >
17 Joules (> 150 in-lbs). Used in conjunction with standard
mesh.
5) Panzer 20 - 695 g/m2(20.5 oz/yd2), Minimum Tensile Strength
98 g/cm (550 lbs/in). EIMA Impact Classification - Ultra High. >
17 Joules (> 150 in-lbs). Used in conjunction with standard
mesh.
6) Detail Short Rolls - 146 g/m2(4.3 oz/yd2), Minimum Tensile
Strength 27 g/cm (150 lbs/in).
7) Corner Mesh - 244 g/m2(7.2 oz/yd2), Minimum Tensile
Strength 49 g/cm (274 lbs/in).
11. Movement
a. Cement Particle Board system shall be designed to accommodate all base structural
and thermal movement.
b. All structural movements anticipated shall be coordinated with the Project Structural
Engineer and Main Contractor.
12. Allowable stresses
a. Design Cement Particle Board components of the facade systems to comply with the
allowable stress criteria specified in this section.
b. Cement Particle Board Allowable stresses shall be calculated in accordance to “Glass
fibre reinforced concrete practical design and structural analysis Fachvereinigung
Faserbeton e.v.”based on testing. Design will be carried out using the ULS (Ultimate
Limit state) Design.
c. Fixing loads shall be based on anchor testing results.
13. Allowable Deflections
a. Design Cement Particle Board components of the facade systems to comply with the
deflection criteria specified in this section. Un-factored (serviceability) loads shall be
used to calculate the deflections. Each load case shall be considered separately and
then combined if appropriate.
b. Lateral Deflections under Wind load, Imposed load and Dead load For cantilever

elements the span L shall be doubled in calculating the allowable deflection. Design
for maximum allowable system deflection, to ETA 004 or ASTM E330.
14. Durability
a. Abrasion Resistance ASTM D 968: No deleterious effects after 1000 liters (1056
quarts).
b. Accelerated Weathering ASTM G155 Cycle 1: No deleterious effects after 5000
hours.
c. Accelerated Weathering ASTM G 154 Cycle 1 (QUV): No deleterious effects after
5000 hours.
d. Freeze-Thaw ASTM E 2485: No deleterious effects after 90 cycles.
e. Mildew Resistance ASTM D 3273: No growth during 60-day exposure period.
f. Water Resistance ASTM D 2247: No deleterious effects after 42 days exposure.
g. Taber Abrasion ASTM D 4060: Passed 1000 cycles.
h. Salt Spray Resistance ASTM B 117: No deleterious effects after 1000 hours
exposure.
i. Water Penetration ASTM E 331: Passed 15 minutes at 137 Pa (2.86 psf).
j. Water Vapor Transmission ASTM E 96 Proc. B.
1) EPS: 5 Perm-inch.
2) Base Coat: 40 Perms.
3) Finish: 40 Perms.
k. Drainage Efficiency ASTM E 2273: Minimum Drainage Efficiency of 90 percent.
1.6 SYSTEM WRITEUP

A. Refer to Appendix A for system writeup for each phase.
Submittal requirements and procedures shall be compliant with minimum requirements stipulated in
Section 01 30 50- Façade Administration Requirements.
A. Product Data:
1. Provide proposed Particle Cement Board’ technical data sheets and proof of code
compliance.
2. Provide datasheet and test results indicating chemical characteristics, application,
and design criteria/limitations for the following minimum.
a. Cement particle board – with supporting document for type A boards to meet ASTM
C1325
b. Reinforcement mesh
c. Tape
d. Coating
e. Vapor barrier and any other barrier coats.
f. Fixings and corner strengthening accessories
g. Any other components forming the system
3. Provide Façade Sub-Contractor and system supplier and applicator's checklists for
factory and field QA/QC.
4. Manufacturer's instructions for installation, surface preparation, factory, and field
quality control testing.
B. Certificates:
1. Certificate of Manufacturer's Approval. Approval Certificate from manufacturer shall
be provided for the proposed Particle Cement Board and its intended use. The
approval certificate shall be provided prior to the commencement of its application for
project works. The Façade Sub-Contractor and system supplier shall be responsible
for obtaining and submitting this approval in a timely manner. No application of
Particle Cement Board materials shall commence until the approval has been

obtained from the manufacturer.
C. The certificate of approval shall, as a minimum, indicate:
1. The drawing number, the date, and any revisions to which the certificate applies,
approval shall ensure to all the relevant design, performance and test criteria set out
in this specification are complied.
2. Particle Cement Board's adhesion and compatibility test report with all components
which proposed Particle Cement Board will come into contact and/ or required with.
3. Approval of Joint design and configuration. Approval shall include consideration of
anticipated movement which Particle Cement Board will be subjected to.
4. Datasheet on the life expectancy of the Particle Cement Board.
5. Warranty confirmations for each application.
6. Reports indicating results of any pre-installation testing specified as per
manufacturer’s request and this specification.
D. Samples for material selection:
1. 3 number of sample boards illustrating peel apart view of build-up for the Cement
Particle Board system with finishes.
2. 3 number of sample boards illustrating each finish as required by Architect for final
selection.
3. Include minimum 3 numbers of samples of joint sealants involving colour selection.
4. Include minimum 3 numbers of exposed accessory samples to verify colour selected.
5. Upon approval of colour and texture range samples, submit full scale samples for
each type for approval of texture, finish, consistency, and tolerance. When a sample
has been complete to the satisfaction of the Architect, it shall be marked as the
“Approved Sample” and be kept on-site with the Architect to be used as a reference
to compare with other panels. Façade Sub- Contractor and system supplier shall
provide a range of colour.
E. Approval samples:
1. Three numbers, 500 x 500mm of samples to include all joints and termination
conditions. Fabricated from the actual production materials, after start of production.
2. Three numbers, 500 x 500mm of final coating to demonstrate the maximum range of
colour deviation.
3. Three numbers, 500 x 500mm of cement particle boards.
4. Three number, 500mm long, minimum samples of each backer rod, and tape.
5. Three number, 500 x 500mm, minimum samples of each membrane.
6. Three number minimum samples of each screws, pins, rivets, and other fixings.
7. Any additional samples as Architect deems necessary.
8. All samples shall be accompanied by additional descriptive information, including
brand, fabrication place, finish, data sheet, application, and certifications.
F. Shop drawings:
1. Shop drawings shall document detailing of Cement Particle Board system with the
following minimum information:
a. Dimensions.
b. Attached materials and finishes.
c. Joint profiles, and support framing.
d. 3D assembly drawing for typical system, corner, and interfacing to show layering for
system components and minimum overlays.
2. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and approved by Cement Particle Board system
manufacturer as part of the final approval criteria prior to fabrication commencement.
Manufacturer’s approved drawings shall be submitted for record prior to
commencement of fabrication.
G. Test reports:
1. Provide compatibility statements from the manufacturer of adjacent materials, such

as mesh interlayer, backer rods, coated metals, gaskets, membranes, etc. confirming
the proposed Particle Cement Board product is compatible with their material and
deterioration of their materials resulting from contact with proposed Particle Cement
Board, will not occur. Such compatibility statements shall be provided as part of shop
drawings approval process.
2. Adhesion test report from system manufacturer to verify adhesion between
components of system.
H. Calculations:
1. Provide calculations for panels, substructure support, fasteners, and other
parameters.
2. Provide calculations to verify joint design can accommodate relative movement
between attached elements.
I. Approved Applicators: Provide list of approved applicators from System manufacturer to
apply proposed systems. The mentioned list of approved applicators shall be individual
persons who has been certified by System manufacturers to carry out application of the
proposed system. Each person’s certification shall be submitted for approved. Once
approved, list of such certification shall be stored in the Main Contractor and Architect’s
office on-site and referenced as required.
J. Maintenance Data:
1. Manufacturer’s Maintenance manual to be included in submittals.
3. Maintenance materials:
a. Minimum quantity of materials to replace, repair and touch-up 1% of the applied
Cement Particle Board system area.
b. Keep in stock joint sealant, same as the approved for project’s use.
c. Keep stock of all fasteners, etc. required to reinstate the spare pieces.
d. Touch-up paint compatible with the project coatings and approved by the supplier(s)
of the project coatings to be kept in stock.
e. Client may request that System supplier maintains a ready stock mentioned above
within their facility for use where required.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE (SINGLE SOURCE)

A. Review Cement Particle Board system design and develop shop drawings to comply with
technical requirement and guidelines from Particle Cement Board manufacturer, and in
compliance with this technical specification.
B. All Cement Particle Board system components used in the construction and assembly of
components shall be stored, applied, and cured strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions.
C. All Cement Particle Board system components and required accessories supplied for the
project shall be by a single source, unless otherwise approved.
D. Façade Sub-Contractor and system supplier shall ensure Cement Particle Board system
manufacturer's technical representative conducts minimum 4 site inspections through the
project application. These inspections shall be strategically organized to ensure quality
control of installation is met. As a minimum, it shall occur at such frequency.
E. First visit shall be conducted during the installation for the first 20m2 of panel installation.
F. Second Visit shall be installation during the next 80m2 of panels.
G. Remaining visits shall be conducted during regular installation of panels.
H. Additional visits may be required during any testing, and remedial exercise and any
defective installation had been noted by supplier/ installer or Architect/ Consultant.
I. Report documenting Cement Particle Board system manufacturer's technical

representative’s observations and comments shall be submitted for record, after each visit.
Should any rectification be required on installed works or work methods, rectifications
measures shall be addressed immediately and submitted before continuation of works.
J. Façade Sub-Contractor and system supplier shall ensure that Particle Cement Board will
not adversely affect the system or any of the building components and have sufficient
capacity to accommodate the required joint movements.
K. Façade Sub-Contractor and system supplier shall ensure all components applied are fully
traceable with respect to the batch numbers (Particle Cement Board code, source,
manufacturing, and expiry dates), all test dates and results, application dates, applicator
names, all conditions during date of application.

A. Design system for project conditions stipulated in Tender documentation and Section 01 40
50 Façade Quality requirements.
B. Environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) of assembly and storage
facilities shall be kept within limits recommended by manufacturer.
C. Install products under environmental conditions within manufacturer's recommended limits.
1.10 MOCK-UP
A. Where required by the Architect, visual mock-up shall be installed
1. To establish and finalize design intent.
2. To represent design intent for final selection of finish.
3. set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
B. Submit diagram drawings describing the entire mock-up for discussion at the design
meeting.
C. Unless otherwise requested, the mock-up shall be erected on the actual site unless
otherwise instructed by the Client.
D. Complete representation of the Cement Particle Board system aesthetics including any
starter profile and interface, corner, penetration, joints, and interface with systems and
windows and/or opening shall be included in the mock-up. Main Contractor, Façade Sub-
Contractor and system manufacturer shall demonstrate the extents of installation tolerance
within the mock-up as part of approval.
E. System supplier and its application shall provide a mock-up that allow easy interchangeable
finish and trims.
1. The system details that are to be included in the assessment report are as follows:
a. Cement Particle Board system elements - Recorded measurements and their
compliance with specification tolerances including flatness, bow etc. colour and colour
consistency with respect to samples / sample ranges.
b. Record photographs of the installations under the different lighting conditions
inspected.
F. Main Contractor and his façade Sub-Contractor to arrange for the Architect to view the
visual mock-up.
G. Visual mock-up shall be approved by the Client and Architect, prior to ordering of material.
Fabrication carried out without the approval of the visual mock-up will be at the Façade Sub-
Contractor's own risk and may result in abortive work.
H. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mock-ups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at the time of Substantial Completion.

A. In accordance with Section 01 40 50 Façade Quality requirements. all systems and
installations shall be per approved drawings, to illustrate quality and finish of tooling,
appearance, workmanship, adhesion, and weatherproofing.
B. System supplier shall provide a benchmark installation on site. Benchmark installation shall
include
1. Typical installation bay, first 20m2
2. Starter profile and interface
3. Corner
4. Penetration
5. Joints
6. Interface with systems and windows and/ or opening
C. The Façade Sub-Contractor and system supplier and system supplier shall give notice and
hold further works until the benchmark is signed off. The Façade Sub-Contractor and
system supplier shall arrange site access.
D. Location of approved benchmark installation shall be recorded for future reference.
E. Main Contractor and system supplier shall provide report documenting the following.
1. Date, Time of application
2. Location
3. Name of attendees and applicators
4. Photographic records of installation at every step, including any surface preparation
5. Any remedial works conduct – cause and remedial action
F. Approved benchmark installation shall remain as part of work and will be used as basis for
acceptance of remaining work.

A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and
clearly identifying products. Façade Sub-Contractor and system supplier, and approved
applicator to hold records and batch numbers for traceability.
B. Delivered packaging shall bear the following information:
1. Manufacturer’s name.
2. Product name (Product Number) and type (description).
3. Batch Number.
4. Application and use instructions.
5. Surface preparation instructions.
6. VOC content.
7. Environmental requirements – storage and application.
8. Batch date, Expiry Date.
9. Colour number.
C. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction
traffic, and other causes.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Base warranty requirements shall be in compliance with minimum stipulated in Ss to Section
01 40 50- Façade Quality Requirements. Provide a warranty for the Cement Particle Board
system and materials, fixings, finishes and workmanship of the works executed in this
Contract commencing from Practical Completion of the project. Provide all manufacturer's
product warranties and a warranty to cover all the costs of materials, labour, and equipment
to remove any defective components of the façade system and replace them. This warranty
shall also cover the costs associated with removing and replacing internal finishes’ trims

and services so that remedial works can be carried out. The content of each warranty is to
be approved by the Architect.
1. In addition, the Contractor shall include with his bid a copy of the proposed warranty.
2. Defective materials and workmanship for these guaranteed provisions is hereby
defined to include, but not be limited to, evidence of:
a. Penetration of water into system.
b. Structural failure of components resulting from forces within specified limits.
c. Discoloration, excessive fading, excessive non-uniformity, pitting, cracking, crazing,
peeling, or corrosion.
d. Adhesive or cohesive failure of sealant.
e. Staining caused by sealant.
f. Failure to fulfil other specified performance requirements.
g. Failure of operating parts to function normally/ properly.
h. Rusting of painted or galvanized steel support.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. Experienced Manufacturer having successfully completed a minimum of ten previous
projects similar in nature, size, location, environmental exposure, and extent to this Project;
being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. All fabricating and finishing shall be done in the Main Contractor’s own plant or approved
suppliers, except as provided for hereinafter.
C. Components: Obtain components from authorized distributors.

A. For base design criteria, refer to 01 40 50- Façade Quality Requirements

A. General
1. Refer to the requirements detailed in Section 4 of the Façade Technical
Specifications for overall system requirements. Specific requirements related to the
Cement Particle Board elements are detailed below.
2. All Cement Particle Board materials are required to be certified prior to
commencement of fabrication. The Contractor is required, when requested, to
provide Certification from the manufacturer of each material stating that the material
provided is as per the specified material and is in accordance with the relevant
standards.
B. Primer / Sealer
1. Standard substrate conditioner, when required, designed to seal substrates from
moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type indicated
and adhesive used for application of insulation.
C. Insulation
1. Refer to Section 1.6 of this Specifications.
D. Cement Board
1. Mechanical and Physical Properties: Flexural Strength ≥5.17 Mpa as per ASTM
C947.
2. Apparent Density: 1150 ±50 Kg/m3.
3. Modulus of Elasticity MOE < 7000N/mm2 as per ASTM C947.
4. Dimension and Tolerances:
a. Typical board dimension 1200mm x 2400mm
b. Nominal Thickness: 12.5 mm
c. Tolerances as per ASTM C 1325/ C473/ C1185
d. Length: ±3mm
e. Width: ±3mm
f. Thickness: ±0.8mm
g. Squareness: ±2.6mm
E. Vapour Control Layer
In the exterior components, condensation can form at any time of the year from convection or
vapor diffusion. A wall system must be structured in such a way to ensure that moisture
from convection and diffusion is safely directed outside.

F. Reinforcing Mesh
1. Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fibre mesh treated for compatibility
with other Cement Particle Board materials, made from continuous multi end strands
with retained mesh tensile strength of not less than 21 dN/cm as per ETA 004 or as
per ASTM E 2098; EIMA 105.01 whilst complying with ASTM D 578 and the
following:
2. Impact Resistance Cement Particle Board Standard 1 - Cement Particle Board /
ETICS - tested to ETA 004.
a. Standard Impact Resistance: Category II (1 layer of 160g/m2)
b. Medium Impact Resistance: Category I (1 & 2 layers of 160g/m2)
3. Impact Resistance Cement Particle Board Standard 2 - Cement Particle Board PB
Standard.
a. Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than160 g/m2.
b. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 127 g/m2.
c. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 136 g/m2.
d. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 244 g/m2 or a perforated hard PVC angle
corner bead with fiberglass mesh secured to the PVC angle.
G. Base Coat
1. Cement Particle Board manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the factory-
blended dry formulation of Portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and inert fillers
to which only water is added on the Site.
H. Primer
1. Cement Particle Board manufacturer's standard factory-mixed, penetrating primer for
preparing base coat surface for application of finish coat.
I. Finish Coat
1. 1.5 mm to 2mm minimum thickness for enhanced mildew resistance complying with
the following:
a. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments,
b. sound stone particles, and fillers.
c. Colour: As indicated on Drawings preferably light to medium colours for SRI values.
d. Texture / Finish: Match approved sample.
J. Trim Accessories
1. Type as specified, or as developed by the Contractor, to suit required condition and
to comply with Cement Particle Board manufacturer's written instructions;
manufactured from UV- stabilized PVC.
2. Corner Beads: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment to insulation, of depth
required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for
bonding to coating and back leg.
K. Elastomeric Sealant
1. Elastomeric Sealant Products: Provide recommended chemically curing, elastomeric
sealant that is compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related
materials, and complies with requirements for products and testing indicated in
ASTM C 1481 for products corresponding to description indicated below:
2. Preformed Foam Sealant Products: Provide sealant compatible with adjacent
materials and complying with requirements in ASTM C 1481.
3. Sealant Colour: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
L. Mixing
1. General: Comply with Cement Particle Board manufacturer's requirements for
combining and mixing materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other

materials except as recommended by Cement Particle Board manufacturer. Mix
materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by Cement
Particle Board manufacturer or discard.
M. Finishes
1. Approved finishes to be compliant with the following types:
a. Standard DPR (Dirt Pickup Resistance) Finish: 100 percent acrylic-based coating
offered
b. in standard and custom colours. The finishing touch that adds lasting colour and
texture
c. to exterior and interior walls.
d. E Finish: Water based lightweight, premixed 100 percent acrylic-based coating,
offered
e. in standard and custom colours
f. FM Finish: Water-based, acrylic coating with integral colour and texture, formulated
with
g. PMR chemistry
h. Specialty Finish: Factory mixed, water-based acrylic.
i. Elastomeric DPR (Dirt Pickup Resistance): Water- based, elastomeric acrylic coating.
j. with integral colour and texture and formulated with DPR chemistry
k. Hydrophobic (HDP) Finishes: 100 percent acrylic coating with integral colour and
texture
l. and formulated with hydrophobic properties.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with requirements for substrate tolerances, with Main
Contractor and Structural Engineer.
B. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions in the presence of the Engineer for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting the performance
and successful installation of the Cement Particle Board system.
C. Examine the roof edges, wall frames, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures to
ensure suitable conditions where the Cement Particle Board system will be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
E. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry.
F. Application of the coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Inspect substrate levelness vertically and horizontally with a 5m straightedge prior to base
profile installation.
B. For level & even substrate: Proceed to base rail installation, using either board adhesive
method 1 (Notched trowel method) or Method 2 (Ribbon & Dab Method).
C. For uneven substrates, with up to 10mm variation in level: Following survey agrees on the
extent of localized variations above 10mm variation in the level substrate for localized skim
levelling remedy. Following localized remedial levelling proceed to base rail installation,
using board adhesive method 2 (Ribbon & Dab Method).
D. For variations over 10mm: Contractor to be consulted to review and to confirm if acceptable
substrate levelness tolerances for Cement Particle Board are not met and to agree a
remedy.
E. For minor protrusions in substrate, localized chipping of substrate can be undertaken
following agreement with Contractor. Cutting the rear of the specified insulation boards
thickness is not
F. permitted as it will result in wall U-Values not being achieved. Agreement in writing is
required on remedy for variations over 10mm. Where possible, skim-apply a layer of base
coat over the blockwork to within tolerance level of 10mm. Re-inspect and agree tolerances
are met prior to commencement of Cement Particle Board using board adhesive method 2
(Ribbon & Dab Method).
3.3 STARTER BASE PROFILE

A. The Cement Particle Board Bearing profile is an aluminium profile designed as protection
and initial support to Mineral Wool boards and the base rail is used as a vertical and
horizontal levelling guide to help in Level EPS board installation.
B. The exact position of the bearing profiles is to be approved by the Engineer prior to
commencement of any related Works. The bearing profile location is typically at the DPC
level. It should not be above the level of the internal ground floor of air-conditioned buildings.
As external ground/grade level can vary, the position above external ground level cannot
be used as a reference level. If there is any doubt Contractors are to contact Cement Particle
Board supplier for site review.
C. Bearing profiles should be mechanically fixed to substrate at 300 centres. Bearing profile
lengths should not overlap, they should be levelled and butt jointed / fixed. Use appropriate
spacers to rear of base profile. The spacer thickness can be varied. For level substrates
allow for a 3- 5mm spacer gap for the thickness of the Cement Particle Board adhesive
application. For very uneven walls the spacer thickness can be adjusted to allow for higher

thickness board applications.
D. The thickness/depth of the bearing profile should correspond to the thickness of the
insulation board specified for the specific area in the Works.
3.4 CORNER PROFILE

A. For corners, window lintels, and column edges; Cement Particle Board Aluminium corner
beads or alternatively Cement Particle Board Plastic corner beads with fiberglass wing
mesh (10cm x10cm) are used at all corners/openings to protect edges from impact and to
achieve consistent straight edges. Fix windows reveal beads as required. Fix diagonal
stress patch mesh on all corners as indicated in Method Statement and overlap with corner
bead mesh to prevent cracks at corners.
B. Important: It is essential to use beading to avoid cracks and leakage around windows and
door reveals. Fire rated sealant can be used in conjunction with beading as a flexible gap
filler and sealant at junctions with substrate/window door frames.
3.5 CONTACT AREAS

A. For areas up to 2m height from ground level and as per project requirements.
B. Apply first coat of base coat material by trowel to an approximate thickness of 2mm and
immediately embed the 160g/m2 fiberglass mesh into surface by trowelling from centre out
to avoid any wrinkles. Overlap all fiberglass mesh edges by 10cm. Level with a 60cm
scraper without sprinkling water on the surface.
C. Allow the first layer of base coat overnight drying time before applying the second layer.
D. Following drying of 1st coat lightly dampen the dried first coat of Base coat with water using
a crop sprayer; then apply the second layer of Base Coat.
E. Apply second coat of base coat by trowel to an approximate thickness of 2mm and
immediately embed the 160g/m2 fibre glass mesh into the surface by trowelling from the
centre out to avoid any wrinkles. Overlap all fibre glass mesh edges by 10cm. Level with a
60cm scraper without sprinkling water on the surface. Allow the second layer of base coat
12 – 16 hours drying time before applying the third layer.
F. Following drying of second coat, lightly dampen the dried second coat of base coat with
water using a crop sprayer. Apply third coat of base coat by trowel at 1mm to 1.5mm
thickness. Ensure the full cover of the mesh and level off with a 60cm scraper without
sprinkling water on the surface.
3.6 NON-CONTACT AREA

A. NON-CONTACT AREAS – Areas 2m height above ground level (and above) & areas not
accessible to public or as per project requirements.
B. Apply 1 coat of Primer solution on the entire surface of the fixed mineral wool boards prior
to application base coat.
C. Apply 1st coat of base coat by trowel to an approximate thickness of 2mm and immediately
embed the 160g/m2 fibre glass mesh into the surface by trowelling from the centre out to
avoid any wrinkles. Overlap all fibre glass mesh edges by 10cm. Level with a 60cm scraper
without sprinkling water on the surface.
D. Allow the first layer of base coat overnight drying time before applying the second layer.
E. Following drying of first coat, lightly dampen the dried first coat of base coat with water using
a crop sprayer; then apply the second layer of base material.
F. Following drying of second coat, lightly dampen the first coat of base coating with water
using a crop sprayer. Apply second & final coat of base coat by trowel at 1mm to 2mm
thickness. Ensure the full cover of the mesh and level off with a 60cm scraper without
sprinkling water on the surface. Total thickness should be 3mm-4mm (materials

consumption: 4-6kg/m2).
G. Co-ordinate for the approval of basecoat levels prior to primer solution application.
H. Apply 1 coat of primer solution over the entire surface dry base coat and allow to dry for 72
hours prior to subsequent applications.
I. Note: It is important to prevent water ingress behind the Rendered Cement Particle Board
system. Therefore, special care should be taken to treat all gaps between system & walls
especially above window & door heads, beneath window & door sills, sides of windows
&doors, at roof /wall intersections, abutments of lower walls with higher walls, projecting
features & base of the walls etc. Fill in the gaps with low expansion PU foam, cut back and
seal with appropriate exterior grade fire rated sealant. A better option would be to fix suitable
aluminium flashing over these gaps to direct water to the exterior. The top of the parapet
wall should be covered with suitable coping. Gaps around flashings should be sealed with
fire rated sealant.
J. Gaps between aluminium base profile & walls should also be foam sealed and trimmed
back level prior to installation of boards.
3.7 DECORATIVE FINISH

A. Roller apply 1 coat of pigmented primer and allow to dry.
B. Apply 1 coat of finish coat (as per approved texture & colour) to a thickness of 1.5 – 2mm
with a material consumption rate of 2.5 – 3kg m² and allow to dry.
C. Note:
1. Application should not be done at very low or high temperatures (< 5oc or ≥40oc)
and/or in very windy conditions. Plan work accordingly.
2. Do not apply if rain is expected over the next 24 hours.
3.8 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATION

A. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with
applicable requirements in ASTM C 1481.
B. Apply joint sealants after the base coat has cured but before applying the finish coat.
C. Clean surfaces to receive sealants to comply with indicated requirements and Cement
Particle Board manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Apply primer recommended in writing by the sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed.
E. Install sealant backing rod to control depth and configuration of sealant joint and to prevent
sealant from adhering to back of joint.
F. Apply masking tape to protect areas adjacent to sealant joints. Remove tape immediately
after tooling joints, without disturbing the joint seal.

A. Façade Sub-Contractor shall discuss inspection review criteria with Architect and Façade
Consultant and engage trained representatives to inspect completed metal wall panel
installation, including accessories, based on agreed inspection criteria.
B. That works that do not comply with specified requirements, shall be removed, and replaced.
C. Façade Sub-Contractor shall ensure all tests and reports are conducted in a timely manner,
with sufficient provisions made for any required re-testing or follow-up rectifications and
inspections.
D. Any required additional tests, re-tests, and inspections shall be conducted at the Façade
Sub Contractor's expense, to verify compliance of rectifications or necessary additional
work with specified requirements.

E. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for any damage which may be caused to
adjacent materials and special care shall be exercised to avoid such damage.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Cement Particle Board walls from damage during construction, and remove and
replace protection as instructed for inspection, and remove fully on hand over.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary covering to installation of the Cement Particle Board system and
protection of other Work. Promptly remove spillages from window and door frames and
other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive Cement Particle Board system’s coatings.
B. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to the Cement Particle Board system
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before completion
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 93 00 – FAÇADE SEALANTS
Contents
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
1.4 DEFINITIONS
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1.8 MOCK-UP
1.12 PRE-INSTALLATION TESTING
1.13 FIELD CONDITIONS AND STORAGE
1.14 WARRANTY
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
2.2 WEATHER SEALANTS
2.3 STRUCTURAL SEALANTS
2.4 IGU SEALANTS
2.5 ACCESSORIES
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.4 STRUCTURAL SEALANT PRODUCTION QUALITY CONTROL AT FACTORY
3.5 STRUCTURAL SEALANT ADHESION AND CURE QUALITY CONTROL
3.6 PROTECTION
3.7 CLEANING

07 93 00 Facade Sealants
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Description
1. Structural sealants.
2. IGU sealants.
3. Weather Sealant.
4. Accessories.
B. Related Sections
6. APPENDICES
to:

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
A. SBC: Saudi Building Code
B. IGU: Insulated Glazed Unit, double glazing.
C. MAF: Movement accommodation factor.
D. PVB: Polyvinyl butyral, interlayer for laminated glass.
E. QA: Quality assurance.
F. QC: Quality control.
G. UV: Ultra-Violet.
H. ISO: International Organization for Standardization.
I. ICE: Institution of Civil Engineers
J. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
K. AAMA: American Aluminium Manufacturers Association
L. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
M. AISI – American Iron and Steel Institute.
N. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Weather sealant - Width: Distance between the two-bonding surface.
B. Weather sealant - Thickness: Minimum Depth of the installed weather sealant
C. Structural sealant - Structural bite: Minimum width of structural silicone sealant’s contact
surface on glass panel or support frame. (ASTM C1401)
D. Structural sealant - Glue line thickness: Dimension of installed structural silicone sealant
between two materials which sealant is bonding. (ASTM C1401)
A. ASTM C510 -05a Standard Test Method for Staining and Colour Change of Single- or
Multicomponent Joint Sealants
B. ASTM C603 -04(2008) Standard Test Method for Extrusion Rate and Application Life of
Elastomeric Sealants
C. ASTM C639 -01(2007) Standard Test Method for Rheological (Flow) Properties of
Elastomeric Sealants
D. ASTM C661 -06 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type
Sealants by Means of a Durometer
E. ASTM C679 -03 Standard Test Method for Tack-Free Time of Elastomeric Sealants
F. ASTM C681 -03 Standard Test Method for Volatility of Oil and Resin-Based, Knife-Grade

Channel Glazing Compounds
G. ASTM C712 -03 Standard Test Method for Bubbling of One-Part, Elastomeric Solvent-
Release Type Sealants
H. ASTM C719 -93(2005) Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric
Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement Hockman Cycle
I. ASTM C792 -04(2008) Standard Test Method for Effects of Heat Aging on Weight Loss,
Cracking and Chalking of Elastomeric Sealants
J. ASTM C793 -05 Standard Test Method for Effects of Laboratory Accelerated Weathering
on Elastomeric Joint Sealants
K. ASTM C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants;
2015a.
L. ASTM C910 -06 Standard Test Method for Bond and Cohesion of One-Part Elastomeric
Solvent Release-Type Sealants
M. ASTM C919 -08 Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications
N. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014a.
O. ASTM C961 -06 Standard Test Method for Lap Shear Strength of Sealants
P. ASTM C972 -00(2006) Standard Test Method for Compression-Recovery of Tape Sealant
Q. ASTM C1016 -02(2008) Standard Test Method for Determination of Water Absorption of
Sealant Backing
R. ASTM C1135 -00(2005) Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion
Properties of Structural Sealants
S. ASTM C1087 - Standard Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid- Applied
Sealants with Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems; 2016.
T. ASTM C1183 -04(2008) Standard Test Method for Extrusion Rate of Elastomeric Sealants
U. ASTM C1184 - Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants; 2014.
V. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016.
W. ASTM C1246 -00(2006) Standard Test Method for Effects of Heat Aging on Weight Loss,
Cracking and Chalking of Elastomeric Sealants After Cure
X. ASTM C1247 -98(2004) Standard Test Method for Durability of Sealants Exposed to
Continuous Immersion in Liquids
Y. ASTM C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants;
2008 (Reapproved 2012)
Z. ASTM C1249 – 06a Standard Guide for Secondary Seal for Sealed Insulating Glass Unites
for Structural Sealant Glazing Applications
AA. ASTM C1253 -93(2005) Standard Test Method for Determining the Outgassing Potential of
Sealant Backing
BB. ASTM C1257 -06a Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Solvent-Release-
Type Sealants
CC. ASTM C1265 -94(2005)e1 Standard Test Method for Determining the Tensile Properties of
an Insulating Glass Edge Seal for Structural Glazing Applications
DD. ASTM C1294 -07 Standard Test Method for Compatibility of Insulating Glass Edge Sealants
with Liquid-Applied Glazing Materials
EE. ASTM C1299 -03 Standard Guide for Use in Selection of Liquid-Applied Sealants
FF. ASTM C1311 -02 Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants

ASTM C1367 -06 Standard Test Method for Dead Load Resistance of a Sealant in Elevated
Temperatures
GG. ASTM C1369 - Standard Specification for Secondary Edge Sealants for Structurally Glazed
Insulating Glass Units; 07 (2014).
HH. ASTM C1375 -00(2005) Standard Guide for Substrates Used in Testing Building Seals and
Sealants
II. ASTM C1382 -05 Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Properties of Sealants
When Used in Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) Joints
JJ. ASTM C1392 -00(2005) Standard Guide for Evaluating Failure of Structural Sealant Glazing
KK. ASTM C1394 – 03 (2008) Standard Guide for In-Situ Structural Silicone Glazing Evaluation
LL. ASTM C1401 - Standard Guide for Structural Sealant Glazing; 2014.
MM. ASTM C1442 -06 Standard Practice for Conducting Tests on Sealants Using Artificial
Weathering Apparatus
NN. ASTM C1472 -06 Standard Guide for Calculating Movement and Other Effects When
Establishing Sealant Joint Width
OO. ASTM C1481 -00(2006) Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants with Exterior Insulation
and Finish Systems EIFS
PP. ASTM C1487 -02(2007) Standard Guide for Remedying Structural Silicone Glazing
QQ. ASTM C1501 -04 Standard Test Method for Colour Stability of Building Construction
Sealants as Determined by Laboratory Accelerated Weathering Procedures
RR. ASTM C1519 – 04 Standard Practice for Evaluating Durability of Building Construction
Sealants by Laboratory Accelerated Weathering Procedures
SS. ASTM C1521 -08 Standard Practice for Evaluating Adhesion of Installed Weatherproofing
Sealant Joints
TT. ASTM C1523 -04 Standard Test Method for Determining Modulus, Tear and Adhesion
Properties of Precured Elastomeric Joint Sealants
UU. ASTM C1564 -04 Standard Guide for Use of Silicone Sealants for Protective Glazing
Systems
VV. ASTM D2202 -00(2006) Standard Test Method for Slump of Sealants
WW. ASTM D2203 -01(2007) Standard Test Method for Staining from Sealants
XX. ASTM D2377 -00(2008) Standard Test Method for Tack-Free Time of Caulking Compounds
and Sealants
YY. BS 6093 - Design of joints and jointing in building construction. Guide; 2006+A1:2013.
ZZ. BS EN 1279 - Glass in building. Insulating glass units.
AAA. BS EN ISO 11600 - Building construction. Jointing products. Classification and
requirements for sealants; 2003+A1:2011.
BBB. BS EN 13022-1 - Glass in building. Structural sealant glazing. Glass products for structural
sealant glazing systems for supported and unsupported monolithic and multiple glazing;
2014.
CCC. BS EN 13022-2 - Glass in building - structural sealant glazing. Assembly rules; BS EN
13022-2.
DDD. BS EN 15434 - Glass in building. Product standard for structural and/or ultra-violet resistant
sealant (for use with structural sealant glazing and/or insulating glass units with exposed
seals); BS EN 15434.

EEE. BS EN ISO 11600 - Building construction. Jointing products. Classification and
requirements for sealants; 2003+A1:2011.
FFF. ETAG 002 - Guideline for European technical approval for structural sealant glazing kits
(SSGK); May 2012.
GGG. Manufacturer’s manuals
HHH. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; 2008.
III. Local (country/ State / Province) civil defence and building authority guidelines.
JJJ. SBC 201 General
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal requirements and procedures shall be compliant with minimum requirements
stipulated in Section 01 30 50- Façade Administrative Requirements.
B. Product Data:
1. Provide proposed sealants’ technical data sheets and proof of code compliance.
2. Provide datasheet and test results indicating sealant chemical characteristics,
application and design limitations, and available colour range.
3. For application against porous material, provide test certification for the sealant
against porous material.
4. Provide Façade Sub-Contractor and Façade Specialist Sub-contractor's checklists
for factory and field QA/QC.
5. Manufacturer's instructions for installation, surface preparation, factory and field
quality control testing
C. Certificates:
1. Certificate of Manufacturer's Approval. Approval Certificate from manufacturer shall
be provided for the proposed sealant and its intended use. The approval certificate
shall be provided prior to the commencement of its application for project works. The
Façade Sub-Contractor and Façade Specialist Sub-contractor shall be responsible
for obtaining and submitting this approval in a timely manner. No application of
sealant materials shall commence until the approval has been obtained from the
manufacturer.
D. The certificate of approval shall, as a minimum, indicate:
1. The drawing number, the date and any revisions to which the certificate applies,
approval shall ensure to all the relevant design, performance and test criteria set out
in this specification are complied.
2. Sealant's adhesion and compatibility test report with all components which proposed
sealants will come into contact and/or required with.
3. Approval of Joint design and configuration. Approval shall include consideration of
anticipated movement which sealant will be subjected to.
4. Datasheet on the life expectancy of the sealant materials.
5. Warranty confirmations for each application.
6. For weather sealants: The value of the Movement Accommodation Factor (MAF) for
each type of weather sealant as per BS 6093. The MAF is defined as the total
movement which a sealant is capable of tolerating throughout its working life
expressed as a percentage of the minimum joint width.
7. Reports indicating results of any pre-installation testing specified as per
manufacturer’s request and this specification.
E. Samples for material selection:
1. 2 number of sample boards illustrating sealant colours for selection.

A. Approval samples:
1. 2 number x 60 mm minimum long samples of each sealant.
F. Weather sealant joint design:
1. Provide verification of joint width and the movement capacity of the proposed sealant
to adequately allow for the required movement allowances, as indicated on shop
drawings.
G. IGU sealant joint design
1. Provide structural verification of IGU sealant dimensions, to accommodate all
structural load transfer and movements due to wind loads, climatic loads, and any
other loads applied to the sealant.
H. IGU sealant joint design for concealed toggled system:
1. Provide structural verification of IGU sealant dimensions to accommodate all
structural load transfer and movements due to wind loads, climatic loads, and any
other loads applied to the sealant.
2. Ensure IGU Sealant design comply with following minimum requirements:
a. If continuous toggle rebate is used, the thickness of the outer sealant shall be
minimum 6mm. Thickness of sealant shall be measured from inside of outer
glass lite to outer surface of toggle rebate.
b. If localized toggle rebate channels are used, the bite behind the localized
channels shall exceed 3 mm and the total length of the independent localized
toggle rebate channels shall not exceed 33% of the perimeter of the IGU.
I. Shop drawings:
1. Shop drawings shall document detailing of sealant joints with the following minimum
information.
a. dimensions,
b. attached materials and finishes,
c. dimensions of sealant joint such as structural bite and glueline thickness, or
thickness and depth
d. joint profiles, and support framing.
2. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and approved by Sealant Manufacturer as part of
the final approval criteria prior to fabrication commencement. Manufacturer’s
approved drawings shall be submitted for record prior to commencement of
fabrication.
J. Test reports:
1. Provide compatibility statements from the manufacturer of adjacent materials, such
as PVB interlayer, backer rods, coated metals, gaskets, membranes, etc. confirming
the proposed sealant product is compatible with their material and deterioration of
their materials resulting from contact with proposed sealants, will not occur. Such
compatibility statements shall be provided as part of shop drawings approval
process.
K. Calculations:
1. Provide calculations for structural bite, glue line thickness, shear, and other
parameters.
2. Provide calculations to verify joint design can accommodate relative movement
between attached elements.
3. Sealant joint to comply with the following as minimum:
a. Structural bite: 6 mm minimum and equal to or greater than glue line thickness
to meet minimum bite to glueline ratio requirements.
b. Glue line thickness: 6 mm minimum.
c. Unless otherwise accepted by sealant manufacturer, bite-to-glue line ratio:

Between 1:1 and 3:1.
d. Three-sided sealant adhesion by use of backer rod or bond breaker tape shall
be avoided.
e. Final approval of sealant design shall be provided by sealant manufacturer
and submitted for approval prior to commencement of fabrication.
L. Where applicable, structural sealant calculations for cold bending induced stress.
1. Sealant joint to comply with the following as minimum:
a. Structural bite: 6 mm minimum and equal to or greater than glue line thickness
to meet minimum bite to glueline ratio requirements.
b. Glue line thickness: 6 mm minimum.
c. Unless otherwise accepted by sealant manufacturer, bite-to-glue line ratio:
Between 1:1 and 3:1.
d. Avoid three-sided sealant adhesion by use of backer rod or bond breaker tape.
e. Permanent stress of sealant due to cold bending shall be considered along
with any other stresses induced by other applicable loads as well as effects of
relative movement.
f. Finite element analysis, accounting for modulus of the sealant, shall be
adopted to verify the induced stress due to permanent and non-permanent
load on sealant.
g. Final approval of sealant design and verification of joint, shall be provided by
sealant manufacturer and submitted for approval prior to commencement of
fabrication.

A. Review structural silicone sealant joints and develop shop drawings to comply with technical
requirement and guidelines from sealant manufacturer, and in compliance with this
technical specification.
B. All sealants used in the construction and assembly of components shall be stored, applied
and cured strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
C. All sealant and required primers supplied for the project shall be by a single source, unless
otherwise approved.
D. Expiry dates of sealants shall be monitored and no expired sealants shall be used for
project.
E. Façade Sub-Contractor and Façade Specialist Sub-contractor shall ensure sealant
manufacturer's technical representative conducts minimum inspections as follows.
1. Factory assembly: minimum 3 times per application type
2. Site Installation: minimum 3 times per application type
F. Report documenting sealant manufacturer's technical representative’s observations and
comments shall be submitted for record. Should any rectification be required on installed
works or work methods, rectifications measures shall be addressed immediately and
submitted before continuation of works.
G. Proposed inspection shall, as a minimum, be conducted at the following stages;
1. First visit shall be conducted during the production/installation for the first 20m2 of
panels.
2. Second Visit shall be production/installation during the next 80 m2 of panels.
3. Third visit shall be conducted during regular production/installation of panels.
H. Additional visits will be required should sealant manufacturer deem facility not acceptable
for production of panels.
I. Façade Sub-Contractor and Façade Specialist Sub-contractor shall ensure that sealants
will not adversely affect the system or any of the building components and have sufficient
elongation capacity to accommodate the required joint movements.

J. Façade Sub-Contractor and Façade Specialist Sub-contractor shall ensure all sealants
applied are fully traceable with respect to the sealant batch numbers (sealant code, source,
manufacturing and expiry dates), all test dates and results, application dates, applicator
names, all conditions during date of application.
1.8 MOCK-UP
A. Visual mock-up: All sealants contained within the visual mock-ups shall be representative
of the visual appearance for the proposed sealants in the final installed work terms of colour,
joint widths, sealant bites, surface finish, shape, general finish etc.
B. Performance mock-up: All sealants contained within the specified performance mock-ups
shall be identical with the proposed and approved sealant in terms of colour, joint width,
sealant bites, surface finish, shape, general finish etc., and that documented on the
approved project shop drawing and calculations. Following shall be noted;
1. Deviation from approved materials or design will result in rejection of the performance
mock-up test.
2. Do not proceed with installation until testing has passed and the results accepted.
3. Perform site pull adhesion test in accordance with ASTM C1193 Method A.

A. Environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) of assembly and storage
facilities shall be kept within limits recommended by manufacturer.
B. Install products under environmental conditions within manufacturer's recommended limits.

A. Delivery: Deliver manufacturer's unopened containers to the work site. Packaging shall bear
the following information:
1. Manufacturer’s name
2. Product name (Product Number) and type (description)
3. Batch Number.
4. Application and use instructions.
5. Surface preparation instructions.
6. VOC content.
7. Environmental requirements – storage and application.
8. Batch date, Expiry Date
9. Colour number.
B. Where solvent based materials are used, solvent-based materials shall be treated and
dispose of in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Sealant shall be stored in enclosed facilities with environmental conditions such as
temperature and humidity control within the acceptable range, per manufacturer's
instructions. Protect from freezing.
D. Handling: Maintain a clean, dry storage area, to prevent contamination or damage to the
coatings.

A. In accordance with Section 01 40 50 Façade Quality requirements, all installations, using
silicone structural sealant and weather sealants shall be per approved drawings, to illustrate
quality and finish of tooling, appearance, workmanship, adhesion, and weatherproofing.
B. Benchmark installation shall be considered as the first installation of;
1. Minimum size: 50m2 of cladding area.
2. Maximum size: 80m2 of cladding area.

C. Approved benchmark installation shall remain as part of work and will be used as basis for
acceptance of remaining sealant work.
D. Unacceptable samples shall be removed by Façade Sub-Contractor and Façade Specialist
Sub-contractor.
1.12 PRE-INSTALLATION TESTING

A. Adhesion testing shall be conducted prior to application of sealants, each application
condition shall be tested to ensure sealant exhibits satisfactory adhesion properties to the
substrate which it adheres to.
1. Factory applied sealants: Adhesion tests shall be conducted in the factory.
2. Site applied sealants: Adhesion test shall be by submission of representative
substrate sample to manufacturer for factory test.
3. Hand-pull tab test shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM C794.
4. Determine if primer is required. If so, re-test using primer.
B. Compatibility testing shall be conducted on proposed sealant, and any adhered substrate
prior to application of sealants for projects. All substrates which proposed sealant are in
contact with such as gaskets, spacers, setting blocks, coating extrusions/ metal works, and
other glazing accessories, shall be provided for testing:
1. Representative samples of substrates which sealant will be adhered to, shall be
submitted to sealant manufacturer for factory testing.
2. Testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C1087.
3. Incompatible accessories shall be replaced with ones recommended by and tested
by manufacturer as acceptable.
C. Façade Sub-Contractor and Façade Specialist Sub-contractor shall ensure the following
minimum number of samples are tested;
Substrates Requirements
Substrates Number of samples Size of samples
needed for each sealant
and substrate to be
tested
Aluminium or steel profile Min. 6 Pieces per 150-200 mm long
sealant/substrate
Following Cahier du CSTB 3488 Min. 10 Pieces per -
sealant/substrate
Coated, enameled or previously Min. 4 Pieces per (wxh) 150 mm X 300
untested glass sealant/substrate mm
Support materials (gaskets, backer Min. 2 Pieces per 100-200 mm long
rod, tapes in contact with silicone sealant/substrate
sealant)
Accessories (setting blocks, spacers, 3 Pieces per -
etc., in close proximity to the silicone sealant/substrate
sealant)
D. Stain testing shall be conducted prior to application of sealants, each application condition
shall be tested to ensure sealant does not result in staining of the porous material and vice
versa.
1. Stain testing shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM C1248.
2. Stain testing shall be conducted on test samples representative of the proposal
installation such as stone with applied sealer.
1.13 FIELD CONDITIONS AND STORAGE

A. Factory glazing room and storage shall be climate controlled as per sealant manufacture’s
requirements.

B. Factory application of sealant application shall strictly be carried out in dust proofed glazing
room.
C. On-Site application of sealant shall be carried out during times where environmental
conditions are within that specified by sealant manufacturer.
1.14 WARRANTY
A. Base warranty requirements shall be in compliance with minimum stipulated in Section 01
40 50 Façade Quality requirements.
B. Correct defective work within a one-year period after Date of Substantial Completion. This
includes rectification of any installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight
seal and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Only original products are accepted.
B. Oil, solvent based, organic or butyl-based materials shall not be used under any
circumstances. Only silicone-based sealant will be accepted.
C. Polyurethane, other UV sensitive materials and any material not compliant with minimum
requirements stipulated in this specification, shall not be used under any circumstances.
D. Sealant shall meet requirements stipulated in relevant international standards listed in
Section 1.5. Where two similar requirements are found, the most onerous shall be complied.
E. Pre-approved sealant supplier shall include:
1. Dow
2. Sika
3. Tremco
4. GE Momentive
5. Or equivalent
F. To be NEOM approved manufacturer / supplier.
2.2 WEATHER SEALANTS

A. Sealant gaps shall maintain a consistent width with maximum +/-1mm variance in joint
width.
B. Sealant joints shall be completely filled with sealant and supported by backer rods along
their full length.
C. The sealant shall not adhere to the backer rod.
D. The sealant joints shall be tooled to a clean, neat finish leaving no gaps or bubbles and no
excess sealant on adjacent surfaces.
E. Where differential movements are expected, sealants shall be applied in between two
quasi-parallel bond surfaces. Sealant shall not adhere to more than 2 different substrates.
F. Where sealant application is applied along an angled corner intersection of two surfaces,
the two surfaces shall be made from one component, with identical dimensions, and part of
the same composition with no relative movements.
G. Proposed sealants shall not adversely affect the system or any of the building components
and have sufficient elongation capacity to accommodate the required joint movements.
H. Weather sealants shall meet requirements stated in ASTM C920 class 50 or BS EN
ISO11600 LM 25.
I. Porous substrate: When used with porous substrate, sealant application shall be
evaluated for the following, as a minimum.
1. Method of surface preparation / cleaning, and method of achieving the required
adhesion, verified by and as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
2. Allow sufficient time for any water or solvent, used for cleaning porous substrate, to
completely evaporate prior to application of sealant.
3. Staining of porous substrate
4. Compatibility between sealant, primer/sealer if any, and any porous substrate.
J. External weather sealant shall be one component, low-modulus, non-sagging, non-
bleeding, neutral-cure silicone rubber sealant design for use in general weather sealing
applications,
1. Colour: As shown on drawings or to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's

standard range.
2. Movement Capability of cured sealant: Minimum +/- 25 percent
3. Service Temperature Range: -54 to 82 degrees C.
4. Installation Temperature Range (ambient): 10 to 45 degrees C.
5. Substrate Temperature shall not exceed 70 degrees C.
6. Shore A Hardness Range: 25 to 35 on cured sealant, after min. 7 days from
applications.
7. Suitable applications include:
a. Face seals of curtain wall systems without external capping profile.
b. General joint seals at coated metal sheet joints.
c. Termination detail between system, flashing and base structure.
d. Face seal interface between balustrade glass / glass fins and wedge blocks
e. Seals between ceiling boards and Façades.
f. Joints between mullion less façades.
2.3 STRUCTURAL SEALANTS

A. Structural silicone glazing shall be applied in dust free glazing room within the factory using
two-part natural curing sealant.
B. On site structural glazing works will only be permitted in special circumstances, and usually
limited to necessary glass replacement only. Approval from the Façade Consultant shall be
sought prior to any onsite structural sealant application.
C. Structural sealants shall not be applied on mill finish surfaces.
D. Structural sealants shall be in compliance with ASTM C1184, ASTM C1401 or ETAG 002.
E. Structural sealant shall have a minimum adhesion tensile strength of 690 kPa, when tested
to ASTM C1135.
F. Ultraviolet radiation resistant for 2000 to 4000 micro-watts minimum for 21 days.
G. Adhesion when subjected to ultraviolet radiation through glass in accordance with ASTM
C794 without failure.
H. Two component structural silicone sealant shall be high-strength, fast curing, non-sagging,
non-staining, non-bleeding, neutral- cure silicone sealant adhesive for bonding glass, metal
and other building components.
1. Composition: Neutral-cure silicone rubber consisting of base component and curing
agent.
standard range.
3. Movement Capability of cured sealant: Plus, and minus 12 percent.
applications.
8. Applications use for:
a. Connections between glazing and supporting components such as steel or
aluminium.
b. Connections between glazing and supporting components such as glass fin.
c. Special applications as required and approved.
d. Connections at turn corner between glazing and/or with support post.
I. Where usage is approved, one component structural silicone sealant shall be high-strength,
non-sagging, non-staining, non-bleeding, neutral-cure silicone sealant adhesive for bonding
glass, metal and other building components.
standard range.

applications.
2.4 IGU SEALANTS

A. IGU Sealant shall be strictly applied in a dust free, environment-controlled glass assembly
glazing room in the glass processor factory facility.
B. IGU sealants shall be in compliance to ASTM C1369 or ETAG 002.
C. The IGU silicone sealant shall be applied as secondary structural seal only adjacent to
polyisobutylene low vapor permeability primary seal to allow cavity seal between glass.
D. Where argon, Krypton or where gas loss will affect performance of insulated glass unit’s
performance,
E. Insulating Glass silicone sealant shall be two component, high-strength, non-sagging, non-
staining, non-bleeding, neutral-cure silicone sealant adhesive intended for use as a
secondary seal in air-filled double glazed or triple glazed insulating glass units.
standard range.
4. Installation temperature range: 10 to 35 degrees C.
applications.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer shall be non-staining and compatible with substrate and sealant proposed, and as
recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
1. Primer used shall be from the same manufacturer as the sealant and joint cleaner.
2. Primer proposed for project shall be subjected to adhesion tests conducted by
sealant manufacturer.
B. Joint Cleaner shall be non-corrosive and non-staining type, as recommended by sealant
manufacturer for its application.
1. Cleaner used shall be from the same manufacturer as the sealant and primer
supplier.
2. Cleaner shall be compatible with joint forming materials.
3. Cleaner proposed shall not contain halogenated solvent.
4. Joint Backing Rods shall be round closed cell polyethylene foam rod.
5. Backer rod shall comply with ASTM C1330.
6. Back rod shall be compatible with sealant.
7. Backer rod shall be oversized: 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width to effectively
retain sealant but maintain sealant depth.
C. Bond Breaker shall be pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for
its application.
1. Bond breaker tape shall effectively prevent adhesion to joint fillers or joint surfaces at
back of joint and allow sealant movement.
2. Bond breaker tape shall be compatible with sealant and adjacent substrate.
3. Bond breaker tape shall be polyethylene or other plastic tape recommended by the
D. Masking tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent type and tested to be compatible with silicone

sealant and adjacent surfaces by sealant manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Façade Sub-Contractor and Façade Specialist Sub-contractor shall under the supervision
on Sealant manufacturer provide a benchmark examination process to verify that substrate
surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work. Façade Sub-Contractor and Façade
Specialist Sub-contractor shall ensure location of such benchmark panels are recorded for
future reference.
B. Unless otherwise required by manufacturer, the following shall be checked shall be
conducted.
C. Metal framing surfaces to receive glazing are flat and smooth without slots, serrations, and
other irregularities.
D. Mill-finish aluminium is not acceptable as a substrate for structural silicone sealant.
Substrates shall be aluminium framing has alodine, anodized, fluorocarbon paint, or
polyester powder coat finish.
E. All materials used are verified as compatible with sealant.
F. Application conditions (temperature, humidity, etc.) are as per manufacturer's
recommended range and sections of this specification.
G. Sealant application shall be conducted in a space with sufficient ventilation for curing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Façade Sub-Contractor and Façade Specialist Sub-contractor shall provide a benchmark
preparation under the supervision of Sealant manufacturer, for all application conditions.
Façade Sub-Contractor and Façade Specialist Sub-contractor shall ensure location of such
benchmark panels are recorded for future reference.
B. Unless otherwise required by manufacturer, the following minimum preparation shall be
conducted;
1. Any loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant shall be
removed.
2. All sealant/primer receiving surfaces shall be clean, dry, and free of frost, dust, dirt,
grease, concrete, aggregates, oil, mildew, and other contaminants that might affect
adhesion.
3. All non-porous substrates shall be cleaned with two-cloth solvent wipe in accordance
with ASTM C1193, and sealant manufacturer’s requirements.
4. All elements shall be protected elements from surrounding the prepared works from
damage or disfigurement.
5. Based on results of adhesion test, primer shall be applied and checked based on per
suppliers recommended procedure.
6. Masking tape shall be applied as required to protect adjacent surfaces, to ensure
straight bead line, and facilitate cleaning.
C. Porous substrate: Surface preparation shall be evaluated, verified by testing by the sealant
manufacturer during design stage and prior to commencement of site work. Surface
preparation as recommended by sealant manufacturer shall be complied to during
implementation of project application.
D. Factory applied structural sealant:
1. Sealant shall be applied from original barrels using mixer and gun.
2. Sealant shall be applied in temperature and humidity controlled, dust- proof enclosed
glazing room.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Installation work shall be performed in accordance with sealant manufacturer's
requirements.
B. Installation shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C1193.
1. Structural dimensions shall strictly be compliant to design verified by approved
calculations, shop drawings and approved by sealant manufacture. The following
minimum design criteria shall apply:
a. Glueline thickness: 6 mm minimum.
b. Structural bite: 6 mm minimum and equal to or greater than glueline thickness.
c. Bite-to-glueline ratio: Between 1:1 and 3:1, unless otherwise approved by
Manufacturer.
C. Weather sealants joints, unless otherwise approved by sealant manufacturer, the following
minimum design criteria shall apply:
1. Width/depth ratio of 2:1.
2. Neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width.
3. Surface bond area on each side not less than 75 percent of joint width.
4. Sealant width shall not be greater than 15mm.
D. Other general installation guidelines are as follows;
1. Where compressed closed cell polyethylene backer rod is used, sealant application
shall commence a minimum of 4 hours after backer rod installation.
2. All bonding surfaces receiving primer/sealant shall be cleaned to requirements as
stipulated by sealant manufacturer.
3. Where joint backing is not used, bond breaker shall be installed.
4. Applied sealant shall be free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and
sags.
5. Mixing: Two-component sealants shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommended proportions. Use clean, airless mixing equipment. Do
not hand or mechanically mix in open container that is subject entraining air in
sealant.
6. Use manufacturer approved sealant-dispensing equipment to push sealant bead into
opening. Fill joint opening to full and proper configuration. Apply in continuous
operation. Ensure sealant fills entire joint and firmly contacts all surfaces.
7. Tooling: shall be carried out to the following minimum requirement;
a. Before skinning or curing begins, tool sealant with metal spatula.
b. Joints shall be tooled to a concave, clean, neat and smooth finish.
c. Materials that have not been tested for compatibility with sealant such as
water, soap, or alcohol shall not be used to facilitate tooling.
d. Eliminate air pockets and ensure complete contact on both sides of joint
opening.
8. Temporary glass support: Where use of temporary glass support is required,
temporary fasteners, clips, two-sided adhesive, and other means shall be used to
retain glass panels while sealant is applied and allowed to cure.
9. Complete horizontal joints prior to vertical joints. Lap vertical sealant over horizontal
joints.
3.4 STRUCTURAL SEALANT PRODUCTION QUALITY CONTROL AT FACTORY

A. Perform the following tests as indicated, as a minimum.
1. Glass Test: Required at:
a. After each pump start-up
b. After each container change
c. After each shift change (new personnel)
2. Butterfly test: Required at:

3. Snap time test: Required at:
B. Façade Sub-Contractor and Façade Specialist Sub-contractor shall implement any
additional quality procedure as requested by the sealant manufacturer.
C. Maintain logs and records.
1. The unit label and unit record sheet of the glass of curtain wall panel shall include the
batch number of the sealant used.
2. The silicone production log shall, as a minimum, include the date, the names of
responsible personnel, the project name, the silicone batch number.
3.5 STRUCTURAL SEALANT ADHESION AND CURE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests as indicated, as a minimum.
1. Dry peel adhesion test: Required at:
c. After each substrate change
d. After each shift change (new personnel)
B. As a minimum, the following logs shall be maintained, and be made available for review
where required.
1. The silicone production log shall include the date, the names of responsible
personnel, the project name, the silicone batch number.
2. The unit label and unit record sheet of the glass of curtain wall panel shall include the
batch number of the sealant used.
C. Façade Sub-Contractor and Façade Specialist Sub-contractor shall implement any
additional quality procedure, such as H piece tests or deglaze tests, as requested by the
D. Where primer is required, Façade Sub-Contractor and Façade Specialist Sub-contractor
shall apply primer per requirements of manufacturer and provide conduct checks on primer
prior to application of sealant.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Avoid other trade works at locations adjacent to uncured sealant. Avoid touch contact. Place
protection and barriers as required.
B. Ensure weather sealants will not be painted over. Coordinate with succeeding trades.
C. Do not tip curtain wall units and insulated glazing units until the time indicated by the
manufacturer.
D. Allow structural sealant to fully cure before adhesive is stressed. Use test specimens formed
at time of sealant application to verify curing time. When cured, remove temporary glass
supports.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Masking tape used in the application of sealant shall be removed after sealant has been
applied.
B. All adjacent soiled surfaces shall be cleaned.
C. Remove uncured sealant with solvent- dampened cloth, wearing solvent-resistant gloves,

immediately.
D. Scraping or cutting cured sealants from glass and coated metal surfaces are not acceptable.
All excess sealants shall be removed before curing.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 11 16 – FAÇADE GLAZED DOOR SYSTEMS
Contents
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.3 ABREVIATIONS
1.4 DEFINITIONS
1.6 SYSTEM WRITEUP
1.7 SUBMITTALS
1.9 MOCK-UP:
1.12 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.13 WARRANTY
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.2 GENERAL
2.4 INLINE SLIDING DOOR
2.5 SLIDING DOOR POWER OPERATORS
2.6 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS
2.7 FOLDING DOORS
2.8 REVOLVING DOORS
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.5 ADJUST DOOR INSTALLATION FOR SMOOTH OPERATION
3.6 DEMONSTRATION, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE:
3.7 PROTECTION
3.8 CLEANING

08 11 16 Facade Glazed Door Systems
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Description
1. Hinged door.
2. Sliding Door System.
3. Sliding door power operators.
4. Automatic sliding doors.
B. Related Sections
a. 08 44 13_Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall
b. 08 51 13_Aluminium Windows System
d. 08 81 23_Facade Glazing
e. 08 90 00_Architectural Louvers & Vents
6. APPENDICES
to:
C. MEP Drawings and Specifications.

L. Local (country/ State / Province) civil defence and building authority guidelines.
M. Saudi Building Code.
N. NEOM Requirements / Guidelines.
1.3 ABREVIATIONS
A. DC electric motor: rotary electrical motors that converts direct current electrical energy into
mechanical energy.
B. UAE: United Arab Emirates.
C. ISO: International Organization for Standardization.
D. CAD: Computer-aided design.
E. PDF: Portable document format.
F. ICE: Institution of Civil Engineers
G. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
H. AAMA: American Aluminium Manufacturers Association
I. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
J. AISI – American Iron and Steel Institute.
K. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers.
L. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.
M. AWS: American Welding Society.
N. BS: British Standard.
O. BS EN: British and European Standard.
P. DPC: damp-proof course.
Q. ETA: European Technical Approval.
R. ETAG: European Technical Approval Guidelines.
S. FPC: Factory Production Control.
T. VOC: Volatile organic compounds.
U. QA: Quality assurance.
V. QC: Quality Control.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door
operator to activate the operation of the door.
B. Knowing act: Consciously initiating the opening of a power operated door using acceptable
methods including wall mounted switches such as push plates and controlled access
devices such as keypads, card readers and key switches.
C. Safety Device: A device that detects the presence of an object or person within a zone
where contact could occur and provides a signal to stop the movement of the door.

A. American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM).
B. ICC A117.1-Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
C. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA).
1. AAMA 611 Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminium.
2. AAMA 1303.5 - Voluntary Specifications for Forced Entry Resistant Aluminium
Sliding Glass Doors.
3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
4. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
5. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings.
6. ANSI/BHMA A156.10 - Power Operated Pedestrian Doors.
7. ANSI/BHMA A156.19 - Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors.
8. ANSI/BHMA A156.38 American National Standard for Low Energy Power Operated
Sliding and Folding Doors.
D. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy Extruded
Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes.
2. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy Sheet and
Plate.
3. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences.
4. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference.
5. ASTM E 1886 - Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed
to Cyclic Pressure Differentials.
6. ASTM E 1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in
Hurricanes.
7. ASTM F 588 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of
Window Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact.
8. ASTM F 842 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of
Sliding Door Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact.
9. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass.
10. ASTM B221 - 14 Standard Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy
Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
11. ASTM B209 -14 Standard Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Sheet
and Plate.
12. ASTM C864-05 Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal
Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers.
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
2. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
F. British standards
1. BS 6375-1:2015+A1-Performance of windows and doors. Classification for
weathertightness and guidance on selection and specification.
2. BS EN 1026-Windows and doors. Air permeability. Test method.
3. BS EN 12207-Windows and doors. Air permeability. Classification.
4. BS EN 12152 Curtain walling. Air permeability. Performance requirements and
classification.

5. BS EN 12211:2016-TC Tracked Changes. Windows and doors. Resistance to wind
load. Test method.
6. EN 12210-Windows and doors - Resistance to wind load – Classification.
7. BS EN 1027-Windows and doors. Water tightness. Test method.
8. BS EN 12208-Windows and doors. Watertightness. Classification
9. BS EN 12154-Curtain walling. Watertightness. Performance requirements and
classification.
10. BS 8233-Guidance on sound insulation and noise reduction for buildings.
11. BS EN 12758-Glass in building. Glazing and airborne sound insulation. Product
descriptions and determination of properties.
12. BS EN 12217-Doors. Operating forces. Requirements and classification.

13. BS EN 60529 - Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
14. BS EN ISO 13849-1 - Safety of machinery. Safety-related parts of control systems.
General principles for design.
15. BS EN 179-Building hardware. Emergency exit devices operated by a lever handle
or push pad, for use on escape routes. Requirements and test methods.
16. BS EN 1125-Building hardware. Panic exit devices operated by a horizontal bar, for
use on escape routes. Requirements and test methods.
17. BS EN 1154-Building hardware. Controlled door closing devices. Requirements and
test methods.
18. BS EN 1155-Building hardware. Electrically powered hold-open devices for swing
doors. Requirements and test methods.
19. BS EN 1158-Building hardware. Door coordinator devices. Requirements and test
methods.
20. BS EN 1303-Building hardware. Cylinders for locks. Requirements and test methods.
21. BS EN 1527-Building hardware. Hardware for sliding doors and folding doors.
Requirements and test methods.
22. BS EN 1634-1:2014+A1-Fire resistance and smoke control tests for door and shutter
assemblies, openable windows and elements of building hardware. Fire resistance
test for door and shutter assemblies and openable windows.
23. BS EN 1670-Building hardware. Corrosion resistance. Requirements and test
method.
24. BS EN 1906-Building hardware. Lever handles and knob furniture. Requirements
and test methods.
25. BS EN 1935-Building hardware. Single-axis hinges. Requirements and test methods.
26. BS EN 12209-Building hardware. Mechanically operated locks and locking plates.
Requirements and test methods.
27. BS EN 12320-Building hardware. Padlocks and padlock fittings. Requirements and
test methods.
28. BS EN 12051- Building hardware - door and window bolts - requirements and test
methods.
29. BS 8424-Building hardware. Pull handles. Requirements and test methods.
1.6 SYSTEM WRITEUP

A. Refer to Appendix for system writeup.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Provide as specified in Section 01 30 50 Façade Administrative Requirements.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
4. Certified test reports indicating compliance with performance requirements specified

herein.
C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of colour chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available colours and patterns with a standard size
of 100 x 100mm.
1. Where normal colour and texture variations are to be expected, include 2 or more
units in each set of samples showing the limits of such variations.
2. Finish shall represent colour range, finish thickness, and sheen to be expected in the
finished Work.
D. Verification Samples: Two representative units of each type, size, colour and finish.
1. Two number, 400 x 400mm, minimum corner samples, associated hardware and
accessories, with all gaskets and available accessories, for each of the door system.
2. Glazing: Two samples, minimum size of 300 x 300mm, representing specified glass
for each door type including coatings.
3. Shop Drawings: Detailed drawings prepared specifically for the project by
manufacturer. Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of every typical
member. Shop Drawings to include the following:
4. Plans, elevations, and detail sections.
5. Include schedule identifying each unit, with marks or numbers referencing Drawings.
6. Show opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, profiles, product
components, anchorages, and accessories.
7. Indicate materials, methods, finishes, and types of joinery, fasteners, anchorages,
and accessory items. Specify finishes.
8. Provide setting diagrams and templates for hardware, anchorages, sleeves, and
bolts installed by others.
9. Where materials or fabrications are indicated to comply with certain design loadings,
include structural computations, material properties, and other information needed
for structural analysis.
10. Show surrounding substrates and relevant conditions.
E. Maintenance Manuals: Manufacturer's maintenance manuals.
F. Warranty: Manufacturer's warranty online registry.
G. Contract Closeout: Submit
1. As-Built Record Documents showing actual installation conditions.
2. Manufacturer's Warranty.
3. Parts lists and maintenance instructions including data on operating hardware,
lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative
maintenance.

A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer to have minimum ten years documented experience in the fabrication
of doors of the type required for this project and be capable of providing field service
representation during installation.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. Company experienced in performing work of this section that has specialized in
installation of work similar in scope and complexity required for this project for a
minimum of five (5) years.
2. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations:
1. Provide each type of product from a single manufacturing source to ensure

uniformity.
2. All accessories must be from single source aluminium door system manufacturer.
1.9 MOCK-UP:
A. Construct a mock-up with actual materials in sufficient time for Architect's review and to not
delay construction progress. Locate mock-up as acceptable to Architect and provide
temporary foundations and support.
B. Intent of mock-up is to demonstrate surface preparation techniques, quality of workmanship
and visual appearance.
C. Do not continue with remaining work until workmanship, colour, and sheen are approved by
Architect.
D. If mock-up is not acceptable, rebuild mock-up until satisfactory results are achieved.
E. Retain mock-up during construction as standard for comparison with completed work.
F. Incorporate accepted mock-up as part of the Work.

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
B. Field Measurements:
1. Check openings by field measurement before fabrication to ensure proper fitting of
work; indicate measurements on shop drawings.
2. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without measurements, and coordinate
fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit.

A. The first set of doors of installation of each system type shall be inspected as quality
benchmark.
B. The Façade Sub Contractor shall give notice and hold further works until the benchmark is
quality, materials and workmanship) for the remainder of the Works. The protection shall be

A. Comply with requirements of AAMA CW-10.
B. Package hardware items individually with necessary fasteners and installation templates
when necessary; label and identify each package with door opening code to match door
schedule.
C. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
D. Ensure safe storage to avoid scratch, damages of product’s surfaces.
E. Protect materials from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver until after wet work is complete
and dry.
F. Store materials in a dry, covered area and protected from weather conditions.
G. Inspect and report any freight damages to the manufacturer immediately.

1.13 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Door System Warranty: Submit, for Client’s acceptance, manufacturer’s
standard warranty.
1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from Date of Practical Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. Supplier of material shall be registered with Local Civil Defence with valid license.
B. Supplier of material shall have obtained Certificate of compliance from approved
certification body by Local Civil Defence for the proposed system.
C. Manufacturers must comply with the requirements of this section and must be submitted for
approval by relevant consultant.
D. For manual sliding door – Technal (Artline) or equivalent.
E. For automatic doors the following manufacturers are acceptable, Subject to compliance
with the requirements of the specifications of this Section.
1. Horton Automatic
2. Dormakaba
3. Geze
4. Blasi
5. Besam Entrance Solutions
6. Or Equivalent (if any proposed by the Contractor), Subjected to Engineer’s approval.
F. Condition to qualify “equivalent”: Qualification exercise consists of assessment of technical
adaptability of the façade system design and the material, quality procedures maintained,
minimum 10 (ten) years of its usage in similar project and credibility of its performance
record and other project references. All cost related to this exercise shall be borne by the
proposer. The proposer shall agree to use above listed pre-approved system manufactures,
should the proposed system is not acceptable to the engineer, after the completion of
qualification exercise.
G. To be NEOM approved manufacturer / Suppliers.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Materials:
1. Door systems shall be provided in locations as shown in Architectural Drawings.
2. Materials used for door systems shall maintain design intent similarity for all adjacent
curtain wall and doors systems.
3. Door systems shall meet the performance requirements stipulated in this
specification.
4. Refer to Section 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall and Section 01 40 50
Façade Quality Requirements.
5. Door systems shall be capable of resisting the structural loads such as wind load
based on BS EN 1991-4 and ASCE 07, and impact loading due to their relevant
applications.
6. Opening systems shall be low maintenance, and rust-proof, noise free during their
operation.
7. Operation of the systems shall not cause vibration, creaking to adjacent façade
systems.
8. Openings shall not damage adjoining finishes, frames or mechanisms when in
operation.
9. Systems shall allow for trouble free part replacement during their lifespan, whenever
required.
10. Proposed openings and support systems shall be endorsed by supplier prior to final
approval from the Architect and project team.
11. Thermally heat insulated aluminium profile systems must comply with the Stability
Check Guideline for Metal / Plastic Composite issued by the German Institute for
Construction Technology (DIBt).
Extrusions: Refer to Section 01 40 50 Façade Quality Requirements.

12. Solid Aluminium Sheet: Refer to Section 07 42 13 Façade Metal cladding and screen
Systems.
13. Glass and Glazing Materials:
a. Glass and Glazing to meet structural, deflection and impact resistance requirements
within the Technical Specification as well as door manufacturer, whichever is more
onerous.
b. Colour of glass shall be clear and laminated.
c. Glazing Setting blocks, edge blocks, and spacers in accordance with Section 08 81
23 Façade Glazing.
2.3 HINGED DOOR

A. General
1. Single leaf hinged door and Double leaf hinged door.
2. Opening outwards.
B. Accessories
1. Fasteners: Stainless steel, min Grade A4-70, exposed fasteners finish to match
aluminium colour.
2. Locking Devices: Manual locking by lock units with securing movement by rotation.
Locking system shall operate by opposing operation mechanism integrated in the
unit. Locking points shall be used to drive a 3-point locking system with stainless strip
head.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. Wind loads shall be submitted based on the wind pressure derived from desktop
study.
2. Deflection: Door framing system shall meet the following deflection criteria due to
maximum derived wind Load for the relevant door system:
a. L/200 of the span for spans less than or equal to 4 meters or
b. L/240+6.35mm for spans greater or equal to 4 meters or
Deflection criteria specified with Section 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall or as
required by manufacturer.
c. Whichever of the above requirements is more onerous.
D. Deflection of the door sash frames shall take into consideration the additional stress
imposed on the glass due to differential deflection.
E. Air permeability tests as per ASTM E283 shall be carried out on the performance prototype,
per the tender documentation.
1. maximum: 1.2 m3/hr per m2 at 600pa test pressure for fixed glazing, both exfiltration
and infiltration.
2. maximum: 6.24 m3/hr per m2 at 300pa test pressure for all operable vents, both
F. Water infiltration performance of the system shall be tested to ASTM E331 at 600Pa where
no leakage shall be seen on the inner side of façade.
G. Design and size doors to withstand the following load requirements, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 330, using test loads equal to 1.5 times the design wind load with
10 second duration of maximum load. No permanent deformation in excess of 0.2% of the
clear span per AAMA 501 is permitted.
H. Drainage: Drainage slot shall be as per system supplier’s requirements. System shall drain
to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network for any water entering joints,
condensation occurring in glazing channel, or migrating moisture occurring with system.
Façade Sub Contractor shall coordinate drainage path with door supplier and main
Contractor to ensure effective expulsion of water.

I. Refer to Section 01 40 50 Façade Quality Requirements and relevant consultants design
and technical documents for thermal and acoustic performance requirements.
J. Operating Force: Doors Operating force to comply with the ICC A117.1-Accessible and
Usable Buildings and Facilities requirements, where required.
1. Interior hinged door: 22.2N maximum
2. Sliding or folding door: 22.2N maximum
K. Expansion / Contraction: System to provide for expansion and contraction within system
components caused by a cycling surface temperature range specified in Section 08 44 13
Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall, without causing detrimental effects to system or
components.
L. Movement: Design to accommodate movement within system, movement between system
and perimeter framing components, dynamic loading, and release of loads, and deflection
of structural support framing, without damage to system or components, or deterioration of
perimeter seal.
2.4 INLINE SLIDING DOOR

A. General:
1. Door system frames shall comprise of multi-chamber tubular profiles for tracks and
stiles, allow for conceal fixings and placement of required door accessories.
2. Frames shall be incorporated with double groove for taking insulation of and the
mounting of added interior architraves.
3. Frames shall be incorporated with exterior groove and integrated architrave.
4. Where required, provision shall be made for lowered frames combined with one or
two access ramps for adaptation to the any required disabled access regulations.
B. Accessories:
1. Fasteners:
a. Stainless steel, min Grade A4-70, exposed fasteners finish to match aluminium
colour.
b. All fixings shall be concealed.
1) Rollers shall be provided to ensure smooth operation of the sliding
system. Rollers shall be adjustable by accessible screws enabling
wheel change without removing the leaf in compliance with standard
NF 23-301 without unhinging the sash. Bearing rollers shall be
polyamide banding cut low mounted on needle bearing and stainless
pin.
2) Locking Devices: Manual locking by lock units with securing
movement by rotation. Locking system shall operate by opposing
operation mechanism integrated in the unit. Locking points shall be
used to drive a 3-point locking system with stainless strip head.
C. Hardware:
1. Refer to Architectural Specification.
2. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminium,
stainless steel, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminium;
designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock sliding aluminium-
framed glass doors. Refer to Architectural Specification.
3. All hardware’s required for the smooth and safe operation of door system shall be
provided.
4. Type and finish of exposed hardware shall be submitted to Architect for approval.
5. Interior pull handle shall be provided with integrated actuator button.
a. Lever handle with exterior actuator with key, to couple with interior actuator handle.
b. Pull handle "straight design" with integrated actuator.
c. Pull handle "rounded" with integrated actuator.

d. Lateral stiles with blade reinforcer:
e. Actuator button on plate.
D. Performance Requirements:
study.
a. L/200 of the span for spans less than or equal to 4 meters or
L/240+6.35mm for spans greater or equal to 4 meters or
as required by manufacturer.
b. Whichever of the above requirements is more onerous.
c. Deflection of the door sash frames shall take into consideration the additional stress
3. Air permeability tests as per ASTM E283 shall be carried out on the performance
prototype, per the tender documentation.
a. maximum: 1.2 m3/hr per m2 at 600pa test pressure for fixed glazing, both exfiltration
and infiltration.
b. maximum: 6.24 m3/hr per m2 at 300pa test pressure for all operable vents, both
4. Water infiltration performance of system shall be tested to ASTM E331 at 600Pa
where no leakage shall be seen on the inner side of façade.
5. Drainage: Drainage slot shall be as per system supplier’s requirements. Façade Sub
Contractor shall coordinate drainage path with door supplier and main Contractor to
ensure effective expulsion of water.
6. Operating Force: Doors Operating force to comply with the ICC A117.1-Accessible
and Usable Buildings and Facilities requirements where required.
a. Interior hinged door: 22.2N maximum
b. Sliding or folding door: 22.2N maximum
7. Refer to Section 01 40 50 Façade Quality Requirements and relevant consultants
design and technical documents for thermal and acoustic performance requirements.
8. Expansion / Contraction: System to provide for expansion and contraction within
system components caused by a cycling surface temperature range specified in
Section 01 40 50 Façade Quality Requirement, without causing detrimental effects
to system or components.
9. Movement: Design to accommodate movement within system, movement between
system and perimeter framing components, dynamic loading, and release of loads,
and deflection of structural support framing, without damage to system or
components, or deterioration of perimeter seal.
2.5 SLIDING DOOR POWER OPERATORS

A. Provide operators that have been designed and fabricated to comply with specified
performance requirements, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding
standard systems.
B. Doors Powered to Open Position:
1. Doors powered by DC electric motor and mechanical gear assembly transmitted to
active leaves by fiberglass-reinforced tooth drive belt for silent operation. Doors using
roller chain, cable, or hydraulic devices shall not be accepted.
2. Power door to open position by signals received by microprocessor from the
actuation controls.
3. The last portion of the opening cycle shall be controlled by a microprocessor
generated signal that electronically reduces voltage to motor until door is fully open.
4. To permit safe passage if an obstruction is detected between opening doors and
surrounding walls or interior fittings, the doors shall immediately stop and after a
delay go to the full closed position. Door systems that only monitor the door travel

while closing shall not be acceptable.
C. Doors Powered to Closed Position:
1. The active leaf will only be powered to closed position when all actuating devices are
cleared and after remaining in the open position for a preset time delay (per ANSI
156.10).
2. The last portion of the closing cycle shall be controlled by a microprocessor
generated signal that electronically reduces voltage to the motor until door is fully
closed.
3. To permit safe passage between closing doors, the doors immediately reverse to
open position if an obstruction is detected, then resume their interrupted movement
at low speed to check whether the obstruction has disappeared or not. Door systems
that only monitor the door travel while opening shall not be acceptable.
D. Emergency Breakaway:
1. Full Breakout System: Interior sliding active leaves and sidelites swing out from any
position in sliding mode.
2. Fixed Sidelite System: Exterior sliding active leaves swing out from any position in
sliding mode.
3. Breakaway Pressure: Field adjustable to building code requirements and in
accordance with ANSI/BHMA 156.10 maximum of 23kg.
E. Watchdog Monitoring:
1. Microprocessor Software: Constantly monitor drive train system operations.
2. Watchdog Control Circuit: Assume command of system and shut down automatic
function by holding doors open, should door speed, motor function, or drive train
operations deviate from design criteria ranges.
3. Secondary Supervisory Circuit: Monitor main Watchdog control circuit every 255 door
cycles, ready to perform as a backup. Door systems that do not monitor control
circuits every 255 cycles will not be accepted.
F. Energy Saving Device:
1. Position Switch: Interior jamb mounted.
2. Door Opening Settings: Off, exit only, 2-way traffic, partial opening, and hold fully
open.
3. Partial Opening Mode: Switch reduces total door opening to reduce conditioned air
loss.
4. Heavy Weather Pile: Between doors and sidelites and between emergency
breakaway hardware and door stiles.
G. Electrical Requirements:
1. High-Efficiency DC Motor: Maximum of 3 A current draw. Allow for 5 operators to run
on one 20 Amp line.
2. Power: Self-detecting line voltage capable control. 120 V through 240V, 50/60 Hz,
3A incoming power with solid-earth ground connection for each door system. 5 door
systems on one 20A circuit.
3. Wiring: Separate channel raceway free from moving parts.
4. Brown out/high voltage capability: System has capability to operate at full
performance well beyond brown out and high line voltage conditions (85V - 265V)
sensing changes and adjusting automatically.
5. Convenience Battery: Shall be concealed in header and capable of full operation with
blackout conditions, including sensor capabilities for typically 100 cycles.
H. Motion and Presence Sensor Control Device:
1. Shall be a sliding door sensor utilizing K-band microwave technology to detect motion
and focused active infrared technology to detect presence, combined in a single
housing surface mounted on each side of the header.

a. The motion detecting microwave portion of the sensor shall be capable of bi-
directional and uni-directional sensing capability.
b. Presence sensor shall remain active at all times.
c. The sensor shall communicate with the automatic door operator through a self-
monitoring connection that allows the door to go into a failsafe mode preventing the
door from closing in the event of a sensor failure.
2. Motion/presence detecting sensors to be field installed and adjusted.
I. Performance Requirements:
study.
a. L/200 of the span, or as required by manufacturer whichever is worst.
b. Deflection of the door sash frames shall take into consideration the additional stress
design and technical documents for thermal and acoustic performance requirements.
section 08 44 13- Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall, without causing detrimental effects
to system or components.
2.6 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS

A. Automatic Sliding Door System: Door systems that do not employ a fail-safe self-monitoring
system will not be acceptable.
1. Overhead-concealed, electro-mechanical, microprocessor-controlled, sliding door
operator.
2. Surface-applied, electro-mechanical, microprocessor-controlled, sliding door
operator.
B. Door Operator: In compliance with NFPA 101, all panels shall allow "breakout" to the full
open position to provide instant egress at any point in the door's movement. To allow safe
egress, automatic operation shall be discontinued when any panels are in the "breakout"
mode. Doors and sidelites shall be sized to prevent pinch points at meeting stiles.
1. Automatic door equipment accommodates up to following weights for active leaf
doors:
2. Bi-Part Doors:150kg per active leaf.
3. Single Slide Doors:150kg per active leaf.
4. Operating Temperature Range: -35°C to 50-°C.
C. Emergency Breakaway:
1. Full Breakout System: Interior sliding active leaves and sidelites swing out from any
position in sliding mode.
2. Fixed Sidelite System: Exterior sliding active leaves swing out from any position in
sliding mode.
D. Construction:
1. Provide operator housing, floor rollers, and door carriers.

2. Doors and Frames: Door system frames shall comprise of multi-chamber tubular
profiles for tracks and stiles, allow for conceal fixings and placement of required door
accessories.
3. Extruded aluminium, Alloy 6063-T5.
4. Glass: Glazing material - ANSI Z97.1.
5. Sidelites: Provide sidelites to dimension heights and widths as shown on construction
documents with corresponding glazing. All sidelites shall have interlocking, nested
intermediate rails to prevent twisting and separation. The sidelites shall swing out and
allow the sliding doors to "breakout" to the full open position for instant egress at any
point in the door's movement per NFPA 101.
6. Header Case: Header shall be capable of supporting bi-parting doors of 150kg per
leaf over a span of 1800mm without intermediate supports. Operator shall be capable
of handling doors up to 110kg. It shall contain door operator and door mounting
components. The header shall be a "closed design" to reduce infiltration of airborne
contaminants and debris which may inhibit proper operation and facilitate increased
service requirements. Headers with visible underside carrier openings of 15mm or
greater, whether in the open or closed positions, shall not be accepted.
7. Composition: Provide two (2) steel roller wheels per door leaf having a 45mm
diameter with single journal sealed oil-impregnated bearings to ensure roller life on a
"replaceable" track to reduce service cost from normal usage and incorporate self-
aligning anti-risers to ensure proper panel positioning. Rollers of any urethane
composition shall not be accepted. The assembly shall allow the sliding doors to
swing outward and facilitate emergency egress in accordance with NFPA 101.
8. Pivots: Top and bottom concealed pivots, extruded aluminium.
9. Exterior Glazing Stop Extrusion: Provide nonremovable, security-type glazing bead
to prevent unauthorized entry. Doors utilizing removable exterior stops will not be
accepted.
E. Performance Requirements:
study.
a. L/200 of the span for spans less than or equal to 4 meters.
b. L/240+6.35mm for spans greater or equal to 4 meters or
c. as required by manufacturer whichever is more onerous.
3. Deflection of the door sash frames shall take into consideration the additional stress
design and technical documents for thermal and acoustic performance requirements
Section 01 40 50.
2.7 FOLDING DOORS

A. For folding doors following requirements have to be considered by the facade contractor:

B. Provide folding entrances capable of withstanding structural loads and thermal movements
based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for
this Project.
1. Bi-Fold
2. Configuration: Four-Panel, Fold-Out according to the architectural and façade
drawings.
3. Traffic Pattern: Two-way.
4. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Full
5. Mounting: Between facade mullions
6. Operating Range: Minus 10 deg F to 130 deg F
7. Entrapment Protection: The force required to prevent a stopped door, in the last 10
degrees of the opening, from moving in the direction of opening shall not exceed 40
lbf (180 N) applied at 1” (25 mm) form the leading edge of the FS leaf.
8. Break Away Requirements: Folding automatic entrances provided with a breakaway
device shall require no more than 50 lbf (222 N) applied at 1” (25 mm) from the latch
edge of the door to break door panels out. No header mounted stops, jamb mounted
stops, or jamb mounted cams, shall be required for proper function of breakaway
device. Breakaway system shall incorporate a disconnect switch to prevent powered
operation while door is broken out.
9. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
10. Emergency-Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for folding automatic entrance doors serving as a required means of
egress.
2.8 REVOLVING DOORS

A. Design Requirements:
1. Drawings indicate size, profile and dimensional requirements of revolving entrance
door assemblies required.
2. Enclosures: Circular metal panel and glass panel enclosure walls.
3. Canopy/Ceiling: Canopy ceiling, manual locks, operator, control, brake, sensor
switch detectors power assisted.
4. Doors and Locks.
5. Manual Operation: Door operation provided by hand pressure applied against a
movable revolving door surface which allows friction free door operation, through an
adjustable speed control unit, with a maximum of 12 RPM.
6. Power Assisted Operation: Compliant with ANSI/BHMA A156.19. Door operation
provided by hand pressure applied against a movable revolving door surface which
turns on power assist electric operator and revolves door at adjustable rate of 2 to 10
RPM for one (1) turn. Subsequent pushing on door is to reinstate one (1) revolution.
7. Automatic Operation: Compliant with ANSI/BHMA A156. Door operation provided by
use of a microwave motion detector placed to cover entire throat of entrance to
revolving door to detect someone approaching door. This actuation is to cause door
to revolve at adjustable rate of 4 8 RPM (adjustable) for one (1) complete turn after
actuating signal is removed, then stop and quarter point.
8. Locate motor and controls for revolving doors in conditioned space.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Doors shall accommodate the wind requirement form the wind tunnel test. Based on
the following codes:
a. BS EN 12211 _ Windows and doors. Resistance to wind load. Test method
b. BS EN 12210 _ Windows and doors. Resistance to wind load. Classification.
c. In case the wind tunnel study report does not cover the particular area, or in case of
geometry change in comparison to the wind tunnel study modeled geometry,
cladding wind pressures shall be derived from desktop study.

a. L/200 of the span for spans less than or equal to 4meters or
b. L/240+6.35mm for spans greater or equal to 4meters or
c. as required by manufacturer whichever is more onerous.
3. Deflection of the door sash frames shall take into consideration the additional stress
4. Air Infiltration:
a. Door Air Tightness to comply with BS EN 1220, Testing in accordance with EN 1026,
Class 4 at 600Pa.
b. Door Air Leakage shall be also compliant with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A4408
or equivalent, with relevant SASO standard having precedence as specified in Saudi
Building Code.
c. Air Leakage shall be labeled and certified by the manufacturer.
5. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with EN 12208
standards. There shall be no leakage as defined in the test method at a static air
pressure differential of 600 Pa and achieve a classification of E9. No water
penetration allowed to any parts of the exposed internal surfaces. Any water trapped
within door system shall be expelled within 15mins after completion of test.
7. Operating Force: Doors Operating force to comply with the ICC A117.1-Accessible
and Usable Buildings and Facilities requirements where required.
8. Refer to 01 40 50_ Facade Quality Requirements and relevant consultants design
and technical documents for thermal and acoustic performance requirements.
system components caused by a cycling surface temperature range specified 01 40
50_ Facade Quality Requirements, without causing detrimental effects to system or
components.

A. Fabricate components with smallest possible clearances and shim spacing around
perimeter of assembly.
B. Accurately fit, secure and seal joints and corners using corner keys and epoxy glue.
C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices.
D. Triple weatherstrip operable units, utilizing vulcanized or moulded corner gasket frames at
outer and centre positions.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Ensure surfaces are free of sand, grease and other deleterious materials.
C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
D. Verify that wall openings and adjoining wall materials are ready to receive work of this
section.
E. Coordinate dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
F. For revolving door installation,
G. verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
H. Floor shall be levelled and finished to a tolerance of +/-2mm across the entire diameter of
the door before fixing.
I. Examine and measure areas to receive automatic sliding doors. Notify Architect of
conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent utilization of doors. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
C. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance. Ensure
proper support has been provided at operator header. Ensure floor is level and smooth.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s printed directions, except as otherwise
specified herein.
B. Install door assembly in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
C. Protect aluminium members in contact with masonry, steel, concrete, or dissimilar materials.
D. Set units level, plumb, and true to line. Adjust operating hardware to ensure proper
operation.
E. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners including threaded fasteners for concrete and
masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.
F. Ensure a uniform, continuous, thermal barrier, air barrier and vapor barrier effect.
G. Where insulation, air barrier and vapor barriers are to be provided under other sections, co-
ordinate the Work such that continuity of thermal barrier, air barrier and vapor barrier, in all
cases, is achieved.
H. Mounting brackets shall be securely mounted to building structure in a positive manner
including sufficient reinforcements and anchors as required.
I. Installation shall be rigid and secure, installed by mechanics experienced in erection of
architectural metal. All screws and fittings shall be drawn up tightly. Rails shall be set plumb
and aligned.
J. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and at weatherstripping,
for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

K. Final adjusts and fix sash position relative to frame after installation.
L. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1.5mm/m non-cumulative or 3mm/3m, whichever
is less.
M. Clean door and frame surfaces promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage
to coatings.
N. For revolving door installation:
1. Use attachments to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate
construction tolerances and irregularities.
2. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
3. Install perimeter sealant, backing materials, and to installation requirements in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4. Install doors, with operators and controls, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Coordinate installation with electric service.
6. Fit, align, and adjust door assembly.

A. Field Inspection:
1. Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for product installation review in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Before placing doors in operation, AAADM certified technician shall inspect and
approve doors for compliance with ANSI/BHMA 156.10. Certified technician shall be
approved by manufacturer.
3. Record and Report any inconsistencies from manufacturer's recommendations
immediately to the Architect and Contractor.
4. Remedial works for the manufacturer’s comments shall be undertaken immediately
to the satisfaction of the manufacturer, works installed in the interim will not be
accepted unless approved by manufacturer.
5. Submit reports to Architect and Contractor within 2 days of visit.
B. Field testing:
1. Field Air tightness test: Test and inspect installed sliding/ operable -framed glass
doors as follows:
2. Testing Methodology: Test sliding/ operable aluminium-framed glass doors for air
infiltration and water resistance according to AAMA 502.
C. Air-Infiltration Testing:
1. Test Pressure: That required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA
101/I.S.2/A440 performance class indicated.
2. Allowable Air-Leakage Rate: 1.5 times the applicable AAMA/WDMA/CSA
101/I.S.2/A440 rate for product type and performance class rounded down to one
decimal place.
D. Water-Resistance Testing:
1. Test Pressure: Two-thirds times test pressure required to determine compliance with
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance grade indicated.
2. Allowable Water Infiltration: No water penetration.
3. Testing Extent: Three sliding aluminium-framed glass doors of each type as selected
by the Engineer and qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Conduct
tests after perimeter sealants have cured.
4. Test Reports: Prepared according to AAMA 502 by the independent testing and
inspecting agency

5. The installed façade will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
3.5 ADJUST DOOR INSTALLATION FOR SMOOTH OPERATION

A. Adjusting: Adjust operating items as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Operation Mechanism:
1. Architect and Façade Consultant to witness the operation mechanism of the installed
door.
2. Failure of door operation to be reported to main contractors and manufacturer. Failing
installed door unit to be replaced and examined again till successful door operation
archived, prior to handover.
3. Ensure operating force to comply with the ICC A117.1-Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities requirements where required.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION, TESTING, AND ACCEPTANCE:

A. Instruct COR in proper operation and maintenance of Automatic door equipment. Train
personnel in procedures to follow in event of operational failures or malfunctions.
B. Acceptance: At completion of project, and as a condition of acceptance, Automatic door
equipment and systems to be operated for a period of fifteen (15) consecutive calendar
days without breakdown.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from finished metal surfaces.
B. Wash exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft,
clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surface clean.
C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 44 13 – GLAZED ALUMINIUM CURTAIN WALL
Contents
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND GUIDELINES
1.5 SYSTEM WRITEUP
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1.8 MOCK-UPS
1.12 SEQUENCING
1.13 WARRANTY
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FACADE SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA
2.3 FABRICATION
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.6 REPLACEMENT
3.7 PROTECTION
3.8 CLEANING

08 44 13 Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Description
1. Complete exterior Aluminium framed curtain wall system including and not limited to
framing, secondary supports, and anchors to structure.
2. Complete exterior Steel framed curtain wall system including and not limited to
framing, secondary supports, and anchors to structure.
3. Complete exterior balustrades including and not limited to steel framing, handrail and
balusters, and anchors to structure.
4. Complete exterior skylight system consisting of steel framing, secondary supports,
and anchors to structure.
5. Interface treatment, waterproofing.
6. Performance testing requirements.
B. Related Sections
b. 08 51 13_Aluminium Windows System
6. APPENDICES
to:

K. Wind Tunnel report for Cladding Pressure.
M. Local (country/ State / Province) civil defence and building authority guidelines.
N. Saudi Building Code.
O. NEOM requirements / Guidelines.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
A. AAMA: American Aluminium Manufacturers Association
B. AESS: Architecturally Exposed Structural Steelwork
C. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
D. BS EN: British European Standard
E. ETA: European Technical Approval
F. ETAG: European Technical Approval Guidelines
G. FFL: Finished floor level
H. GFRC: Glass-fibre reinforced concrete
I. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
J. MEP: Mechanical Electrical and Plumbing
K. PPC: Polyester powder coating
L. QA: Quality assurance
M. VOC: Volatile organic compounds

A. Below standards shall be applicable. Where similar requirements are stipulated, most
onerous requirements shall be complied.
B. ASCE-07 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
C. Aluminium Design Manual
D. AISC 360- Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
E. AWS B1.10 - Guide for the non-destructive examination of welds
F. AWS B2.1 - Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification
G. AWS D1.1 - Structural welding (steel)
H. AWS D1.2 - Structural welding (aluminium)
I. AWS D1.3 - Structural welding (sheet steel)
J. AWS D1.6- Structural welding (stainless steel)
K. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures

for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminium Extrusions and Panels (with Coil
Coating Appendix);
L. AAMA 501.1 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls
and Doors Using Dynamic Pressure.
M. AAMA 501.2 - Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed
Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems.
N. AAMA 501.4 - Recommended Static Test Method for Evaluating Curtain Wall and
Storefront Systems Subjected to Seismic and Wind Induced Inter-Storey Drifts.
O. AAMA 501.5 - Test Method for Thermal Cycling of Exterior Walls.
P. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminium from Shop to Site.
Q. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
R. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength.
S. ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150
ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
T. ASTM B244 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Anodic Coatings
on Aluminium and of Other Nonconductive Coatings on Nonmagnetic Basis Metals with
Eddy-Current Instruments.
U. ASTM D523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.
V. ASTM D2244 - Standard Practice for Calculation of Colour Tolerances and Colour
W. ASTM D4214 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior
Paint Films
X. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
Y. ASTM E 119- Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials
Z. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences
Across the Specimen.
AA. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
BB. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
CC. ASTM E779 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan
Pressurization; 2010.
DD. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings
EE. ASTM E2307 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire
Barriers Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test Apparatus; 2015b.
FF. ASTM E2393 - Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive Joint
Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers; 2010a (Reapproved 2015).
GG. ASTM F959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension
Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners.
HH. BS 476 - Fire Tests on building materials and structures.
II. BS 4320 - Specification for metal washers for general engineering purposes. Metric

series.
JJ. BS 4464 - Specification for spring washers for general engineering and automobile
purposes. Metric series.
KK. BS 4933 - Specification for ISO metric black cup and countersunk head bolts and screws
with hexagon nuts.
LL. BS 6001-0 - Sampling procedures for inspection by attributes. Introduction to the BS 6001
(ISO 2859) series of standards for sampling for inspection by attributes.
MM. BS 6180 – Barrier in and about building. Code practice; 2011
NN. BS 7079 - General introduction to standards for preparation of steel substrates before
application of paints and related products.
OO. BS 8414:2015 Fire performance of external cladding systems
PP. BS EN 1364-3 - Fire resistance tests for non-loadbearing elements. Curtain walling. Full
QQ. BS EN 1364-4 - Fire resistance tests for non-loadbearing elements. Curtain walling. Part
RR. BS EN 14399-1 - High-strength structural bolting assemblies for preloading.
SS. BS EN 1991 - Actions on structures
TT. BS EN 1993-1-1 - Eurocode 3. Design of steel structures. General rules and rules for
buildings.
UU. BS EN 1993-1-10 - Eurocode 3. Design of steel structures. Material toughness and
through-thickness properties.
VV. BS EN 1993-1-5 - Eurocode 3. Design of steel structures. Plated structural elements.
WW. BS EN 1993-1-8 - Eurocode 3. Design of steel structures. Design of joints.
XX. BS EN 1998 – Eurocode 8. Design of structures for earthquake resistance.
YY. BS EN 1999-1-1 - Eurocode 9: Design of Aluminium structures. General structural rules.
ZZ. BS EN 1999-1-4 - Eurocode 9. Design of Aluminium structures. Cold-formed structural
sheeting
AAA. BS EN 287-1 - Qualification test of welders. Fusion welding. Steels; 2011.
BBB. BS EN 755-1 - Aluminium and Aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles.
Technical conditions for inspection and delivery.
CCC. BS EN 10021 - General technical delivery conditions for steel products.
DDD. BS EN 10025-1 - Hot rolled products of structural steels. General technical delivery
conditions.
EEE. BS EN 10056-1 - Specification for structural steel equal and unequal angles. Dimensions;
1999.
FFF. BS EN 10143 - Continuously hot-dip coated steel sheet and strip. Tolerances on
dimensions and shape.
GGG. BS EN 10210-2 - Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain
steels. Tolerances, dimensions and sectional properties.
HHH. BS EN 10296-1 - Welded circular steel tubes for mechanical and general engineering
purposes. Technical delivery conditions. Non-alloy and alloy steel tubes.
III. BS EN 10296-2 - Steel tubes for precision applications. Technical delivery conditions.
Welded cold sized tubes.

JJJ. BS EN 12020-1 - Aluminium and Aluminium alloys. Extruded precision profiles in alloys
EN AW-6060 and EN AW-6063. Technical conditions for inspection and delivery.
KKK. BS EN 13116 - Curtain Walling - Resistance to Wind Load - Performance Requirements
LLL. BS EN 13501 - Fire classification of construction products and building elements.
MMM. BS EN 62305-1 - Protection against lightning. General principles; 2011.
NNN. BS EN 62305-2 - Protection against lightning. Risk management; 2012.
OOO. BS EN 62305-3 - Protection against lightning. Physical damage to structures and life
hazard; 2011.
PPP. BS EN 62305-4 - Protection against lightning. Electrical and electronic systems within
structures; 2011
QQQ. BS EN ISO 1461 - Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles.
Specifications and test methods.
RRR. BS EN ISO 14732 - Welding personnel. Qualification testing of welding operators and
weld setters for mechanized and automatic welding of metallic materials.
SSS. BS EN ISO 3506-1 - Mechanical properties of corrosion-resistant stainless-steel
fasteners. Bolts, screws and studs.
TTT. BS EN ISO 4033 - Hexagon high nuts (style 2). Product grades A and B
UUU. BS EN ISO 9606-1 - Qualification testing of welders. Fusion welding. Steels.
VVV. BS EN ISO 9712 - Non-destructive testing. Qualification and certification of NDT
personnel. 970 - Wrought steels for mechanical and allied engineering purposes.
XXX. NFPA 251 - Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Resistance of Building Construction and
Materials; 2006.
YYY. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
ZZZ. NFPA 257 - Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies; 2012.
AAAA. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation
Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible
Components; 2012.
BBBB. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.
CCCC. ISO 3506 - Fasteners — Mechanical properties of corrosion-resistant stainless-steel
fasteners — Part 1: Bolts, screws and studs with specified grades and property classes
DDDD. BS PD 9710 - Requirements for carbon, carbon manganese and alloy hot worked or
cold finished steels.
EEEE. BS PD 9710 - Requirements for carbon, carbon manganese and alloy hot worked or
FFFF. SBC _ Saudi Building Code
1.5 SYSTEM WRITEUP


1.6 SUBMITTALS
stipulated in Section 01 30 50- Façade Administration Requirements.
B. Product Data:
1. Data sheets on each proposed product to include, as a minimum.
2. Product data sheet shall include all physical and performance characteristics.
3. Recommendations and requirements for storage and handling of proposed product.
4. Fabrication instructions and recommendations.
5. Warranty for product finish, as specified herein.
6. Product’s proof of compliance with local and project specific fire performance.
7. Sample of warranty.
8. Manufacturer data sheets for all proprietary items.
9. Any information as required by Project Consultant.
C. Certificates:
2. Tests reports on Aluminium coating
3. Tests reports on Paint proposed and applied.
conduct.
5. Quality Assurance Records.
7. Any required engineering judgement
8. Certification of all installers for proprietary systems.
conduct works.
D. Calculations:
1. Facade movement allowance including and not limited relative movement between
support points, thermal movement, differential movement of the glazing panels within
the framing of the system.
2. Thermal performance analysis, including perimeter conditions.
6. Condensation/Building Physics Analysis
7. Shop drawings:
8. Submit all shop drawings as necessary to fully detail the facade system(s) to;
9. Include all typical and non-typical details,
10. accommodate all requirements mentioned in system design criteria
11. Include installation strategy
12. Include replacement strategy
13. 3D representation may be required to depict for intricate or complex interfacing such
as skylight intersections, interfacing with opaque facade systems and waterproofing
interfacing at door jambs etc.
E. Test reports:
1. System Performance test reports. Where Façade Sub-Contractor submits pre-tested
system as part of system approval, test configuration and test conditions shall be
equivalent or more onerous than project condition.
2. Compatibility statements.
3. Adhesion Test report.
4. Tests on Coating systems.
5. Component test reports.

6. Site test reports including but not limited to Anchorage testing, water testing.
8. All test reports required by Local Authorities.

F. Samples for finish selection:
a. Three number, 300 mm long, minimum paint coated or anodized Aluminium
extrusions in each RAL Colour or anodized finish, as requested by the Architect.
These samples are for Colour finish selection only, hence an extrusion similar in
material and size to the project extrusion may be used.
repair/touch-up for;
1) a scratch of 1000m long
2) an 80mm x 80mm patch damage
c. Three number of all exposed accessories such as sealant, gaskets, fixings.
2. Selection of finish shall be subject to visual mockup.
G. Approval samples:
1. Three number, 400 x 400 mm, minimum 4-way joint samples, with all gaskets and
available accessories, for the main system(s). Fabricated from the actual production
materials, after start of production.
2. Three number, 50 mm long, minimum samples of each gasket, backer rod, and tape.
3. Three number, 300 x 300 mm, minimum samples of each membrane.
4. Three number minimum samples of setting block.
5. Three number minimum sample of each proprietary hardware/ironmongery item. If
the Architect requires, provide different options, which may include items from
different suppliers.
6. Three number, 300 x 300 mm, minimum samples of each backpan, infill panel,
cladding.
7. Three number minimum samples of each bolt, anchor, screw, pin, rivet and other
fixings.
9. Three number, 100 x 300 mm, minimum samples of flashing and water proofing
10. Three number minimum samples of each custom-made item, if any, taken from first
production.
11. 300mm long balustrade trim
12. Additional project specific items, as reasonably required.
I. Maintenance materials:
1. Minimum 20m for each exposed exterior extrusion
2. Minimum 20 m for each exposed detachable interior extrusion
3. Minimum 30 m for each gasket type.
of the project coatings to be kept in stock, one litre canned spray paint for each 2000

A. Factory inspections:
1. Main Contractor to arrange for the project team and Facade Consultant to carry out
factory inspections at the Facade Sub-Contractor's facility and glass processing
facility.
B. Factory visits shall include:
1. Pre-qualification visit
2. Visit during manufacturing of the first 40m2 of each type of panels for the project.
3. Manufacturing of panels
C. Façade Sub-Contractor shall ensure works are performed in accordance with AAMA CW-
10.
D. All coating shall be carried out by ISO 9001 qualified coaters, member of the aluminium
Finishing Association.
E. Refer to Section 08 81 23 Facade Glazing for performance requirements relating to glass.
F. Refer to Section 01 40 50 Façade Quality Requirements for welders’ certification and weld
testing required.
G. All weld inspectors shall be qualified to BS EN ISO 9712 for non-destructive testing.
H. All fixings shall have traceable origin, labelled boxes, relevant certificates. The labelling or
I. All assemblies shall meet the requirements of the KSA Engineer of Record, local civil
J. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing
Aluminium glazing systems with minimum 15 years of documented experience for
projects of, as a minimum, equivalent calibre.
1.8 MOCK-UPS
A. Visual mock-up:
1. Visual mock up shall be erected to
b. Review and finalize jointing and interfacing details
features/effect).
2. Submit location, size and other requirements for visual mock-up, based on
agreement with the Architect.
a. the extent of mock-up
b. overall sizing of profiles and interfacing details
c. Finishes including type and colour
site.
5. A frame shall be erected on site that can be reoriented to be observed in relation to
the Sun position.
6. The visual mock-up rig shall allow for

a. at least 6 glass samples, from at least 3 different pre-approved products,
b. glass samples to be installed as vision and as spandrel configuration.
c. Each sample size shall be minimum size 500 mm wide and 1000 mm high, or to

follow project dimensions.
d. spandrel zones shall have changeable back panels
7. The spandrel zones shall have changeable back panels, and at least 3 different back
panel colours shall be tested for appearance.
8. Confirmation of the performance data of all presented materials, glass, solid cladding,
and finishes to be given at the time of the visual mock up review.
9. Where accepted by the Architect, the assembly may have all bespoke parts, such as
customized extrusions (mullions, transoms, fins, sunshades (if any) etc, modelled by
folded Aluminium sheets, similar extrusions, or steel sections painted in the Colour
as selected by the Architect, to match the external dimensions of the project
elements.
10. A representation of the adjoining internal or external finishes shall be provided, to
allow realistic viewing experience.
11. This mock-up shall be approved by the Client and the Architect, prior to ordering of
approval of the visual mock-up will be at the Façade Sub-Contractor's own risk and
may result in abortive work.
12. Façade Sub-Contractor to arrange for the project team and Facade Consultant to
view the visual mock-up.
13. Shall repeat viewings of the visual mock-up at a later date be required, the time
charge of the Facade Consultant shall be paid.
14. The visual mock-up will be removed and disposed of if directed.
1. Refer to Section 01 40 50-Facade Quality Section for base testing requirements.
2. Provide the performance mock-ups as defined in the drawings. Should such mock-
up drawings not be available, the following shall be the minimum requirements;
a. During project kickoff meeting, Façade Sub-Contractor shall clarify requirement for
performance mockup with the Architect and the Façade Consultant.
b. Floor to Floor System: minimum 8 meters wide or 6 segments wide, whichever is
larger.
3. An additional mock up is required for testing stability of the balustrade element, to be
tested to a horizontal imposed load of:
a. During project kickoff meeting, Façade Sub-Contractor shall clarify requirement for
performance mockup with the Architect and the Façade Consultant.
b. Horizontal uniformly distributed line load specified for project.
4. Provide additional performance mock-up testing of all doors and windows installed
for the project, where existing equivalent test certificate cannot be located. Mock-up
shall be worst case considering dimensions and wind loading. Mock-up shall include
adjacent fixed panels where project conditions require. Chamber interface is only
acceptable at side where the opening interfaces concrete or masonry base structure.
5. Combination of different facade systems into one prototype is allowed given the
interfaces are as per project condition or interfacing does not influence structural
behaviour, and design wind load of two systems are similar. Proposal to combine
facades systems in performance mock-up tests shall be presented in an 3D mock-
up configuration drawing and pre-approved by Façade Consultant, prior to full
performance mock-up drawings submission.
6. If multiple facade systems are displayed within one prototype, each system shall
have at least one typical unrestrained panel that does not interface with the chamber
on any of its sides.
7. The Mock-up shall be designed and constructed using the same methods, materials,
extrusions, connections, member sizes and dimensions, sequences, techniques,
skills and quality control as per intended project design for the external cladding to
be installed on the building.
8. Where project glazing is not available for the time of the testing, clear uncoated glass

to the same thickness and temper as the proposed project glass may be used,
subject to approval. This might necessitate a separate visual mock-up with the
correct glazing as soon as the glazing is available, subject to the Architect's
requirements. Cost of additional mock-up shall be borne by Facade Sub-Contractor.
9. With the exception of thermal testing, thermally insulated spandrel zones to be
installed with back panels but without insulation.
10. Test sequences:
11. Multistorey wall enclosure systems and skylight:
a. If applicable, open and close openings 50 times. (to be repeated between tests)
b. ASTM E330/E330M Pre-loading (50% design loads)
c. ASTM E283 Air in/ex filtration
d. ASTM E331 Static water penetration
e. AAMA 501.1 Dynamic water test
f. ASTM E330/E330M Structural test (100% design loads)
1) ASTM E283 Repeat air in/ex filtration test
2) ASTM E331 Repeat static water penetration
g. AAMA 501.5 Thermal cycling test
h. AAMA 501.4 Seismic racking test (for Multistorey wall enclosure systems only)
1) ASTM E283 Repeat air in/ex filtration test (for Multistorey wall
enclosure systems only)
2) ASTM E331 Repeat static water penetration (for Multistorey wall
i. BMU tieback integrity test, if applicable
j. AAMA 501.2 Field water hose test
k. Degradation test, if required.
l. Reglazing demonstration, if required by the Facade Consultant
m. ASTM E330/E330M Structural safety test (150% of design loads)
n. ASTM E330/E330M Test to failure
o. Dismantle, inspect and record
C. Performance requirements
1. Air in and exfiltration test: ASTM E283 Conducted at 600Pa
a. Maximum: 1.2 m3/hr/m2 at 600Pa test pressure for fixed glazing, both exfiltration and
infiltration.
b. Maximum: 6.4 m3/hr/m2 at 300Pa test pressure for all operable vents, both exfiltration
and infiltration.
c. Air infiltration shall also meet the requirements specified in Saudi Building Code 601.
2. Static water penetration: ASTM E331
a. Conducted at 1kPa for fixed glazing and windows
b. No water penetration allowed to any parts of the exposed internal surfaces or
spandrel cavity.
c. Performance mock up design to include removable panels in spandrel areas to allow
access and confirmation of test pass.
d. Dynamic water penetration test: AAMA 501.1
e. No water penetration allowed to any parts of the exposed internal surfaces or
spandrel cavity.
f. Performance mock up design to include removable panels in spandrel areas to allow
3. Thermal cycling test: AAMA 501.5
a. Ambient Internal temperature: 24°C +2 °C /- 2 °C
b. Ambient Cooling temperature: -2°C +0°C /-5°C
c. Ambient Heating temperature: 80°C + 5°C /-0°C
d. During the heating phase a minimum surface temperature of 80°C + 5°C /-0°C should
be achieved. The ambient heating temperature should be adjusted to ensure this
value is met.

1) In the cold phase, internal surface temperature shall not fall below
10°C.
2) In the hot phase, internal surface temperature shall not fall above
36°C.
3) No visible damage.
4) Maintained air and water tightness.
D. Structural test: ASTM E330/E330M

1. Pre-loading - Conducted at 50% of Design Wind Loads.
2. Structural Test - Conducted at 100% of the Design Wind Loads:
3. No permanent deformation, no failure of any components. Maintained air and water
tightness.
E. Safety Test:
1. Conducted at 150% of Design Wind Loads: No failure of any components.
Maintained air and water tightness.
2. Test to failure - Record failure mode
F. Seismic test: AAMA 501.4
1. 100% of design value displacement to be applied in all directions (+X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z,
-Z) 3 times in cycles.
2. Racking movements shall be coordinated and confirmed with Project Engineer and
Main Contractor.
3. No visible deformation, no permanent deformation, no failure to any components.
G. Hose test: AAMA 501.2
1. 750mm radius area around the BMU socket point at area selected by the Façade
Consultant.
2. 5 minutes of water exposure at each location. Alternatively, repeat static water
penetration test.
3. Testing shall be performed by an AAMA accredited independent testing agency
4. Degradation testing:
5. Repeat static water penetration test with removed sealant, gaskets or system parts.
H. Re-glazing:
1. Provide a re-glazing demonstration on the test sample after the test sequence or
during the test sequence if otherwise required.
I. Dismantling:
1. The dismantling shall be witnessed by the independent testing facility representative
and monitored for discrepancies with the detail drawings. Any discrepancy from
mock-up system shop drawings shall be marked up on the drawings and photo
records taken. The test facility shall provide a list of these records along with a
summary list of the found discrepancies and state whether these modifications
impacted the test results.

A. Façade System shall comply with project conditions as stipulated Section 01 40 50-
Facade Quality Requirements.

A. The first 20 to 60 m2 of installation of each system type shall be inspected as quality
benchmark.
B. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall give notice and hold further works until the benchmark
is signed off. The Main Contractor shall arrange site access.
C. The approved benchmark shall be protected and used as a Quality Benchmark (in terms
of quality, materials and workmanship) for the remainder of the Works. The protection
shall be removed and replaced when directed or damaged.

A. Protect finished Aluminium surfaces with wrapping.
1. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond and cause damage to
surfaces when exposed to sunlight or weather.
2. Protective wrapping for materials and panels shall be removed within the time frame
directed by the manufacturer.
1. Protect finishes by applying heavy duty removable low-tac plastic film during
production.
2. Protect against transportation damage.
3. Provide markings to identify components consistently with drawings.
4. Exercise care in unloading, storing and installing panels to prevent bending, warping,
twisting and surface damage.
C. Product storage shall be protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and in
environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity as recommended by
manufacturer.
tight covering installed to provide ventilation, and prevent water stagnation.

surface damage.
5. Use separator blocks to avoid direct contact to glazing to prevent water entrapment
due to surface tension.
6. Rejected material shall be clearly marked (large red spray-painted X) and kept
separate until disposed.
1.12 SEQUENCING
A. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent
interruption of construction progress.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 40 50- Facade Quality Requirements, for base warranty requirements.
B. System Warranty: Provide joint written warranty by manufacturers and installer on the
works for a 12-year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. See Section 01 40 50 -Facade Quality Requirements, for base design criteria.
B. To be NEOM approved manufacturer / suppliers.
C. Façade system shall allow for accommodation of the building structure’s movements,
including, but not limited to:
1. Inter-storey drift
2. Slab deflections.
Façade system shall be carefully designed and analysed taking into account the worst-case
scenario of building movements and its relation to façade panels geometry.
D. To allow larger allowance for the building movements’ accomodation, the Façade
Subcontractor may apply blocking of the rotation of the glass with PVC packing and soft
EPDM separator, installed on the vertical profiles. This strategy requires careful
geometrical analysis of each condition and additional structural checks for the glass
panels with the local stresses which may occur after rotation of the framing and blocked
rotation of the glass. The analysis shall be properly documented by the Façade Engineer
and presented to the Façade Consultant for review.
E. Vertical and Inclined Application
1. Aluminium or steel curtain wall framing:
a. Dead Loads
1) The maximum in-plane deflection of any main framing member due to
dead loads and Live/Imposed/Impact loads shall not exceed L/500 of
the span or 3 mm whichever is the lesser.
b. Imposed/Live load and/or Wind load
- Deflection of framing elements shall not exceed:
o L/200 of the span for spans less than 3 m
o 5 mm + L/300 for spans in between 3 m and 7.5 m
o L/250 of the span for spans larger than 7.5 m
F. Cantilever balustrade:
1. Deflection shall not be greater than:
a. Under wind load: L/60 or 25 mm
b. Under combined human Impact/Live Load and 25% design wind load: L/65 or 20 mm
whichever is the lesser, or
c. Any more restrictive limits if set by the glass manufacturer.
G. Glass deflection
1. Infill Glass deflection shall not be greater than L/60 or 25mm.
2. Glass Edge deflection, with full recovery of glazing material, shall not be greater than:
a. Double glazed units: L/125
b. Single glazed units: L/175
c. Glass edge deflection shall be read in conjunction with framing deflection criteria. The
more onerous criteria shall be adopted.

A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 81 23-Facade Glazing

B. Extruded Aluminium: As specified in Section 01 40 50- Facade Quality Requirements and
05 12 10_ Façade Structural Framing.
C. Steel profiles: As specified in Section 01 40 50- Facade Quality Requirements and 05 12
10_ Façade Structural Framing.
D. Sheet Aluminium: As specified in Section 07 42 13-Metal cladding and screen system
E. Metal Finishes: As specified in Section 01 40 50- Facade Quality Requirements
F. Other materials:
1. Connections and anchors: As specified in Section 01 40 50- Facade Quality
Requirements
2. Firestopping: As specified in Section 07 84 53- Facade Fire Stopping & Smoke Seal
3. Weather sealant: As specified in Section 07 92 00-Facade Sealants
4. Glass: As specified in Section 08 81 23-Facade Glazing
5. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 81 23-Facade Glazing
6. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air
infiltration requirements. Refer to Section 08 81 23-Facade Glazing
7. Water proofing membrane and vapor barrier: Non-staining temperature and UV
resistant material, with sealed joints or overlaps as per manufacturer's
recommendation. Penetrations to be sealed or taped.
8. Insulation: Non-combustible, non-rotting, inorganic closed cell or impregnated water
repellent insulation material. Thickness and density to be derived by U-value checks,
as appropriate to achieve the requirements. To be installed with no gaps.
9. Structural Steel Sections: As specified in Section 05 12 10-Façade Structural
Framing.
10. Non-shrink grout: As specified in Section 05 12 10-Façade Structural Framing.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the whole of the facade
fabrication and shall ensure that such work is executed by persons skilled in such
fabrication, including all other components and elements to be used in the works.
B. Commencement of fabrication and placing orders prior to receiving a "B" status from the
relevant Consultants will be at the Facade Sub Contractor's own risk.
C. All assemblies and installation shall be fabricated in accordance with the approved
working drawings, in full conformity with the standards specified and per successfully
tested mock-up system.
D. All joints, arises, recesses, ribs, mullions, transoms, capping's etc., shall be to the
alignments shown to satisfy requirements of tender/ architectural drawings, and
approved by the Architect.
E. 9O° arises on extrusions were shown on Contract drawings shall be sharp and precise
and worked to a radius of no more than 1 mm.
F. The arris radius of any pressing shall be: for 3 mm Aluminium sheet, outer radius
maximum 4.5 mm, inner radius maximum of 1.5 mm, for other material thicknesses the
pressing radius shall be agreed with the Facade Sub Contractor.
G. All machining, rolling, cutting and any pre-assembled works shall be conducted in the
factory to ensure close fitting, straight, flush joints in all cases.
H. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall allow for taking all the necessary precautions to prevent
damage cause by contamination, abrasion or other marring of surfaces.
I. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for any damage which may be caused
to adjacent materials and special care shall be excised to avoid such damage.

A. A schedule of all fabrication tolerances for components of the system and associated
works to include size tolerances for glass constructions, pressed metalwork
constructions, ventilator constructions, weather seals and Aluminium sheet flatness
tolerances shall be submitted to the Facade Consultant.
1. Fabrication tolerances must be in accordance with the standards of manufacturing
and this Specification.
B. Finished dimensions of completed panels shall be such that the external cladding, when
erected, complies within the following permissible deviations:
Overall Dimensions Up to 2 m 2m-3m 3-4.5m
Straightness of edges 1mm 2mm 3mm
Squareness 1mm 2mm 3mm
Twist 1mm 2mm 3mm
C. Straightness of edges: Deviation from intended line. any variation to be evenly distributed
with no sudden bends or irregularities.
D. Squareness: Taking the longer of the 2 sides at any corner as a base line, the deviation of
shorter side from perpendicular.
E. Twist: Deviation of any corner from plane containing the other 3 corners
F. Flatness: The deviation under a 1m straight edge placed anywhere on a flat panel
surface: 1mm
G. Joint widths: +/- 1mm

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that curtain wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to
receive work of this section.
C. Verify that anchorage devices have been properly installed and located.
D. Prior to taking over the work area, survey the completed structures and note where out of
actions/ coordinate for solution the soonest.
E. Verify any Façade receiving substrate is acceptable for Façade Sub-Contractor’s
interfacing, anchorage and subsequent installation and waterproofing.
F. Review reinforcement plans from Main Contractor to most effectively design brackets to
minimize clashing of reinforcement within concrete, and embeds/anchorages for facades.
G. Review steelwork and MEP equipment layout from Main Contractor to most effectively
design brackets to minimize clashing of with façade works.
H. Coordinate locations of earthing points for earthing connections from facades.
I. Verify that Approved Status A or B documentation is available for the works prior to
J. The system shall successfully pass the Performance Mock-up Test prior to on- site
installation of any component included in this Specification. If such work commences, it is
entirely at the risk of the Façade Sub Contractor, and might be abortive.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
B. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced installers to
carry out the curtain walling works. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall provide and
maintain records to demonstrate the experience and related trainings of their installers.
Where proprietary systems are used, provide certification confirming installer’s training
with the manufacturer for the specific system proposed. Such records shall be recorded
on site and be available for review upon requested.
E. As installation proceeds, the Façade Sub-Contractor shall check the work and record all
non-compliance. Remedial proposals, deviations shall be agreed, approved and
documented.
extended, modified on site without prior permission, documentation, verification and
approvals.
G. Expansion joints must be installed to be permanently watertight and airtight under all
conditions and to operate without binding or causing noise or vibration.
H. Non-movement joints shall be rigidly secured.

I. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
J. Carry out all the necessary sighting and levelling to ensure all members are installed at
K. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
L. All joints must be square, true and as indicated on the drawings and have allowances
M. All fasteners and fixings are to be concealed, with no exposed screw or bolt heads or
nuts, unless specifically called to the attention of and then agreed by the Facade
Consultant. Any such agreed fixings must be Colour matched to the adjacent surfaces.
N. Do not install products that are defective, including warped, bowed, dented, and broken
O. Do not handle or tool products during erection in manner that damages finish, decreases
strength, or results in visual imperfection or failure in performance.
P. Return component parts that require alteration to shop for re-fabrication, if possible, or for
replacement with new parts.
Q. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be
R. Site repairs are not permitted, but superficial damages may be adjusted with the consent
of the Facade Consultant. When deciding whether the damage was superficial,
circumstances. Inform the Architect of any damage occurred on site for their
consideration and approval.
S. Install firestopping and smoke seal at each floor slab edge and at required partition wall
interface locations. Main Contractor and Façade Sub-Contractor shall invite Fire
Consultant, Authority representatives (Where required), and Façade Consultant for
intermittent inspection.
T. Provide replacement of decorative clip-on component where severe surface damage
U. Separate dissimilar metals; use gasket fasteners, isolation shims, or isolation
V. Tape where needed to eliminate possibility of electrolytic action between metals. Paint
finish, powder coating or anodizing finish will not be acceptable as bimetallic separator.
W. Site structural glazing is not permitted (with the exception of reglazing damaged units).
X. Site welding is not permitted after glazing, metal cladding, and/or when aluminium framing
has been installed.

A. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 0.8 mm.
B. Sealant Space at Interface Between Curtain Wall Mullions and Adjacent
1. Construction: Maximum of 20 mm and minimum of 6 mm.
C. Accuracy of curtain wall erection:
1. Level: +/-2 mm in any one storey height
2. Line: +/-2 mm in any one structural bay
3. Plumb: +/-2 mm in any one structural height
4. Plane: +/-2 mm in any one storey height
5. Squareness: +/-1 mm in any one storey height or structural bay width of 2 m and +/-

2 mm overall
D. Accuracy of junctions between components at joints:
Overall deviation from lines and planes:
4. To be limited to long wave formations of minimum wavelength of 20 m length with a
rate of exchange not exceeding 1:1000 and a maximum amplitude of 3mm

A. Refer to Section 01 40 50- Facade Quality Requirements for base testing requirements.
B. Engage a qualified accredited testing agency to perform tests.
C. The proposed testing dates shall be indicated in the program. The tested joints and areas
will be randomly selected by the Facade Consultant or Main Contractor on the days of
the testing.
D. The Facade Consultant shall reserve the right to require additional testing should of these
tests fail.
E. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall have staff available to remove parts of the cladding for
checking or failure investigation purposes. These locations shall be rectified and re-clad
on the Facade Sub-Contractor's own cost.
F. Replace curtain wall components that have failed field testing and retest until performance
is satisfactory.
G. Site Hose Test:
1. Test installed curtain wall for water leakage in accordance with AAMA501.2.
2. Test Procedures:
a. 15% of all installation area/length;
b. Where any failure occurs, an additional 5% of overall system area testing shall be
conducted in addition to the rectified area.
c. Tests shall include representation of all typical and interfacing locations.
d. Testing location shall be randomly selected by Façade Consultant.
H. Field Air tightness test & Water penetration testing:
1. Air Infiltration: Test areas of the installed system for compliance with system
performance requirements according to ASTM E 783.
2. Water penetration testing to be conducted at the specified air pressure differentials
according to ASTM E1105.
3. Testing Extent: Four glass lights of each type façade as selected by the Engineer
and qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Conduct tests after
perimeter sealants have cured.
4. Test Reports: Prepared by the independent testing and inspecting agency.
inspections.
3.6 REPLACEMENT
A. The installed glazing or cladding shall be capable of replacement without progressive
dismantling of the external cladding.

B. Critical air seals and other weather barriers shall be reasonably accessible for inspection,
repair and maintenance without the need to remove whole glazing units.
3.7 PROTECTION
B. Protection to the facade works, panels, units, elements shall be provided during storage,
C. Protective film for Aluminium extrusions and panels to be UV resistant and allow easy
removal without marks after completion of the project.
D. Ensure that the protective coverings do not mark the surfaces they protect.
E. Protective film to be removed from areas where after installation other elements are not
accessible or difficult its removal.
F. Protection must be removed in a manner that all finishes weather evenly to ensure colour
matching.
3.8 CLEANING
1. Remove any concrete spill from glazing, exposed finished metal surfaces within 10
minutes of the occurrence using soft wet cloth. Using scrapers on glazing is
prohibited.
2. Dust all sides, joints and surfaces of every units, panels, elements immediately prior
3. All joints and surfaces that would be concealed by an adjoining element, unit or
cladding shall be dusted, wiped clean, and dried prior to installation of the adjoining
element. Debris that could block movements at joints should be fully removed.
4. Ensure weep holes and drainage channels are unobstructed and free of dirt and
sealants.
B. Final cleaning:
materials, and immediately prior to completion of work.
C. Do not exceed the recommended time frame for protective film removal. Do not use metal
scrapers, acids or other removal techniques that may damage the coating of the panels.
D. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft,
clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 45 13 – STRUCTURED POLYCARBONATE PANEL
Contents
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
1.5 SYSTEM WRITEUP
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1.8 MOCK-UPS
1.12 SEQUENCING
1.13 WARRANTY
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.2 SYSTEM DESIGN
2.4 FABRICATION
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.6 REPLACEMENT
3.7 PROTECTION
3.8 CLEANING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Description
1. Complete exterior polycarbonate façade system including and not limited to framing,
secondary supports, and anchors to structure.
2. The polycarbonate façade will be single panel spanning floor to floor or between
frames in skylight and soffit applications.
3. The panel to provide the complete enclosure meeting the air and watertightness
requirements as well as the thermal performance limits.
4. Panel hanged on hook-on on bracket system fixed with cast-in inserts. The panel to
self-weight and wind loading without any additional supporting members.
B. Related Sections
2. 03 00 00 CONCRETE
c. 08 51 13_Alumimum Windows System
6. APPENDICES
limited to:
A. Architectural Tender Drawings and specifications.
B. Façade engineering drawings
C. Structural Tender Drawings and Specifications.

I. Fire Design Documentation.
J. Lighting and signage design documentation
K. Wind Tunnel for Cladding Pressures report.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
H. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
I. MEP: Mechanical Electrical and Plumbing
J. PPC: Polyester powder coating
K. QA: Quality assurance
L. VOC: Volatile organic compounds
Below standards shall be applicable. Where similar requirements are stipulated, most onerous
A. ASCE-07 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
B. ASTM D1929 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics
C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
D. ASTM D2843 - Standard Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or
Decomposition of Plastics
E. ASTM D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of
Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position
F. Aluminium Design Manual
G. AISC 360- Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
H. AAMA 501.1 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls
and Doors Using Dynamic Pressure.
I. AAMA 501.2 - Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of
Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems.
J. AAMA 501.4 - Recommended Static Test Method for Evaluating Curtain Wall and
Storefront Systems Subjected to Seismic and Wind Induced Inter-Storey Drifts.
K. AAMA 501.5 - Test Method for Thermal Cycling of Exterior Walls.
L. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
M. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105

N. ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150
O. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
P. ASTM E 119- Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials
Q. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences
Across the Specimen.
R. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
S. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
T. ASTM E779 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan
U. ASTM E2307 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire
V. ASTM E2393 - Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive Joint
W. ASTM F959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension
X. BS 476 - Fire Tests on building materials and structures.
Y. BS 4320 - Specification for metal washers for general engineering purposes. Metric
series.
Z. BS 4464 - Specification for spring washers for general engineering and automobile
AA. BS 4933 - Specification for ISO metric black cup and countersunk head bolts and
screws with hexagon nuts.
BB. BS EN 12020-1 - Aluminium and Aluminium alloys. Extruded precision profiles in alloys
EN AW-6060 and EN AW-6063. Technical conditions for inspection and delivery.
CC. BS EN 13116 - Curtain Walling - Resistance to Wind Load - Performance
Requirements
DD. BS EN 13501 - Fire classification of construction products and building elements.
EE. BS EN 62305-1 - Protection against lightning. General principles; 2011.
FF. BS EN 62305-2 - Protection against lightning. Risk management; 2012.
GG. BS EN 62305-3 - Protection against lightning. Physical damage to structures and life
hazard; 2011.
HH. BS EN 62305-4 - Protection against lightning. Electrical and electronic systems within
structures; 2011
II. BS EN ISO 12631 - Thermal performance of curtain walling. Calculation of thermal
JJ. NFPA 251 - Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Resistance of Building Construction and
Materials; 2006.
KK. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

LL. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation
Components; 2012.
MM. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.
NN. ISO 3506 - Fasteners — Mechanical properties of corrosion-resistant stainless-steel
OO. BS PD 9710 - Requirements for carbon, carbon manganese and alloy hot worked or
PP. BS PD 9710 - Requirements for carbon, carbon manganese and alloy hot worked or
QQ. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
RR. ASTM D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
SS. ASTM D785 - Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and Electrical
Insulating Materials
TT. ASTM D4812 - Standard Test Method for Unnotched Cantilever Beam Impact
Resistance of Plastics
UU. ASTM D256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact
Resistance of Plastics
VV. ASTM D3763 - Standard Test Method for High-Speed Puncture Properties of Plastics
Using Load and Displacement Sensors
WW. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and
Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus
XX. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
YY. ASTM D1003 - Standard Test Method for Haze and Luminous Transmittance of
Transparent Plastics
ZZ. ASTM D792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative
Density) of Plastics by Displacement
AAA. ASTM E108 - Fire Tests of Roof Coverings
BBB. UL 94- Classification and Flame-Retardant Thermoplastics
CCC. UL 723 - UL Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
DDD. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation
Characteristics of Exterior Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components
EEE. SBC _ Saudi Building Code
1.5 SYSTEM WRITEUP

1.6 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

a. Physical properties including data on material weight, wind load capacity, light
transmission, shading coefficient, and thermal expansion
b. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
c. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
d. Installation methods and procedures
C. Test Reports:
1. Submit test data indicating that all systems comply with specified requirements.
Submit results from the following:
a. Flame spread and smoke development, ASTM E 84.
b. Burn extent, ASTM D 635.
c. Self-ignition, ASTM D 1929.
d. Yellowness Index ASTM D1925
e. Abrasion resistance ASTM D1044
f. Fire test for vertical walls NFPA 285
g. Fire test for horizontal application ASTM E108.
h. Air infiltration, ASTM E 283.
i. Water penetration, ASTM E 331.
D. Uniform load deflection, E 330Certificates.
E. Calculations:
support points, thermal movement, differential movement of the glazing panels
within the framing of the system.
2. Thermal performance analysis, including perimeter conditions.
F. Shop drawings:
a. Include all typical and non-typical details,
b. accommodate all requirements mentioned in system design criteria
c. Include installation strategy
d. Include replacement strategy
G. Samples:
a. Three numbers 300 mm long as requested by the Architect.
b. Once finish is selected, provide additional 3 samples demonstrating the
aesthetic of repair/touch-up for;
c. Three number of all exposed accessories such as sealant, gaskets, and fixings.
2. Selection of finish shall be subject to visual mock-up.

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum ten years of documented experience in the
fabrication of daylighting systems and capable of providing field service representation
during installation.
B. Installer Qualifications: Experience with daylighting systems and trained by
manufacturer’s standard methods and policies, specializing in work similar to project
requirements and approved by manufacturer.
1.8 MOCK-UPS
A. Visual mock-up:
c. Review and finalize any feature geometry
3. Submit diagram drawings describing the entire mock-up for discussion on the
design meeting. Diagrammatic shall, as a minimum, show
a. The extent of mock-up
b. Overall sizing of profiles and interfacing details
c. Finishes including type and colour
site.
the Sun position.
up drawings not be available, the following shall be the minimum requirements
a. During project kickoff meeting, Façade Sub-Contractor shall clarify requirement
for performance mockup with the Architect and the Façade Consultant.
b. Floor to Floor System: minimum 6 meters wide or 3 segments wide, whichever
is larger.
5. The Mock-up shall be designed and constructed using the same methods,
materials, extrusions, connections, member sizes and dimensions, sequences,
techniques, skills and quality control as per intended project design for the external
cladding to be installed on the building.
C. Test sequences:
a. ASTM E330/E330M Pre-loading (50% design loads)
b. ASTM E283 Air in/ex filtration

c. ASTM E331 Static water penetration
d. AAMA 501.1 Dynamic water test
e. ASTM E330/E330M Structural test (100% design loads)
f. AAMA 501.5 Thermal cycling test
g. AAMA 501.4 Seismic racking test (for Multistorey wall enclosure systems only)
h. AAMA 501.2 Field water hose test
i. Degradation test, if required.
j. Reglazing demonstration, if required by the Facade Consultant
k. ASTM E330/E330M Structural safety test (150% of design loads)
l. ASTM E330/E330M Test to failure
m. Dismantle, inspect and record
D. Performance requirements
1. Air in and ex filtration test: ASTM E283 Conducted at 600Pa
a. Maximum: 1.2 m3/hr/m2 at 600Pa test pressure for fixed panels, both exfiltration
and infiltration.
b. Air infiltration shall also meet the requirements specified in Saudi Building Code
601.
a. Conducted at 1kPa
spandrel cavity.
c. Performance mocks up design to include removable panels in spandrel areas to
allow access and confirmation of test pass.
3. Dynamic water penetration test: AAMA 501.1
a. No water penetration allowed to any parts of the exposed internal surfaces or
spandrel cavity.
b. Performance mocks up design to include removable panels in spandrel areas to
allow access and confirmation of test pass.
d. During the heating phase a minimum surface temperature of 80°C + 5°C /-0°C
should be achieved. The ambient heating temperature should be adjusted to
ensure this value is met.
10°C.
36°C.
5. Structural test: ASTM E330/E330M
a. Pre-loading - Conducted at 50% of Design Wind Loads
b. Structural Test - Conducted at 100% of the Design Wind Loads:
c. No permanent deformation, no failure of any components. Maintained air and
water tightness.
6. Safety Test:
a. Conducted at 150% of Design Wind Loads: No failure of any components.

b. Test to failure - Record failure mode
7. Seismic test: AAMA 501.4
a. 100% of design value displacement to be applied in all directions (+X, -X, +Y, -Y,
+Z, -Z) 3 times in cycles.
b. Racking movements shall be coordinated and confirmed with Project Engineer
and Main Contractor.
c. No visible deformation, no permanent deformation, no failure to any
components. Maintained air and water tightness.
8. Hose test: AAMA 501.2
a. 5 minutes of water exposure at each location. Alternatively, repeat static water
penetration test.
b. Testing shall be performed by an AAMA accredited independent testing agency
9. Degradation testing:
a. Repeat static water penetration test with removed sealant, gaskets or system
parts.
10. Panel replacement:
a. Provide a panel replacement demonstration on the test sample after the test
sequence or during the test sequence if otherwise required.
11. Dismantling:
a. The dismantling shall be witnessed by the independent testing facility
representative and monitored for discrepancies with the detail drawings. Any
discrepancy from mock-up system shop drawings shall be marked up on the
drawings and photo records taken. The test facility shall provide a list of these
records along with a summary list of the found discrepancies and state whether
these modifications impacted the test results.
12. Fire Performance
a. Intermediate Multi-Story Fire Test (NFPA 285):
1) Resist flame propagation over the exterior surface.
2) Resist vertical spread of flame within combustible core/component
of panel from one story to the next.
3) Resist vertical spread of flame over the interior surface from one
story to the next.
4) Resist lateral spread of flame from the compartment of fire origin to
adjacent spaces.
b. ASTM E108 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings
1) Pass result as per ASTM E108 when skylight or roof cladding is
installed on more than 12m height.
c. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
1) If height of application is greater than 12m.
2) Minimum flame spread index 0-25.
3) Smoke developed index 0-450
4) If height of application is less than 12m.
5) Minimum flame spread index 26-75.
6) Smoke developed index 0-450
d. ASTM D1929 Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics
Self-ignition temperature to be more than 343oC.
13. ASTM D1925 Test Method for Yellowness Index of Plastics

a. Yellowness index to be less than 1.
14. Standard Test Method for Resistance of Transparent Plastics to Surface Abrasion
by the Taber Abrader
a. Abrasion shall be less than 0.5%

A. Façade System shall comply with project conditions as stipulated Section 01 40 50-

Facade Quality Requirements.

benchmark.
B. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall give notice and hold further works until the
benchmark is signed off. The Main Contractor shall arrange site access.
C. The approved benchmark shall be protected and used as a Quality Benchmark (in
terms of quality, materials, and workmanship) for the remainder of the Works. The
protection shall be removed and replaced when directed or damaged.

A. Delivery: Deliver to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging,
with labels clearly identifying product name, manufacturer, and installation location.
B. Do not stack stored sheets in direct sunlight.
C. Storage/Handling: Store products above the floor and under cover in a clean, dry area
until installation. Protect materials and finish from during handling and installation - do
not slide, drag or drop polycarbonate sheets as this may cause damage.
1.12 SEQUENCING
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering breakage.
B. Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering polycarbonate for breakage, loss of
light transmission, and yellowing.
C. Provide manufacturer’s written warranty covering acrylic for weathering.
D. Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering polycarbonate breakage, abrasion
resistance, coating failure, loss of light transmission, and yellowing.
E. See Section 01 40 50- Facade Quality Requirements, for base warranty requirements.
F. System Warranty: Provide joint written warranty by manufacturers and installer on the
works for a 12-year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

B. To be NEOM approved manufacturer/supplier.
D. Façade system shall be carefully designed and analysed considering the worst-case
E. To allow larger allowance for the building movements’ accommodation, the Façade
Subcontractor may apply blocking of the rotation of the panes with packing and soft
EPDM separator, installed on the vertical profiles. This strategy requires careful
geometrical analysis of each condition and additional structural checks for the
polycarbonate panels with the local stresses which may occur after rotation of the
framing and blocked rotation of the polycarbonate panel. The analysis shall be properly
documented by the Façade Engineer and presented to the Façade Consultant for
review.
F. Vertical and Inclined Application
1. Aluminium or steel framing:
a. Dead Loads
1) The maximum in-plane deflection of any main framing member due
to dead loads and Live/Imposed/Impact loads shall not exceed
L/500 of the span or 3 mm whichever is the lesser.
1) Envelope system: Systems shall be designed to accommodate
barrier loads in combination with full dead load and wind loading.
2) Deflection of framing elements shall not exceed:
• L/200 of the span for spans less than 3 m
• 5 mm + L/300 for spans in between 3 m and 7.5 m
• L/250 of the span for spans larger than 7.5 m
2. Polycarbonate panel:
a. Dead Loads
1) The maximum out of-plane deflection of panel due to dead loads
and Live/Imposed/Impact loads shall not exceed L/60 of the span
or 15 mm whichever is the lesser.
2) Permanent deflection of panel shall not create any ponding on roof.
1) The maximum out of-plane deflection of panel due to wind and
Live/Imposed/Impact loads shall not exceed L/60 of the span or 25
mm whichever is the lesser.
2.2 System Design

A. The polycarbonate façade is considered as a single panel spanning floor to floor. The
panel provides the complete enclosure meeting the air and watertightness requirements
as well as the thermal performance limits. Hook on brackets is used to hang the panel
with cast-in inserts provided. The panel is supporting its own self weight and wind
loading without any additional supporting members. The thickness of the polycarbonate
is preliminarily calculated as 125mm based on loading but also to meet the thermal
performance requirements of the project.
B. Hook on brackets is used to hang the panel with cast-in inserts provided. The panel is

supporting its own self weight and wind loading without any additional supporting
members. The thickness of the polycarbonate to be calculated based on loading but
also to meet the thermal performance requirements of the project.
C. To meet the architectural intent, the polycarbonate is slabs covering each part of the
structure dummy joints to be added at ceiling level and slab level to express this slab
like separation whilst maintaining a full panel for ease of installation. Slab edges to
include insulation with firestopping to fulfil slab to slab fire separation requirements.
D. The polycarbonate façade essentially to consists of two elements one is an extruded fin
the other a panel with textured face.
E. Panel size can be 1.5m in width and 5m in length, alternative sizes proposed by
contractor / manufacturer can be considered. Being vertical joints are considered at
1.5m intervals can be expected to be limited to 10mm in width to accommodate thermal
expansion and movements.
F. As a façade system the polycarbonate will need to have a full- scale system fire test to
NFPA 285 or BS 8414-1. These tests can be carried out regionally but require a
significant period of time to prepare for as the façade system needs to design and
engineered prior to a full-scale sample being produced for testing.

A. Extruded polycarbonate resin sheet panel, UV protection on exterior side complying
with the system design. Or selected by the Architect & Specialist consultant.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the whole of the
polycarbonate facade fabrication and shall ensure that such work is executed by
persons skilled in such fabrication, including all other components and elements to be
used in the works.
B. Commencement of fabrication and placing orders prior to receiving a "B" status from
the relevant Consultants will be at the Facade Sub Contractor's own risk.
C. All assemblies and installation shall be fabricated in accordance with the approved
working drawings, in full conformity with the standards specified and per successfully
tested mock-up system.
D. All joints, arises, recesses, ribs, panels etc., shall be to the alignments shown to satisfy
requirements of tender/ architectural drawings, and approved by the Architect.
E. All machining, rolling, cutting and any pre-assembled works shall be conducted in the
F. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall allow for taking all the necessary precautions to
prevent damage cause by contamination, abrasion or other marring of surfaces.
G. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for any damage which may be caused
to adjacent materials and special care shall be excised to avoid such damage.

A. A schedule of all fabrication tolerances for components of the system and associated
works to include size tolerances for polycarbonate panels and fabrication tolerances
shall be submitted to the Facade Consultant.
B. Fabrication tolerances must be in accordance with the standards of manufacturing and
this Specification.
C. Finished dimensions of completed panels shall be complies within the following
permissible deviations:

Twist 1mm 2mm 3mm
D. Straightness of edges: Deviation from intended line. any variation to be evenly

distributed with no sudden bends or irregularities.
E. Squareness: Taking the longer of the 2 sides at any corner as a base line, the deviation
of shorter side from perpendicular.
F. Twist: Deviation of any corner from plane containing the other 3 corners
G. Flatness: The deviation under a 1m straight edge placed anywhere on a flat panel
surface: 1mm
H. Joint widths: +/-1mm

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that anchorage devices have been properly installed and located.
C. Prior to taking over the work area, survey the completed structures and note where out
of tolerance discrepancy necessitates any action. Highlight these situations and
propose actions/ coordinate for solution the soonest.
D. Verify any Façade receiving substrate is acceptable for Façade Sub-Contractor’s
interfacing, anchorage, and subsequent installation and waterproofing.
E. Review reinforcement plans from Main Contractor to most effectively design brackets to
minimize clashing of reinforcement within concrete and embeds/anchorages for
facades.
F. Review steelwork and MEP equipment layout from Main Contractor to most effectively
G. Coordinate locations of earthing points for earthing connections from facades.
H. Verify that Approved Status A or B documentation is available for the works prior to
I. The system shall successfully pass the Performance Mock-up Test prior to on- site
installation of any component included in this Specification. If such work commences, it
is entirely at the risk of the Façade Sub Contractor and might be abortive.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
carry out the works. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall provide and maintain records to
demonstrate the experience and related trainings of their installers.
documented.
approvals.
their correct levels, in proper alignment and relationships within the specified
tolerances.

L. All joints must be square, true and as indicated on the drawings and have allowances
M. All fasteners and fixings are to be concealed, with no exposed screw or bolt heads or
nuts, unless specifically called to the attention of and then agreed by the Facade
Consultant. Any such agreed fixings must be Colour matched to the adjacent surfaces.
O. Do not handle or tool products during erection in manner that damages finish,
decreases strength, or results in visual imperfection or failure in performance.
1. Return component parts that require alteration to shop for re-fabrication, if possible,
or for replacement with new parts.
P. Site repairs are not permitted, but superficial damages may be adjusted with the
consent of the Facade Consultant. When deciding whether the damage was superficial,
circumstances. Inform the Architect of any damage occurred on site for their
consideration and approval.
Q. Install firestopping and smoke seal at each floor slab edge and at required partition wall
interface locations. Main Contractor and Façade Sub-Contractor shall invite Fire
Consultant, Authority representatives (Where required), and Façade Consultant for
intermittent inspection.
R. Provide replacement of decorative clip-on component where severe surface damage
S. Separate dissimilar metals; use gasket fasteners, isolation shims, or isolation
1. Tape where needed to eliminate possibility of electrolytic action between metals.
Paint finish, powder coating or anodizing finish will not be acceptable as bimetallic
separator.

1. Sealant space at interface between framings
B. Accuracy of polycarbonate panels erection:
2 mm overall
C. Accuracy of junctions between components at joints:
2. The offset in elevation between nominally in-line edges across a transverse joint
shall not be more than 10% of the width of the transverse joint.

4. Overall deviation from lines and planes:
a. To be limited to long wave formations of minimum wavelength of 20 m length
with a rate of exchange not exceeding 1:1000 and a maximum amplitude of
3mm
b. The above shall be measured from an optical or laser reference line.

C. The proposed testing dates shall be indicated in the program. The tested joints and
areas will be randomly selected by the Facade Consultant or Main Contractor on the
days of the testing.
D. The Facade Consultant shall reserve the right to require additional testing should of
these tests fail.
E. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall have staff available to remove parts of the cladding
for checking or failure investigation purposes. These locations shall be rectified and re-
clad on the Facade Sub-Contractor's own cost.
F. Replace system components that have failed field testing and retest until performance
is satisfactory.
G. Site Hose Test:
2. Test Procedures:
a. 15% of all installation area/length.
b. Where any failure occurs, an additional 5% of overall system area testing shall
be conducted in addition to the rectified area.
3. Testing Extent: Four polycarbonate lights of each type of façade as selected by the
Engineer and qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Conduct tests
after perimeter sealants have cured.
inspections.
3.6 REPLACEMENT
A. The installed polycarbonate panel shall be capable of replacement without progressive
B. Critical air seals and other weather barriers shall be reasonably accessible for
inspection, repair, and maintenance without the need to remove whole glazing units.
3.7 PROTECTION
B. Protection to the facade works, panels, units, elements shall be provided during
storage, transportation, during and after installation.
C. Protective film polycarbonate UV resistant and allow easy removal without marks after

completion of the project. (As per Manufacturer recommendation)
E. Protective film to be removed from areas where after installing other elements are not
F. Protection must be removed in a manner that all finishes weather evenly to ensure
colour matching.
3.8 CLEANING
1. Remove any concrete spill from polycarbonate panels exposed finished metal
surfaces within 10 minutes of the occurrence using soft wet cloth. Using scrapers
on glazing is prohibited.
2. Dust all sides, joints and surfaces of every unit, panels, elements immediately prior
sealants.
B. Final cleaning:
C. Do not exceed the recommended time frame for protective film removal. Do not use
metal scrapers, acids or other removal techniques that may damage the coating of the
panels.
D. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft,
clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 51 13 – ALUMINIUM WINDOWS SYSTEM
Contents
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
1.5 SYSTEM WRITEUP
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1.8 MOCK-UPS
1.12 SEQUENCING
1.13 WARRANTY
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.3 FABRICATION
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.6 REPLACEMENT
3.7 PROTECTION
3.8 CLEANING

08 51 13 Aluminium Windows System
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Description
1. Extruded aluminium windows with operating sash, site or factory glazed. Including
and not limited to framing, secondary supports, and anchors to structure.
B. Related Sections
6. APPENDICES
to:

O. NEOM Requirements / Guidelines.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
H. GFRC: Glass-fibre reinforced concrete
I. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
J. MEP: Mechanical Electrical and Plumbing
K. PPC: Polyester powder coating
L. QA: Quality assurance
M. SBC: United Arab Emirates
N. VOC: Volatile organic compounds
O. SBC: Saudi Building Code

A. The below standards shall be applicable. Where similar requirements are stipulated, most
onerous requirements shall be complied.
B. ASCE-07 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
C. Aluminium Design Manual
D. AISC 360- Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
E. AWS B1.10 - Guide for the non-destructive examination of welds
F. AWS B2.1 - Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification
G. AWS D1.1 - Structural welding (steel)
H. AWS D1.2 - Structural welding (aluminium)
I. AWS D1.3 - Structural welding (sheet steel)
J. AWS D1.6- Structural welding (stainless steel)
K. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminium Extrusions and Panels (with Coil
Coating Appendix);
L. AAMA 501.1 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors Using Dynamic Pressure.

M. AAMA 501.2 - Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed
Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems.
N. AAMA 501.4 - Recommended Static Test Method for Evaluating Curtain Wall and Storefront
Systems Subjected to Seismic and Wind Induced Inter-Storey Drifts.
O. AAMA 501.5 - Test Method for Thermal Cycling of Exterior Walls.
P. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminium from Shop to Site.
Q. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
R. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
S. ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi
T. ASTM B244 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Anodic Coatings on
Aluminium and of Other Nonconductive Coatings on Nonmagnetic Basis Metals with Eddy-
Current Instruments.
U. ASTM D523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.
V. ASTM D2244 - Standard Practice for Calculation of Colour Tolerances and Colour
W. ASTM D4214 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior
Paint Films
X. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
Y. ASTM E 119- Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
Z. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across
the Specimen.
AA. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
BB. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
CC. ASTM E779 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan
DD. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings
EE. ASTM E2307 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire
FF. ASTM E2393 - Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive Joint
GG. ASTM F959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension
HH. BS 476 - Fire Tests on building materials and structures.
II. BS 4320 - Specification for metal washers for general engineering purposes. Metric series.
JJ. BS 4464 - Specification for spring washers for general engineering and automobile
KK. BS 4933 - Specification for ISO metric black cup and countersunk head bolts and screws
with hexagon nuts.

LL. BS 6001-0 - Sampling procedures for inspection by attributes. Introduction to the BS 6001
(ISO 2859) series of standards for sampling for inspection by attributes.
MM. BS 6180 – Barrier in and about building. Code practice; 2011
NN. BS 7079 - General introduction to standards for preparation of steel substrates before
application of paints and related products.
OO. BS 8414:2015 Fire performance of external cladding systems
PP. BS EN 1364-3 - Fire resistance tests for non-loadbearing elements. Curtain walling. Full
QQ. BS EN 1364-4 - Fire resistance tests for non-loadbearing elements. Curtain walling. Part
RR. BS EN 14399-1 - High-strength structural bolting assemblies for preloading.
SS. BS EN 1991 - Actions on structures
TT. BS EN 1993-1-1 - Eurocode 3. Design of steel structures. General rules and rules for
buildings.
UU. BS EN 1993-1-10 - Eurocode 3. Design of steel structures. Material toughness and through-
thickness properties.
VV. BS EN 1993-1-5 - Eurocode 3. Design of steel structures. Plated structural elements.
WW. BS EN 1993-1-8 - Eurocode 3. Design of steel structures. Design of joints.
XX. BS EN 1998 – Eurocode 8. Design of structures for earthquake resistance.
YY. BS EN 1999-1-1 - Eurocode 9: Design of Aluminium structures. General structural rules.
ZZ. BS EN 1999-1-4 - Eurocode 9. Design of Aluminium structures. Cold-formed structural
sheeting
AAA. BS EN 287-1 - Qualification test of welders. Fusion welding. Steels; 2011.
BBB. BS EN 755-1 - Aluminium and Aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles.
Technical conditions for inspection and delivery.
CCC. BS EN 10021 - General technical delivery conditions for steel products.
DDD. BS EN 10025-1 - Hot rolled products of structural steels. General technical delivery
conditions.
EEE. BS EN 10056-1 - Specification for structural steel equal and unequal angles. Dimensions;
1999.
FFF. BS EN 10143 - Continuously hot-dip coated steel sheet and strip. Tolerances on dimensions
and shape.
GGG. BS EN 10210-2 - Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain steels.
Tolerances, dimensions and sectional properties.
HHH. BS EN 10296-1 - Welded circular steel tubes for mechanical and general engineering
purposes. Technical delivery conditions. Non-alloy and alloy steel tubes.
III. BS EN 10296-2 - Steel tubes for precision applications. Technical delivery conditions.
Welded cold sized tubes.
JJJ. BS EN 12020-1 - Aluminium and Aluminium alloys. Extruded precision profiles in alloys EN
AW-6060 and EN AW-6063. Technical conditions for inspection and delivery.
KKK. BS EN 13116 - Curtain Walling - Resistance to Wind Load - Performance Requirements
LLL. BS EN 13501 - Fire classification of construction products and building elements.
MMM. BS EN 62305-1 - Protection against lightning. General principles; 2011.

NNN. BS EN 62305-2 - Protection against lightning. Risk management; 2012.
OOO. BS EN 62305-3 - Protection against lightning. Physical damage to structures and life
hazard; 2011.
PPP. BS EN 62305-4 - Protection against lightning. Electrical and electronic systems within
structures; 2011
QQQ. BS EN ISO 1461 - Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles.
Specifications and test methods.
RRR. BS EN ISO 14732 - Welding personnel. Qualification testing of welding operators and weld
setters for mechanized and automatic welding of metallic materials.
SSS. BS EN ISO 3506-1 - Mechanical properties of corrosion-resistant stainless-steel fasteners.
Bolts, screws and studs.
TTT. BS EN ISO 4033 - Hexagon high nuts (style 2). Product grades A and B
UUU. BS EN ISO 9606-1 - Qualification testing of welders. Fusion welding. Steels.
VVV. BS EN ISO 9712 - Non-destructive testing. Qualification and certification of NDT personnel.
970 - Wrought steels for mechanical and allied engineering purposes.
XXX. NFPA 251 - Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Resistance of Building Construction and
Materials; 2006.
YYY. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
ZZZ. NFPA 257 - Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies; 2012.
AAAA. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation
Components; 2012.
BBBB. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.
CCCC. ISO 3506 - Fasteners — Mechanical properties of corrosion-resistant stainless-steel
DDDD. BS PD 9710 - Requirements for carbon, carbon manganese and alloy hot worked or
EEEE. SBC – Saudi Building Code
1.5 SYSTEM WRITEUP

1.6 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data:
1. Catalogue data indicating component dimensions, anchorage and fasteners, glass,
internal drainage details and certification of compliance with Performance
Requirements.
2. Data sheets on each proposed product to include, as a minimum,
a. Product data sheet shall include all physical and performance characteristics.

e. Product’s proof of compliance with local and project specific fire performance.
f. Sample of warranty.
g. Warranty for replacement of insulating glass in case of seal failure, or interpane
dusting or misting.
h. Manufacturer data sheets for all proprietary items.
i. Any information as required by Project Consultant.
C. Certificates:
2. Tests reports on Aluminium coating.
3. Tests reports on Paint proposed and applied.
conduct.
5. Quality Assurance Records.
7. Any required engineering judgement.
8. Certification of all installers for proprietary systems.
conduct works.
D. Calculations:
support points, thermal movement.
2. Thermal performance analysis.
E. Shop drawings:
1. Shop drawings indicating opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected
related work, and installation requirements, if this information is not shown in the
catalogue data.
a. Include all typical and non-typical details.
b. Accommodate all requirements mentioned in system design criteria.
c. Include installation strategy.
d. Include replacement strategy.
F. Test reports:
1. System Performance test reports. Where Façade Sub-Contractor submits pre-tested
system as part of system approval, test configuration and test conditions shall be
equivalent or more onerous than project condition.
2. Compatibility statements.
3. Adhesion Test report
4. Tests on Coating systems
6. Site test reports including but not limited to Anchorage testing, water testing.
7. Component test reports
8. All test reports required by Local Authorities.

G. Samples for finish selection:
a. Three number, 300 mm long, minimum paint coated or anodized Aluminium
extrusions in each RAL Colour or anodized finish, as requested by the Architect.
These samples are for Colour finish selection only, hence an extrusion similar in
material and size to the project extrusion may be used.

repair/touch-up for;
c. Three number of all exposed accessories such as sealant, gaskets, fixings.
2. Selection of finish shall be subject to visual mock-up.
H. Approval samples:
2. Three number, 50 mm long, minimum samples of each gasket, backer rod, and tape.
3. Three number, 300 x 300 mm, minimum samples of each membrane.
4. Three number minimum samples of setting block.
5. Three number minimum sample of each proprietary hardware/ironmongery item. If
the Architect requires, provide different options, which may include items from
different suppliers.
6. Three number, 300 x 300 mm, minimum samples of each backpan, infill panel,
cladding.
7. Three number minimum samples of each bolt, anchor, screw, pin, rivet and other
fixings.
9. Three number, 100 x 300 mm, minimum samples of flashing and water proofing
10. Three number minimum samples of each custom-made item, if any, taken from first
production.
11. 300mm long balustrade trim
12. Additional project specific items, as reasonably required.
I. Maintenance Data:
J. Maintenance materials:
1. Minimum 20m for each exposed exterior extrusion
2. Minimum 20 m for each exposed detachable interior extrusion
3. Minimum 30 m for each gasket type.
of the project coatings to be kept in stock, one litre canned spray paint for each 2000

1. Main Contractor to arrange for the project team and Facade Consultant to carry out
factory inspections at the Facade Sub-Contractor's facility and glass processing
facility.
B. Factory visits shall include:
1. Pre-qualification visit
2. Visit during manufacturing of the first 40m2 of each type of panels for the project.

3. Manufacturing of panels
C. Façade Sub-Contractor shall ensure works are performed in accordance with AAMA CW-
10.
D. All coating shall be carried out by ISO 9001 qualified coaters, member of the aluminium
Finishing Association.
E. Refer to Section 08 81 23 Facade Glazing for performance requirements relating to glass.
F. Refer to Section 01 40 50 Façade Quality Requirements for welders’ certification and weld
testing required.
G. All weld inspectors shall be qualified to BS EN ISO 9712 for non-destructive testing.
H. All fixings shall have traceable origin, labelled boxes, relevant certificates. The labelling or
I. All assemblies shall meet the requirements of the KSA Engineer of Record, local civil
J. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing
Aluminium glazing systems with minimum 15 years of documented experience for projects
of, as a minimum, equivalent calibre.
1.8 MOCK-UPS
A. Visual mock-up:
features/effect).
a. the extent of mock-up
b. overall sizing of profiles and interfacing details
c. Finishes including type and colour.
site.
the Sun position.
6. The visual mock-up rig shall allow for
a. at least 6 glass samples, from at least 3 different pre-approved products,
b. glass samples to be installed as vision and as spandrel configuration.
c. Each sample size shall be minimum size 500 mm wide and 1000 mm high, or to
follow project dimensions.
d. spandrel zones shall have changeable back panels
7. The spandrel zones shall have changeable back panels, and at least 3 different back
panel colours shall be tested for appearance.
8. Confirmation of the performance data of all presented materials, glass, solid cladding,
and finishes to be given at the time of the visual mock up review.
9. Where accepted by the Architect, the assembly may have all bespoke parts, such as
customized extrusions (mullions, transoms, fins, sunshades (if any) etc, modelled by
folded Aluminium sheets, similar extrusions, or steel sections painted in the Colour
as selected by the Architect, to match the external dimensions of the project
elements.
10. A representation of the adjoining internal or external finishes shall be provided, to

allow realistic viewing experience.
11. This mock-up shall be approved by the Client and the Architect, prior to ordering of
approval of the visual mock-up will be at the Façade Sub-Contractor's own risk and
may result in abortive work.
12. Façade Sub-Contractor to arrange for the project team and Facade Consultant to
view the visual mock-up.
13. Shall repeat viewings of the visual mock-up at a later date be required, the time
charge of the Facade Consultant shall be paid.
14. The visual mock-up will be removed and disposed of if directed.
up drawings not be available, the following shall be the minimum requirements;
a. During project kick-off meeting, Façade Sub-Contractor shall clarify requirement for
performance mock-up with the Architect and the Façade Consultant.
b. Floor to Floor System: minimum 8 meters wide or 6 segments wide, whichever is
larger.
3. An additional mock up is required for testing stability of the balustrade element, to be
tested to a horizontal imposed load of:
a. During project kick-off meeting, Façade Sub-Contractor shall clarify requirement for
performance mock-up with the Architect and the Façade Consultant.
b. Horizontal uniformly distributed line load specified for project.
4. Provide additional performance mock-up testing of all doors and windows installed
for the project, where existing equivalent test certificate cannot be located. Mock-up
shall be worst case considering dimensions and wind loading. Mock-up shall include
adjacent fixed panels where project conditions require. Chamber interface is only
acceptable at side where the opening interfaces concrete or masonry base structure.
7. The Mock-up shall be designed and constructed using the same methods, materials,
extrusions, connections, member sizes and dimensions, sequences, techniques,
skills and quality control as per intended project design for the external cladding to
be installed on the building.
8. Where project glazing is not available for the time of the testing, clear uncoated glass
to the same thickness and temper as the proposed project glass may be used,
subject to approval. This might necessitate a separate visual mock-up with the
correct glazing as soon as the glazing is available, subject to the Architect's
requirements. Cost of additional mock-up shall be borne by Facade Sub-Contractor.
9. With the exception of thermal testing, thermally insulated spandrel zones to be
installed with back panels but without insulation.
10. Test sequences:
a. If applicable, open and close openings 50 times. (to be repeated between tests)
b. ASTM E330/E330M Pre-loading (50% design loads)
c. ASTM E283 Air in/ex filtration
d. ASTM E331 Static water penetration
e. AAMA 501.1 Dynamic water test

f. ASTM E330/E330M Structural test (100% design loads)
g. AAMA 501.5 Thermal cycling test
h. AAMA 501.4 Seismic racking test (for Multistorey wall enclosure systems only)
i. BMU tieback integrity test, if applicable
j. AAMA 501.2 Field water hose test
k. Degradation test, if required.
l. Reglazing demonstration, if required by the Facade Consultant
m. ASTM E330/E330M Structural safety test (150% of design loads)
n. ASTM E330/E330M Test to failure
o. Dismantle, inspect and record
A. Performance requirements
1. Air in and ex filtration test: ASTM E283 Conducted at 600Pa
a. Maximum: 1.2 m3/hr/m2 at 600Pa test pressure for fixed glazing, both exfiltration and
infiltration.
b. Maximum: 6.4 m3/hr/m2 at 300Pa test pressure for all operable vents, both exfiltration
and infiltration.
c. Air infiltration shall also meet the requirements specified in Saudi Building Code 601.
a. Conducted at 1kPa for fixed glazing and windows
spandrel cavity.
c. Performance mock up design to include removable panels in spandrel areas to allow
d. Dynamic water penetration test: AAMA 501.1
e. No water penetration allowed to any parts of the exposed internal surfaces or
spandrel cavity.
f. Performance mock up design to include removable panels in spandrel areas to allow
d. During the heating phase a minimum surface temperature of 80°C + 5°C /-0°C should
be achieved. The ambient heating temperature should be adjusted to ensure this
value is met.
10°C.
36°C.
4. Structural test: ASTM E330/E330M
a. Pre-loading - Conducted at 50% of Design Wind Loads
b. Structural Test - Conducted at 100% of the Design Wind Loads:
c. No permanent deformation, no failure of any components. Maintained air and water
tightness.
5. Safety Test:
a. Conducted at 150% of Design Wind Loads: No failure of any components.

b. Test to failure - Record failure mode
6. Seismic test: AAMA 501.4
a. 100% of design value displacement to be applied in all directions (+X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z, -
Z) 3 times in cycles.
b. Racking movements shall be coordinated and confirmed with Project Engineer and
Main Contractor.
c. No visible deformation, no permanent deformation, no failure to any components.
7. BMU restrain socket test
a. 1.5kN or load as per stipulated by the Façade Access Sub-Contractor, whichever is
greater, applied for min 120 seconds in 5 directions (out, up, down, right, left).
b. No visible damage, no permanent deformation. Maintained air and water tightness.
8. Hose test: AAMA 501.2
a. 750mm radius area around the BMU socket point at area selected by the Façade
Consultant.
b. 5 minutes of water exposure at each location. Alternatively, repeat static water
penetration test.
c. Testing shall be performed by an AAMA accredited independent testing agency
d. Degradation testing:
e. Repeat static water penetration test with removed sealant, gaskets or system parts.
9. Re-glazing:
a. Provide a re-glazing demonstration on the test sample after the test sequence or
during the test sequence if otherwise required.
10. Dismantling:
a. The dismantling shall be witnessed by the independent testing facility representative
and monitored for discrepancies with the detail drawings. Any discrepancy from
mock-up system shop drawings shall be marked up on the drawings and photo
records taken. The test facility shall provide a list of these records along with a
summary list of the found discrepancies and state whether these modifications
impacted the test results.

A. Façade System shall comply with project conditions as stipulated Section 01 40 50- Facade
Quality Requirements.

benchmark.
B. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall give notice and hold further works until the benchmark is
quality, materials and workmanship) for the remainder of the Works. The protection shall be

A. Protect finished Aluminium surfaces with wrapping.
1. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond and cause damage to
surfaces when exposed to sunlight or weather.
2. Protective wrapping for materials and panels shall be removed within the time frame
directed by the manufacturer.

1. Protect finishes by applying heavy duty removable low-tac plastic film during
production.
2. Protect against transportation damage.
3. Provide markings to identify components consistently with drawings.
4. Exercise care in unloading, storing and installing panels to prevent bending, warping,
twisting and surface damage.
C. Product storage shall be protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and in
environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity as recommended by
manufacturer.
tight covering installed to provide ventilation, and prevent water stagnation.
D. Avoid contact with any other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface
damage.
E. Use separator blocks to avoid direct contact to glazing to prevent water entrapment due to
surface tension.
F. Rejected material shall be clearly marked (large red spray-painted X) and kept separate
until disposed.
1.12 SEQUENCING
1.13 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 40 50- Facade Quality Requirements, for base warranty requirements.
B. System Warranty: Provide joint written warranty by manufacturers and installer on the works
for a 12-year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

B. To be NEOM approved manufacturers/suppliers.
Façade system shall be carefully designed and analysed taking into account the worst-case
D. To allow larger allowance for the building movements’ accommodation, the Façade
Subcontractor may apply blocking of the rotation of the glass with PVC packing and soft
EPDM separator, installed on the vertical profiles. This strategy requires careful geometrical
analysis of each condition and additional structural checks for the glass panels with the local
stresses which may occur after rotation of the framing and blocked rotation of the glass. The
analysis shall be properly documented by the Façade Engineer and presented to the
Façade Consultant for review.
E. Vertical and Inclined Application
1. Aluminium or steel curtain wall framing:
a. Dead Loads
1) The maximum in-plane deflection of any main framing member due to
dead loads and Live/Imposed/Impact loads shall not exceed L/500 of
the span or 3 mm whichever is the lesser.
- Deflection of framing elements shall not exceed:
o L/200 of the span for spans less than 3 m
o 5 mm + L/300 for spans in between 3 m and 7.5 m
o L/250 of the span for spans larger than 7.5 m
F. Cantilever balustrade:
1. Deflection shall not be greater than:
b. Under combined human Impact/Live Load and 25% design wind load: L/65 or 20 mm
c. Any more restrictive limits if set by the glass manufacturer.
G. Glass deflection
1. Infill Glass deflection shall not be greater than L/60 or 25mm.
2. Glass Edge deflection, with full recovery of glazing material, shall not be greater than:
a. Double glazed units: L/125
b. Single glazed units: L/175

A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 81 23-Facade Glazing

B. Extruded Aluminium: As specified in Section 01 40 50- Facade Quality Requirements and
05 12 10_ Façade Structural Framing.
C. Steel profiles: As specified in Section 01 40 50- Facade Quality Requirements and 05 12
10_ Façade Structural Framing.
D. Sheet Aluminium: As specified in Section 07 42 13-Metal cladding and screen system
E. Metal Finishes: As specified in Section 01 40 50- Facade Quality Requirements
F. Other materials:
1. Connections and anchors: As specified in Section 01 40 50- Facade Quality
Requirements
2. Firestopping: As specified in Section 07 84 53- Facade Fire Stopping & Smoke Seal
3. Weather sealant: As specified in Section 07 92 00-Facade Sealants
4. Glass: As specified in Section 08 81 23-Facade Glazing
5. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 81 23-Facade Glazing
6. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air
infiltration requirements. Refer to Section 08 81 23-Facade Glazing
7. Water proofing membrane and vapor barrier: Non-staining temperature and UV
resistant material, with sealed joints or overlaps as per manufacturer's
recommendation. Penetrations to be sealed or taped.
8. Insulation: Non-combustible, non-rotting, inorganic closed cell or impregnated water
repellent insulation material. Thickness and density to be derived by U-value checks,
as appropriate to achieve the requirements. To be installed with no gaps.
9. Structural Steel Sections: As specified in Section 05 12 10-Façade Structural
Framing.
10. Non-shrink grout: As specified in Section 05 12 10-Façade Structural Framing.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the whole of the facade
fabrication and shall ensure that such work is executed by persons skilled in such
fabrication, including all other components and elements to be used in the works.
B. Commencement of fabrication and placing orders prior to receiving a "B" status from the
relevant Consultants will be at the Facade Sub Contractor's own risk.
C. All assemblies and installation shall be fabricated in accordance with the approved working
drawings, in full conformity with the standards specified and per successfully tested mock-
up system.
D. All joints, arises, recesses, ribs, mullions, transoms, capping's etc., shall be to the
alignments shown to satisfy requirements of tender/ architectural drawings, and approved
by the Architect.
E. 9O° arises on extrusions were shown on Contract drawings shall be sharp and precise and
worked to a radius of no more than 1 mm.
F. The arris radius of any pressing shall be: for 3 mm Aluminium sheet, outer radius maximum
4.5 mm, inner radius maximum of 1.5 mm, for other material thicknesses the pressing radius
shall be agreed with the Facade Sub Contractor.
G. All machining, rolling, cutting and any pre-assembled works shall be conducted in the
H. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall allow for taking all the necessary precautions to prevent
damage cause by contamination, abrasion or other marring of surfaces.
I. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for any damage which may be caused to
adjacent materials and special care shall be excised to avoid such damage.

A. A schedule of all fabrication tolerances for components of the system and associated works
to include size tolerances for glass constructions, pressed metalwork constructions,
ventilator constructions, weather seals and Aluminium sheet flatness tolerances shall be
submitted to the Facade Consultant.
1. Fabrication tolerances must be in accordance with the standards of manufacturing
and this Specification.
B. Finished dimensions of completed panels shall be such that the external cladding, when
erected, complies within the following permissible deviations:
Twist 1mm 2mm 3mm
C. Straightness of edges: Deviation from intended line. any variation to be evenly distributed
with no sudden bends or irregularities.
D. Squareness: Taking the longer of the 2 sides at any corner as a base line, the deviation of
shorter side from perpendicular.
E. Twist: Deviation of any corner from plane containing the other 3 corners
F. Flatness: The deviation under a 1m straight edge placed anywhere on a flat panel surface:
1mm
G. Joint widths: +/- 1mm

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that curtain wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to
receive work of this section.
C. Verify that anchorage devices have been properly installed and located.
D. Prior to taking over the work area, survey the completed structures and note where out of
actions/ coordinate for solution the soonest.
E. Verify any Façade receiving substrate is acceptable for Façade Sub-Contractor’s
interfacing, anchorage and subsequent installation and waterproofing.
F. Review reinforcement plans from Main Contractor to most effectively design brackets to
minimize clashing of reinforcement within concrete and embeds/anchorages for facades.
G. Review steelwork and MEP equipment layout from Main Contractor to most effectively
H. Coordinate locations of earthing points for earthing connections from facades.
I. Verify that Approved Status A or B documentation is available for the works prior to
J. The system shall successfully pass the Performance Mock-up Test prior to on- site
installation of any component included in this Specification. If such work commences, it is
entirely at the risk of the Façade Sub Contractor and might be abortive.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
carry out the curtain walling works. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall provide and maintain
records to demonstrate the experience and related trainings of their installers. Where
proprietary systems are used, provide certification confirming installer’s training with the
manufacturer for the specific system proposed. Such records shall be recorded on site and
be available for review upon requested.
documented.
approvals.

L. All joints must be square, true and as indicated on the drawings and have allowances were
joint design call for expansion and contraction.
M. All fasteners and fixings are to be concealed, with no exposed screw or bolt heads or nuts,
unless specifically called to the attention of and then agreed by the Facade Consultant. Any
such agreed fixings must be Colour matched to the adjacent surfaces.
O. Do not handle or tool products during erection in manner that damages finish, decreases
strength, or results in visual imperfection or failure in performance.
P. Return component parts that require alteration to shop for re-fabrication, if possible, or for
replacement with new parts.
Q. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be
R. Site repairs are not permitted, but superficial damages may be adjusted with the consent of
the Facade Consultant. When deciding whether the damage was superficial, consideration
shall be given to its extent and location in relation to supports, fixings and corners. Structural
damages will not be allowed to be repaired on site under any circumstances. Inform the
Architect of any damage occurred on site for their consideration and approval.
S. Install firestopping and smoke seal at each floor slab edge and at required partition wall
interface locations. Main Contractor and Façade Sub-Contractor shall invite Fire Consultant,
Authority representatives (Where required), and Façade Consultant for intermittent
inspection.
T. Provide replacement of decorative clip-on component where severe surface damage
U. Separate dissimilar metals; use gasket fasteners, isolation shims, or isolation
V. Tape where needed to eliminate possibility of electrolytic action between metals. Paint
finish, powder coating or anodizing finish will not be acceptable as bimetallic separator.
W. Site structural glazing is not permitted (with the exception of reglazing damaged units).
X. Site welding is not permitted after glazing, metal cladding, and/or when aluminium framing
has been installed.

B. Sealant Space at Interface Between Curtain Wall Mullions and Adjacent
C. Accuracy of curtain wall erection:

2 mm overall
D. Accuracy of junctions between components at joints:
Overall deviation from lines and planes:
4. To be limited to long wave formations of minimum wavelength of 20 m length with a
rate of exchange not exceeding 1:1000 and a maximum amplitude of 3mm

C. The proposed testing dates shall be indicated in the program. The tested joints and areas
will be randomly selected by the Facade Consultant or Main Contractor on the days of the
testing.
D. The Facade Consultant shall reserve the right to require additional testing should of these
tests fail.
E. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall have staff available to remove parts of the cladding for
checking or failure investigation purposes. These locations shall be rectified and re-clad on
the Facade Sub-Contractor's own cost.
F. Replace curtain wall components that have failed field testing and retest until performance
is satisfactory.
G. Site Hose Test:
2. Test Procedures:
a. 15% of all installation area/length;
b. Where any failure occurs, an additional 5% of overall system area testing shall be
conducted in addition to the rectified area.
3. Testing Extent: Four glass lights of each type façade as selected by the Engineer
and qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Conduct tests after
perimeter sealants have cured.
inspections.
3.6 REPLACEMENT
A. The installed glazing or cladding shall be capable of replacement without progressive

B. Critical air seals and other weather barriers shall be reasonably accessible for inspection,
repair and maintenance without the need to remove whole glazing units.
3.7 PROTECTION
B. Protection to the facade works, panels, units, elements shall be provided during storage,
C. Protective film for Aluminium extrusions and panels to be UV resistant and allow easy
removal without marks after completion of the project.
E. Protective film to be removed from areas where after installation other elements are not
F. Protection must be removed in a manner that all finishes weather evenly to ensure colour
matching.
3.8 CLEANING
1. Remove any concrete spill from glazing, exposed finished metal surfaces within 10
minutes of the occurrence using soft wet cloth. Using scrapers on glazing is
prohibited.
2. Dust all sides, joints and surfaces of every units, panels, elements immediately prior
sealants.
B. Final cleaning:
C. Do not exceed the recommended time frame for protective film removal. Do not use metal
scrapers, acids or other removal techniques that may damage the coating of the panels.
D. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean
wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 81 23 – FAÇADE GLAZING
Contents
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
1.4 DEFINITIONS
1.5.1 AS 1288 - GLASS IN BUILDINGS-SELECTION AND INSTALLATION
1.7 SUBMITTALS
1.9 VISUAL MOCK-UP
1.12 WARRANTY
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVES
2.4 GLASS MATERIALS
2.5 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS
2.6 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.4 PROTECTION
3.5 CLEANING

08 81 23 Facade Glazing
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Description
This section describes the following:
1. Glazing units
2. Glazing accessories
B. Related Sections
6. APPENDICES
limited to:

O. NEOM Requirements / Guidelines.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
A. AC: Air conditioning.
B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
C. AAMA: American Aluminium Manufacturers Association
D. BS: British Standard
E. BE EN: British European Standard
F. CPSC: Consumer Product Safety Commission
G. DGU: Double Glazed Units
H. ETC: Et Cetera – and the rest.
I. GANA: Glass Association of North America
J. IGU: Insulated glass units
K. LBNL: Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory
L. MEP: Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing.
M. NFRC: National Fenestration Rating Council
N. PVB: Polyvinyl butyral
O. SGP: Dupont Sentry Glass Plus
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, coated glass,
fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass processer: Firms that process primary glass such as cutting, notching heat
treatment, assembles double/insulated glass units, curve glass and laminated glass etc.
C. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimetres according to
ASTM C 1036.
D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air
or other specified gas.
E. Insulating Glass Unit Surface Designations are as followings, and surfaces are in
sequence from external to internal. Each monolithic glass has two surfaces. An example
of the designation for two lites of glass are:
1. Surface 1 - Exterior surface of the outer glass lite.
2. Surface 2 - Interspace surface of the outer glass lite.
3. Surface 3 - Interspace surface of the inner glass lite.
4. Surface 4 - Interior surface of the inner glass lite.

Below standards shall be applicable. Where similar requirements are stipulated, most onerous
A. AS 1288 - Glass in buildings-Selection and installation
B. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings
C. ASTM C509 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and
Sealing Material; 2015.
D. ASTM C542 - Standard Specification for Lock-Strip Gaskets; 2005(2011).
E. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,
Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2015).
F. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011.
G. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Toughened Flat
Glass; 2012.
H. ASTM C1115 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Silicone Rubber Gaskets
and Accessories; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).
I. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2014.
J. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016.
K. ASTM C1279 - Standard Test Method for Non-Destructive Photo elastic Measurement of
Edge and Surface Stresses in Annealed, Heat-Strengthened, And Fully Toughened Flat
Glass
L. ASTM C1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on
Flat Glass; 2015.
M. ASTM D2244 - Standard Practice for Calculation of Colour Tolerances and Colour
N. Differences from Instrumentally Measured Colour Coordinates; 2016.
O. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings;
2016.
P. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and
Evaluation; 2010.
Q. BS 6180 - Barriers in and about buildings. Code of practice; 2011.az
R. BS EN 12150-1 - Glass in building. Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass.
Definition and description; 2015.
S. BS EN 13022 - Glass in building. Structural sealant glazing.
T. BS EN 14179-1 - Glass in building. Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime silicate
safety glass. Definition and description; 2016.
U. BS EN 14449 - Glass in building. Laminated glass and laminated safety glass.
Evaluation of conformity/product standard
V. EN 13474-3 - Glass in building - Design of glass panes
W. BS EN ISO 12543-1- Glass in building. Laminated glass and laminated safety glass.
Definitions and description of component parts
X. DIN EN 1279 - Glass in building - Insulating glass units - Part 3: Long term test method
and requirements for gas leakage rate and for gas concentration tolerances
Y. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; 2009.
Z. GANA (SM) – GANA Sealant Manual

AA. SBC _ Saudi Building Code

A. Refer to Appendix B - Glazing.
B. If the glass has ceramic frit applied on one of the surfaces, the Façade Contractor shall
consider strength reduction factor, according to the glass supplier recommendations.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
stipulated in Section 01 30 50 - Facade Administrative Requirements.
B. Product Data:
1. Provide coated glass’s technical data sheets and proof of code compliance.
2. Provide structural, physical, and environmental characteristics,
3. Provide any thickness and size maximum and minimum limitations.
4. List any special handling or installation requirements as required by the coated glass
manufacturer.
C. Certificates:
1. Provide certificates as confirmation that products meet or exceed all specified
requirements.
2. Glass processors shall be certified to carry out the processing of glass, by glass
manufacturer and laminate supplier. Provide certification as verification.
D. Calculations:
1. Structural stress and deflection analysis
2. Insulated Glass Unit sealant stress analysis.
3. Thermal stress analysis.
4. Where point fixed systems are used, provide analysis to verify the stress at holes to
ensure localized stress are below allowable stresses. Façade Sub-Contractor shall
ensure analysis reflects design.
E. Test reports:
1. Strength tests
2. Factory quality control checks – thickness, bow, impurities, roller wave, coating
thickness etc.
3. Test reports to justify impact resistance, slip resistance, bullet resistance as required.
4. Compatibility tests
5. Adhesion tests
6. Comparability statements.
7. Gas loss Test in IGU assembly
F. Samples for material selection:
1. Samples shall be read in conjunction with Section 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminium
Curtain Wall
2. All samples must closely match to the performance requirements (Visual light
transmittance, in and out reflectivity, U-value, Shading Coefficient), in the proposed
project thicknesses and assembly (laminated, single, or double glazed, etc.).
a. The specified Solar Heat Gain coefficient, Shading Coefficient and U-value cannot be
exceeded in any case.
b. Minimum of 3 options shall be provided for Architect’s selection.
c. Glazing samples can be from different suppliers.
d. One number, 300 x 300 mm, minimum of each sample shall be presented at a
facade workshop meeting.
e. The selected options shall be showcased in large size visual mock-up, mentioned in
Section 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall.

G. Approval samples:
1. Minimum Three number, 300 x 300 mm, samples of each IGU type, taken from the
actual production.
2. Minimum Three number, 300 x 300 mm, samples of each laminated glass, taken
from the actual production.
3. Minimum Three number, 100 mm long, bead of glazing sealant, colour as selected.
4. Minimum Three number, 100 mm long, sample of IGU spacer.
5. Minimum Three number, 50 x 50 mm, Corner sample of IGU spacer.
6. Minimum Three number, sample of IGU toggle rebate.
7. Minimum Three number sample of IGU toggle.
8. Glass Sample shall show project proposed edge treatment.
1. Glass Supplier’s maintenance manual to be included in submittals.
I. Maintenance Materials:
1. Unless otherwise agreed with owner, provide the following minimum for Owner's use
in maintenance of project.
a. Glass: 2% of each glass size and each glass type. For non-typical facades, glass
spare stocking will be discussed after award.
b. Glazing materials: Keep stock of all gaskets, setting blocks, customized fasteners, etc.
c. Client may request that System supplier maintains a ready stock mentioned above
within their facility for use where required.

1. Main Contractor and its Sub-Contractor to arrange for the project team and Facade
Consultant to visit the glass processor's premises to carry out factory inspections.
2. Main Contractor and its Sub-Contractor shall provide sufficient notice of at least 2
weeks when arranging for any inspections.
B. Factory visits shall include the following minimum:
1. Pre-qualification visit.
2. Visit during manufacturing and processing the project.
C. Works shall be conducted in accordance with GANA (GM) and GANA (SM) for glazing
installation methods.
D. All glass pieces and their relevant certificates and production records shall be individually
identifiable and traceable for the entire manufacturing process, storage, handling,
installation via appropriate temporary marking, permanent glass marking and labelling.
The glass supplier to submit their identification method statement prior to production.
1. History of materials, assembly, quality checks on individual glass panel on building
elevation shall be fully traceability.
2. Permanent glass marking shall be discretely visible from the inside even after
installation and shall include the manufacturer's name, and kind of glass as a
minimum.
E. Test and check records of the following, as a minimum, shall be maintained and kept for
the warranty period / provided with the glass. Records shall have clear reference to date,
manufacturing conditions, traceability of glass units. The following information shall be
part of records, as a minimum.
1. Dimensional tolerance checks
2. Edge quality checks
3. Coating quality checks

4. Heat Soak Test records
5. Breakage and fragmentation Tests
6. Tempering quality checks – Surface Stress
7. Lamination quality checks
8. Ceramic frit quality checks
9. Performance check records (Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) for the Glass U-Value
Centre of Glass (COG))
10. Sealant test records and dimensional checks
11. IGU dimensional tolerance check records
12. Data on all materials used to assemble glass units such as laminate, desiccant, butyl
seal tape such as date of manufacture or expiry, manufacturer, etc.
F. All fully toughened glass shall be heat soak tested to BS EN 14179: Part 1, records of
heat soaking for each batch (QA/ QC inspection) shall be kept for auditing purposes
before dispatch to site. Fully Toughened glass without 100% Heat Soak Testing will not
be acceptable.
G. Glass shall not be assembled or manufactured in a fashion that results in permanent
deformation. Assembly of IGU shall be conducted in a vertical line.
1.9 VISUAL MOCK-UP

A. Further to listed samples, provide sufficient quantity of the selected project glazing for
visual assembly mock-ups, breakage tests, and performance test mock-ups.

A. Façade Sub Contractor adopt glass of similar thickness and aesthetics for each curtain
wall type on a particular elevation to maintain a uniform aesthetical effect. The
mentioned glass thickness shall be resultant from the most onerous conditions such as
the largest glass panel modulations, and/or wind loads, and/or acoustic requirements,
and/or imposed loading.
B. Comply to project conditions as specified in Section 01 40 50 - Facade Quality
Requirements.
C. Glass processor shall ensure processing facility maintains environmental conditions
(temperature, humidity, dust-proof, and ventilation) within limits recommended by glass
and coating manufacturer.
D. Glass shall be stored and packed in a manner agreed with coated glass supplier.
E. Façade Sub-Contractor shall ensure storage on site, prior to application to Façade is per
glass manufacturer and glass processor’s requirement.
F. Façade Sub-Contractors, processor and supplier shall co-ordinate to ensure supply of
assembled glass units does not result in delay in installation works.

A. Deliver glass in manufacturer's or fabricator's original containers and packaging, with
labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B. Store glass in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Store glass in shaded outdoor or indoor area if boxed or packaged, and in clean, dry
area indoors after opening the original packaging.
D. Protect from exposure to direct sunlight and freezing temperatures.
E. Apply temporary coverings loosely to allow adequate ventilation.
F. Protect from contact with corrosive chemicals.
G. Avoid placement of glass edge on concrete, metal, and other hard objects.

H. Unless otherwise required by glass processor, glass shall rest on clean, cushioned pads
at 1/4-points.
I. Glass shall not be placed directly on the floor or stored in a manner that can result in
permanent deformation.
J. Handle glass in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
K. Protect glass from damage during handling and installation.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Section 01 40 50- Facade Quality Requirements for base warranty
requirements.
B. Sealed insulating glass units: Warranty to include coverage for seal failure, inter-pane
dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.
C. Laminated glass: Warranty to include coverage for delamination, including replacement
of failed units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Glass supplier and processor shall meet quality requirements stipulated in ISO 9001 and
ISO 14001.
B. Glass processors shall be certified to carry out project specific glazed assemblies by
glass manufacturer.
C. Pre-approved Glass supplier are as follows:
1. AGC Obeikan (KSA)
2. Guardian Glass (KSA)
3. Pilkington
4. Equivalent
D. To be NEOM approved manufacturer/suppliers.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVES

A. The following may be deemed to be acceptable design alternatives.
1. Single, double, or triple silver low e are acceptable, subject to meeting the aesthetic
and performance criteria.
2. Extra clear glass, with reduced iron particle content glass may be proposed instead
of low-iron glass, where it is specified for colour clarity only.
3. Two layers of coatings, such as a solar control coating on surface #2 and low-E
coating on surface #3 may be proposed in lieu of a combined high-performance
coating on surface #2, or the other way around, if the specified colour intent and
performance ranges are met.
4. PVB can be substituted by SGP interlayer.
5. Fully Toughened glass may be substituted with laminated heat strengthened glass.
6. All above are subject to sample approval, Architect and Consultant’s approval.
2.3 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Refer to Section 01 40 50- Facade Quality Requirements for base design criteria.
B. Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads, imposed
loads, maintenance loads, climatic loads and wind loads caused by positive and negative
wind pressure acting normal to plane of glass.
C. Wind load shall be based on desktop analysis based on ASCE-07.
D. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness.
E. Refer to deflection criteria stipulated in Section 8 44 13- Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall.
F. When designing glass, adopted the minimum glass thickness based on fabrication
tolerance or minimum thickness as stipulated in Table 3 of ASTM E1300.
G. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass
to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load.
H. When designing glass for combination loads, load resistance shall be based on
apportionment of respective load resistance against stress. Overall combined load
against resistance shall not exceed 1.
I. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15
degrees from vertical, design glass for a probability of breakage not greater than 0.001.
J. For free standing balcony applications, the glass shall, as a minimum, be heat
strengthened laminated, with a minimum 1.52mm PVB or SGP interlayer, subject to
structural verifications.

K. Where there is no structurally sized handrail spanning 3 glass panels, an SGP interlayer
shall be used.
L. Glass fins to be designed in accordance with AS 1288.
M. The following rules shall apply for glass design in this project:
1. Glass susceptible to impact due to street human traffic, at street level or high
activity/traffic areas, shall be heat strengthened laminated.
2. Safety glass in the form of laminated heat strengthened glass or fully Toughened
glass, shall be adopted for the inner lite, shall be adopted in low sill application.
3. Whilst applying the above rules, external glazed facades surface shall remain
vertically flushed.
N. Prevention of Accidental Injury: Do not use monolithic fully Toughened glass on external
lights for applications greater than 10 m above external finished floor levels.
O. Thermal stress:
1. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by partially
shaded panel within individual glass lites.
2. Differential Temperature: Design single glazing to resist thermal stresses induced by
cooled indoor and exposed hot outdoor environment.
3. Heat Absorption: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by high heat
absorption.
4. All annealed glass is not permitted.
5. Thermal stress shall be checked in combination with relevant load combinations.
6. Thermal stress shall be checked against 60 minutes load duration.
7. Where the geometry of the facade results in focalizing effects sun’s radiation, thermal
stress shall be checked for:
a. Thermal stress due to increase heat gain from focalizing effects along and
b. Thermal stress resulting from glass’s heat adsorption properties.
c. Other stresses resulting other simultaneously occurring conditions.
8. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes.
P. Air and Vapor Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity of building
enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier:
1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other
sections.
2.4 GLASS MATERIALS

A. All glass of the same type shall be provided from a single supplier. Processed glass shall
have fully traceable and dated records for each piece, recording all steps of processing.
1. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated.
2. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3.
3. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Toughened Types: ASTM C1048, HS and FT.
4. Tinted Types: ASTM C1036, Class 2 -Tinted colour and performance characteristics
as indicated.
5. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements
for wind load design and acoustic requirements regardless of specified thickness.
Minimum glass thickness adopted shall be 6mm.
6. All glass must be cut to size at the factory. Edges must be clean cut and free from
imperfections.
7. Site cutting and swiping or nipping of edges or corners of any glass on site will not
be permitted.
8. Following are the glass edge treatment:
a. Concealed: Seamed, arrised and Ground

b. Exposed: Ground and arrised and polished
9. Float lines using recycled glass other than their own in-house float production cullet
cannot qualify due to quality assurance issues.
10. Whole glazing assembly shall be U value tested as per NFRC or LBNL Window 5
Calculations.
B. Heat Strengthened Glass: To comply with ASTM C1048.
1. For clear, tinted or coated: 46.6 N/mm2.
2. For seamed and polished edge: 36.5 N/mm2.
3. Surface Compressive Stress Heat strengthened glass is to have a residual surface
compressive stress of not less than 35N/mm2 and not exceeding 55N/mm2 and is
required to comply with Glass and Glazing Federation guidelines and CEN TC 129
N176E.
4. Any mechanical work such as drilling, chamfering, cutting, grinding, or polishing must
be carried out prior heat strengthening.
5. Maximum chips/shell diameter at edges shall not exceed 1.6mm. Ground flat edges
with small ground arrised required.
6. All heat-strengthened glass shall be clearly marked by ceramic enamel kite marking
as per CE.
C. Fully Toughened (Toughened) Glass: To comply with ASTM C1048.
1. For clear, tinted or coated: 93 N/mm2.
2. For Seamed and Polish Edge: 73.1 N/mm2
3. Surface Compressive Stress to tempered glass is to have a residual surface
compressive stress of not less than 100N/mm2 and not more than 150N/mm2 and
shall comply with Glass and Glazing Federation guidelines or meet ANSI Z97.1 or
CPSC Standard 16 CFR120.
4. Fully Toughened glass is to shatter into small, relatively safe fragments in accordance
with the BS EN 12150-1.
5. Any mechanical work such as drilling, chamfering, cutting, grinding, or polishing must
be carried out prior tempering.
6. Edge working shall be ground flat with small ground arris and have a frosted
appearance. Small shells and/or chips shall be ground out prior to toughening.
7. The glass shall conform to the following requirements in the horizontal toughening
process:
a. Maximum bow : 0.1 %
b. Edge dip : 0.125 mm maximum.
D. Roller wave distortion in heat treated glasses must be kept to a minimum but, in any
case, the amplitude of the roller wave shall not exceed the following:
1. Maximum depth: 0.10 mm at any point over any 300mm distance
2. Not more than average of 0.018 mm peak to valley, with maximum sag at the leading
and trailing edges of 0.25 mm.
E. Roller wave distortion, if present, and subject to the limit stated above must be
coordinated so that the orientation of the axis of the rolling plane is horizontal throughout
this Contract Works. Glass pieces shall be clearly marked for intended orientation.
F. The heat treatment furnace used for the project to be equipped with online digital roller
wave measurement system.
G. Anisotropy, if present, will be considered a fault if visible in a range of reasonably typical
naturally occurring conditions. The Architect will determine the acceptable range(s) of
anisotropy from the glass sample installations and thereafter from the visual mock-up.
H. Unless otherwise specified, all fully Toughened glass shall be heat soaked to minimize
the occurrence of nickel sulphide crystals.
1. Heat Soak Testing: To comply BS EN 14179-1.

2. Heat soak testing calibration test report to be submitted for approval prior to
production of project glazing.
3. Heat soak testing certificates shall be submitted for records with every batch of
glazing dispatched. Certificate shall include date of HST, statement of complied
standards, traceability references for glass batch, number of failed units during HST
of that batch, safety fragmentation data.
4. Prior to heat soaking, all HST glass lites shall be individually stamped with heat-
activated indicator ink, such as "boraident HST Check Marker" as permanent
verification mark.
I. All fully Toughened glass shall be clearly marked by ceramic enamel kite marking as per
CE.
J. Laminated Glass: Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172, and BS EN
ISO 12543-4.
1. Plastic Interlayer: 1.52 mm min. thick, minimum. Material: Polyvinyl butyral (PVB) or
Ionoplast
2. Where fully Toughened is specified or required, provide glass that has been
Toughened by the tong-less horizontal method.
3. Interlayers to be warranted up to 90°C surface temperature.
4. Calculation verification of laminated glazing to consider effective thickness at
minimum 50°C ambient temperature.
5. Shear Modulus of interlayer at elevated temperature, shall be considered when
calculating composite nature of the glass plies.
6. Edges to be autoclaved. Laminated glass edges must be sealed with materials
compatible with the interlayer. Delamination or de-coloration of the laminated glass
for any reason will not be acceptable.
7. Exposed PVB interlayer for top edges and other conditions exposing the interlayer
with stagnant moisture and water, is not permitted.
8. Glazing rebates receiving laminated glass bottom edges shall be wept.
K. Performance Coated Glass: To comply with ASTM C1376.
1. Acceptable coating methods: pyrolytic or sputtered, non-post-temper able or post-
temperable.
2. Coating to be neutral in colour with slight shade of the Architect's specified colour.
3. Light transmission and reflectivity values do not deviate from the nominal values by
more than 2%.
4. Solar and thermal performance values do not deviate from the nominal values by
more than 2%.
5. At a viewing distance of 1.5 m pinholes shall not be detectable. Clusters of closely
spaced smaller pinholes are not allowed in any area normally considered to be a
viewing area.
6. No scratches must be visible at a viewing distance of 1.5m from glass.
7. Colour to be uniform in tone, colour, shade, hue, texture, opacity,
a. As individual panels and
b. when all panels are viewed on a single elevation and
c. when two panels form a corner
8. There shall be strictly no visible colour difference in between units within the same
facade surface and same system, observing from the exterior. Measurement method
as per ASTM D2244. delta(E)*ab should not exceed 4.5 as a minimum.
9. There shall be strictly no visible colour difference in between units within the same
room within the same facade glazing system, observing from the interior.
10. Where the manufacturer requires edge deletion, that shall be stopped within 0.5mm
of the primary seal.

2.5 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.
1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190.
2. Edge Spacers: Aluminium, bent and soldered corners.
3. Edge Spacer Colour: Black anodized aluminium.
4. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant.
5. Edge Seal Colour: black.
6. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
7. Desiccant fill: All four sides.
8. Interspace fill: Air or Argon.
B. Edge Sealants: To comply BS EN 13022-1 clause 5.2.
1. The vapor barrier between the glasses and the metal spacer section shall be
polyisobutylene.
2. The edge seal shall be a two-part, neutral-cure silicone.
3. Where argon is used as an interspace filler, sealant, and vapor barrier material
selection and
4. Where the IGU is installed in contact with other sealants (structural silicone, weather
sealant, vapor seal), all sealants shall be supplied by the same single manufacturer.
5. Materials permeable to argon shall not be used for argon filled IGU applications.
6. Polysulfide, polyurethane, or other sealants that are not resistant to ultra-violet solar
radiations are not permitted.
7. No tapes, foil, linen or aluminium or other material or metal edging around the
periphery of the insulated glass edge seals is permitted.
C. Spacers: Aluminium, stainless steel, or thermoplastic spacer. Corners to be bent or
connected and air sealed.
D. Glazing toggle rebates: Where the IGU will be fixed to the framing by the means of
toggles, anodized aluminium channel shaped inserts shall be embedded along the IGU
edges. If manually inserted, the channels shall be designed to allow precise placement of
the channel within the gap between the glass panels, as well as sufficient and even
sealant bite on both sides of channel.
1. The toggle glazing channels shall run completely parallel with the glazing edges, and
at the exact distance shown on the shop drawings.
2. Tolerance of toggle rebate alignment: zero (0).
3. IGUs with out of tolerance glazing toggle rebates will be rejected.
4. Toggles shall be restrained using minimum A4-70 grade screw.
E. General requirements:
1. Climatic load calculation verification to be submitted, pillowing effects shall be
minimized. Careful design is required if the IGU glazing is assembled at a location
that significantly differs in altitude, seasonal temperature or typical humidity from job
site altitude and climate.
2. Pillowing of glazing due to expansion of the enclosed air or gas filling shall be avoided
by ensuring that the inboard lite is the weaker resistance and that will pillow rather
than the exterior lite.
3. The use of stepped insulated glass is allowed where required by the design. Where
stepped insulated glass units are provided, calculations shall take into consideration
this offset in support.
4. All glazing systems must protect the edge seal by preventing water from entering the
glazing rebate and preferably by also ensuring that any water that does penetrate as
far as the edge seal is soon removed by drainage and evaporation.
2.6 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Setting Blocks and anti-slip blocks: 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C864

Option I. Length of 25 mm for each square meter of glazing or minimum 100 mm x width
of glazing rebate space minus 1.5 mm x height to suit glazing method and pane weight
and area. Where vertical glass is placed squarely at a horizontal surface, setting blocks
to be located at 1/4 points of width of the IGU. For all other conditions, setting block shall
be placed in such locations to allow even distribution of loading to framing elements,
whilst allowing sufficient movement - thermal or otherwise, to prevent stress build-up.
Setting block shall be thick enough to prevent direct contact between glass and metal
components under deflection/movement. Width of setting block shall be sufficient to
directly support the inner lite and at least half of the outer lite.
1. Acceptable materials: Heat cured silicone, Alcryn, UV resistant polyurethane foam
type, silicone compatible EPDM rubber, and vinyl extrusions.
2. Non-silicone compatible EPDM, neoprene, Santoprene, Krayton, and other similar
organic materials are not acceptable.
3. Non-UV resistant materials are not acceptable.
4. Prior to installation, setting blocks and spacers shall be tested for compatibility.
5. The framing system's drainage ways should not be obstructed by the setting blocks
or spacers.
6. TPU setting block shall be used with laminated glass.
B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C864 Minimum
75 mm long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self-
adhesive on one face.
C. Glazing Tape for structural silicone adhesive glazing: High density polyurethane foam,
self-adhesive. Shore A durometer hardness 30-35. Coiled on release paper.
1. Glazing tapes shall be silicone compatible, non-staining and non-gassing.
2. Glazing tapes shall not be used to permanently hold any components in position, or
to be used as an air or weather seal.
3. Thickness to match calculated sealant glue line width requirements.
D. Glazing Gaskets: Dense Compression Gaskets moulded or extruded, made of the
following:
1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C864.
2. EPDM complying with ASTM C864.
3. Silicone complying with ASTM C1115.
4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C1115.
E. Glazing Gaskets: Soft Compression Gaskets: Use where soft compression gaskets will
be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on the opposite side of glazing
or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on the opposite side of glazing.
To be moulded or extruded, made of the following:
1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C509 Type II
2. EPDM complying with ASTM C509 Type II
3. Silicone complying with ASTM C509 Type II
4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C509 Type II
F. Glazing Gaskets: Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions fabricated into frames with
moulded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C542.
G. Masking tape: non-staining, non-absorbent type compatible with silicone sealant and
adjacent surfaces.
H. Manifestation:
1. The need of any manifestation shall be in line with the international practices and
Authority requirements.
2. The glass must be marked (permanently or temporarily as necessary) in order that
its presence is apparent to all persons who may come into contact with the glass
elements. The type and pattern of the manifestation must be agreed with the

Architect.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that curtain wall framing or subframe is assembled within tolerance.
B. Refer to Section 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall and 08 51 13_Aluminium
Windows for framing requirements.
C. Verify that framing surfaces, glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions
that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
D. Verify that gasket or glazing tapes are correctly sized and placed.
E. Upon arrival of the glass to the contractor’s assembly facility an inspection is to be
carried out by the Contractor and Glass Manufacturers’ representatives to assure the
received glass conforms to the specified type, quality, dimensions quantities.
F. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with
the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
G. Glass shall be consistent in colour and equivalent to the control sample agreed with the
Employers Representatives.
H. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and GANA (SM) and manufacturer's
instructions.
E. Handle glass in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Protect glass from damage during handling and installation.
G. Do not slide a lite of glass against another. This may cause scratches by dust particles.
H. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as
required so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use
materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,
and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including
those in referenced glazing publications.
B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged
glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass
with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and
impair performance and appearance.
C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined
by preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course
of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
F. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
G. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as
specified.
H. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant
or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out
when installation is subjected to movement.
I. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner
recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner
joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit
openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in
place with joints mitre cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Centre glass lites in openings on setting blocks
and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression
gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centres of openings. Compress
gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass.
Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Centre glass lites in openings on setting blocks
and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and
pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress
gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass.
Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing,
between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent
sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure.
Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of
installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting
or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

A. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation
of their products.
B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed glass from damage during construction.

B. Protect installed glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations.
C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in
other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents, and
vandalism.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B. Remove labels after Work is complete.
C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
D. In case of spill of cementitious material such as concrete, screed, grout, etc. onto the
glass surface, that shall be removed before it cures, by rinsing with generous amount of
water and wiping with soft cloth or foam wiper. No metal or plastic scrapers, or any tool
that may scratch the glass are allowed to be use.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 90 00 – ARCHITECTURAL LOUVERS & VENTS
Contents
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
1.4 DEFINITIONS
1.6 SYSTEM WRITEUP
1.7 SUBMITTALS
1.9 MOCK-UP:
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LOUVERS-GENERAL
2.2 SAND TRAP LOUVRES
2.3 FINISH
2.4 FABRICATION
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 REPLACEMENT
3.4 PROTECTION
3.5 CLEANING

08 90 00 Architectural Louvers & Vents
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Description
1. Compliance with sections of Division 1, General Requirements.
2. Compliance with all applicable and current statutory requirements, regulations, and
codes.
3. Completion of the design, fabrication, supply, and installation of all items specified
herein or shown on the contract drawings.
4. Completion of the design of all interfaces with adjoining systems and trades prior to
commencement of fabrication.
B. Related Sections
6. APPENDICES
to:

L. Local (country/ State / Province) civil defence and building authority guidelines.
M. NEOM Requirements /Guidelines.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
A. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association International
D. AISI – American Iron and Steel Institute.
E. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers.
F. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.
G. AWS: American Welding Society.
H. BS: British Standard.
I. BS EN: British and European Standard.
J. DPC: damp-proof course.
K. ETA: European Technical Approval.
L. ETAG: European Technical Approval Guidelines.
M. FPC: Factory Production Control.
N. VOC: Volatile organic compounds.
O. QA: Quality assurance.
P. QC: Quality Control.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
Q. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply
to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

A. Air Movement and Control Association International (AMCA):
B. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating.
C. AMCA 501 - Application Manual for Air Louvers.
D. AMCA 511 - Certified Rating Program - Product Rating Manual for Air Control Devices.
E. AMCA 512 - AMCA Listing Label Program. Water and Air Certification.
F. AMCA 512 - AMCA Listing Label Program. Water, Air, Wind-Driven Rain Certification.
G. AMCA 512 - AMCA Listing Label Program. Air Certification.
H. AMCA 540 - Test Method for Louvers Impacted by Windborne Debris.

I. AMCA 550 - Test Method for High-Velocity Wind Driven Rain Resistant Louvers.
J. ASTM International (ASTM):
K. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
L. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless
Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
M. ASTM A 788 - Standard Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements.
N. ASTM B 26 - Standard Specification for Aluminium Alloy Sand Castings.
O. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy Sheet and
Plate.
P. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy Rolled or Cold
Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire.
Q. ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
R. ASTM C 612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fibre Block and Board Thermal
Insulation.
S. ASTM D822 - Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint
and Related Coatings.
T. ASTM D 1187 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Base Emulsions for Use as Protective
Coatings for Metal.
U. ASTM D4214 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior
Paint Films.
V. ASTM D2244 - Standard Test Method for Calculation of Colour Differences From
Instrumentally Measured Colour Coordinates.
W. ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
X. Saudi Building Code
Y. Owner's requirements
Z. Operator's requirements
1.6 SYSTEM WRITEUP

A. Refer to Appendix for system writeup.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: Submit two (2) 600mm x 600mm samples (including corner assembly) of each
type of louver and finish. Adjust the colour of samples and resubmit until approval by the
consultant is gained.

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years manufacturing similar products. The
manufacturer shall have implemented a program for the management of quality
objectives, continual improvement, and monitoring of customer satisfaction to assure that
customer needs and expectations are met.

B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 3 years’ experience installing similar louvers.
C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services
of kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of
products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain products through one source from a single manufacturer
where alike in one or more respects regarding type, design, or factory-applied colour
finish.
1.9 MOCK-UP:
A. Construct a mock-up with actual materials in sufficient time for Architect's review and to
not delay construction progress. Locate mock-up as acceptable to Architect and provide
temporary foundations and support.
B. Intent of mock-up is to demonstrate surface preparation techniques, quality of
workmanship and visual appearance.
C. Do not continue with remaining work until workmanship, colour, and sheen are approved
by Architect.
D. If mock-up is not acceptable, rebuild mock-up until satisfactory results are achieved.
E. Retain mock-up during construction as standard for comparison with completed work.
F. Incorporate accepted mock-up as part of the Work.

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by the manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside the manufacturer's absolute limits.
B. Field Measurements: Verify openings and adjacent construction by field measurements
before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
C. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating products without
field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions
correspond to established dimensions.
D. Coordinate Setting Drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for
installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction.
Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

A. Deliver, store and handle materials and products in strict compliance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations and industry standards.
B. Store products indoors in manufacturer's or fabricator's original containers and
packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. Protect from
damage.
C. Handling: Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent
damage.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Warranty the work of this Section for a period of ten (10) years from date of issue of
defects liability certificate.


PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LOUVERS-GENERAL
A. Refer to the material and finishes codes in the drawings and the Louvre schedule for a
complete list of louvre system products, sizes, finishes, colours and designations
applicable to this section.
B. Manufacturers must comply with this section requirements and must be submitted for
approval by consultant.
C. Aluminium extrusions to be 6063-T52 alloy sections, minimum 3.2 mm thick.
D. Aluminium sheets to be of suitable alloy and minimum gauge for forming and fabricating
with adequate structural strength required to fulfil performance requirements.
E. All blades to be supported and lined up with heavy gauge extruded aluminium blade
races, positively interlocked to each blade and mechanically secured to structural angles
by aluminium and stainless-steel fastening.
F. Where horizontal louvres extend around corners, the blades shall be mitred and
continuously heliarc welded.
G. Structural supports to be minimum 50 x 50 x 6mm angles and designed to carry a wind
load of not less than 1.4 kPa.
H. Provide allowance for expansion at jambs and at a minimum of 6100mm (20'-0") on
centre.
I. All louvres shall be free of scratches.
2.2 SAND TRAP LOUVRES

A. The mechanical contractor shall supply and install sand trap louvres on all fresh air
intakes to all fans where shown on the drawings. Sand trap louvre shall be manufactured
of high-quality extruded aluminium with mill finish. The sand trap louvres shall be
installed on the inside of architectural louvres.
2.3 FINISH
A. Louvres, blade braces, sills, related flashings and copings shall be cleaned, etched and
pre-treated in accordance with ASTM B-449-67 (1982), section 5 and ASTM D-1730-67
(1984), Type B, Method 5 or 7, before the application of the finish.
B. Finish shall be factory applied, to match adjacent curtain wall or as indicated on the
Consultant's drawings. Generally (unless otherwise noted): On exterior elements on
interior elements.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate louvres, insulated blank-off sandwich panels, screens and sills in strict
accordance with the reviewed shop drawings. Make work square, plumb, straight and
true.
B. Insofar as possible, shop fabricate all items complete and ready for installation.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, weld all shop connections and/or provide rivetted or bolted
connections using concealed fasteners.
D. Make joints and intersections tightly fitting, securely fastened.
E. Drill or punch holes required for the attachment of work of other sections and for bolted
connections.
F. Provide all necessary rebates, lugs, brackets and the like in order to achieve a neat and
substantial assembly of work.

G. Protect Aluminium surfaces coming to contact with other materials by providing a
dielectric separator (lacquer, paint, tape, etc.) in order to avoid corrosion.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates and openings using methods recommended by manufacturer for
achieving best result for substrates under project conditions.
B. Do not proceed with installation until substrates and nailers have been prepared using
the methods recommended by the manufacturer and deviations from manufacturer's
recommended tolerances are corrected. Commencement of installation constitutes
acceptance of conditions.
C. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of
deviations from manufacturer's recommended installation tolerances and conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Provide stainless steel supports in addition to those shown on the structural drawings,
which are required for the installation of the work of this section. Also, provide screws,
bolts, washers, nuts and other fastening devices of 316 austenitic grade stainless steel.
B. Install louvres, insulated blank-off panels, screens and sills in strict accordance with the
drawings and the reviewed shop drawings, aligning straight, plumb, and level within a
tolerance of ±2mm vertical or horizontal.
C. After the erection and installation are complete, touch-up all finished coats damaged
during transportation and erection using same coating specified for finished surfaces.
D. Clean joint surfaces of louvres and adjacent work and apply a full bead of sealant.
E. The exposed face of sealant should be tooled neatly to a slight concave profile and
should be free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, etc.
3.3 REPLACEMENT
A. Test operation of adjustable louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning
units that comply with requirements.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect products from damage until completion of project. Use temporary protective
coverings where needed and approved by manufacturer. Remove protective covering at
the time of Substantial Completion.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

Contents
1. PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2

2.1 SYSTEM TYPOLOGY FOR NEOM SINDALAH FAÇADE 4
2.2 OPAQUE WALL SYSTEMS FOR VILLA ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.
2.3 CANOPY SYSTEMS FOR VILLA ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.

APPENDIX A SYSTEM WRITEUP
PART 1 GENERAL
1. PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Project NEOM Sindalah is an island located about 5 kilometres from the mainland of
KSA.
B. Environmental conditions:
1. Maximum surface temperature:
a. Dark coloured extrusions: 80oC
b. Light coloured extrusions: 65oC
2. Minimum Surface temperature:
a. Internal profile: 15oC
b. External profiles (pressure plates and caps): 5oC
3. Corrosive environment:
a. For external environment outside weather seal line: Typical Class C5-H
b. For internal environment inside weather seal line: Typical Class C3-H
c. Swimming pool: Class C5-H
C. Design Windspeed: 46 m/s 3 Sec Gust
D. Seismic Requirements: In accordance with the geotechnical interpretative report, the
structures shall be designed to accommodate seismic movement.
E. Other General requirements:
1. Design shall accommodate weather, thermal, acoustics and fire performance as
stipulated within Tendering & IFC Design report,
2. Design requirements from consultants relevant to system design and in accordance
with local codes and regulations.
F. Thermal Performance Requirements (U-value, W/m2K):
1. Opaque Wall: 0.3 W/m2K
2. Glazed Curtain wall: 1.7 W/m2K (Including glass and Framing)
G. Aluminium Finishes shall meet requirements for AAMA 2605 for external applications,
and AAMA 2604 for internal application.
H. Visible coated steel shall meet the following visual criteria:
1. AESS Category 2 where component is at 6m from closest standing viewpoint.
2. AESS Category 3 for conditions not covered by condition mentioned in item above.
I. Weather performance of
1. Fixed Panels
a. Air Infiltration: Max 1.2 m3/hr/m2 at 600Pa test pressure
b. Water Infiltration: No water shall be found beyond weather seal line.
2. Operable panels
a. Air Infiltration: Max 6.24 m3/hr/m2 at 300Pa test pressure
b. Water Infiltration: No water shall be found beyond weather seal line.
DOCUMENT CODE: 13-213001-4800000492-CH2-FAC-RPT-030001 REVISION CODE: 01 PAGE 2 OF 20

J. Deflection limitation for Facades:
1. Glass
a. Monolithic / Laminated:
1) 4 Side Supported:
Centre of Glass: L/60 or 25mm (whichever is lesser)
Edge of Glass: L/175 (for L<4.11m)
L/250 + 6.36mm (for L>4.11m)
2) 2/3 Side Supported:
L/250 + 6.36mm (for L>4.11m)
3) Balustrade:
Top glass edge: Thickness of glass (live loads only)
L/30 (wind loads and combos)
b. Insulated Glazing Unit:

4) 4 Side Supported:
5) 2/3 Side Supported:
L/250 + 6.36mm (for L>4.11m)
d. The above deflections are subject to the glass aesthetics requirements set out in
section 08 81 23.
2. Cantilevered Glass Balustrade
K. Under combined human Impact/Live Load and 25% design wind load: L/65 or 20 mm
b. Any more restrictive limits if set by the glass manufacturer.
1. Aluminium/Steel framing
a. In-plane: L/500 of the span or 3 mm whichever is the lesser.
b. Out of plane: Deflection of framing elements shall not exceed:
1) L/200 of the span for spans less than 3 m
2) 5 mm + L/300 for spans in between 3 m and 7.5 m
3) L/250 of the span for spans larger than 7.5 m
c. Aluminium cladding panel shall not be greater than L/90 or 20mm.

d. Steel or aluminium framing supporting brittle finishes like stone & cement board shall
be limited to L/350 or 15mm whichever is lesser.
L. The system shall be provided with bimetallic separation where required.
M. Brackets shall allow for 3-way adjustability to accommodate construction tolerances as
agreed with Main Contractor.
N. System shall be justified and designed to accommodate worst case relative building
movements, system movements, and system thermal movement.
O. Where lighting fixtures interface with Façade systems, the design, location and
installation of lighting fixtures and bracketry shall be coordinated between Main
Contractors and its subcontractors including Lighting supplier, MEP Contractor, and
related Façade Sub Contractor along with MEP Consultant. Lighting fixtures and bracket
materials shall be provided by Lighting Supplier/Contractor but installed onto the façade
system by the related Façade Sub Contractor.

2.1 SYSTEM TYPOLOGY FOR NEOM SINDALAH FAÇADE
A. VISION WALL SYSTEMS FOR VILLA
1. GSV-01A: Stick Curtain Wall
2. GSV-02A: Sliding Door
3. GSV-02B: Sliding Door in Pocket
4. GSV-04A: Bi-fold Sliding Door
B. OPAQUE WALL SYSTEMS FOR VILLA
1. OPV-03A: Render + Cement Board
2. OPV-04: GRC Mashrabiya Screen
3. OPV-05: Polycarbonate Panels
C. CANOPIES FOR VILLA
1. CAV-02A: Render + Cement Board Canopy
2. CAV-03A: Artistic Polycarbonate Canopy

PART 2 FAÇADE SYSTEM WRITE-UPS
Table 1: GSV-01A: Stick Curtain Wall
GSV-01A
DESCRIPTION Stick Curtain Wall
LOCATION Cluster 4 Ground floor one bedroom and two bedrooms
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Aluminium and glass, thermally broken stick-built curtain wall system.
Framing members consist of aluminium box-section profiles. The system
is assembled on site.
The system has two lines of weather defence. Water penetrating the outer
weather seal shall drain to the outside at each floor.
Mullion stiffeners shall be adopted to reinforce the mullions in where
required.
SUPPORT STRATEGY
Glass infill panels are bottom supported. Out of plane loading restraints
of glazing are provided using Aluminium toggles around perimeter of the
glass, restraining glass against the gaskets and framing elements
continuously.
Curtain wall mullions span between floor slabs and are fixed to the
primary concrete structure. Curtain wall system is bottom supported and
restrained to resist out of plane wind loads, at the top.
Interstitial floor movement will be accommodated by the system at the
mullions and spandrel area.
Bracket support systems will be designed to accommodate structural
tolerances of +/-25mm in any direction.
Curtain wall system includes all necessary flashings, membranes,

SECONDARY
gaskets, insulation, and other accessories necessary to achieve system
COMPONENTS
integrity and specified performance.
System shall be designed to allow for external glass replacement without

affecting adjacent panels.
System shall allow for worst case of the primary structure’s movements,
system movements, system thermal movement and construction
tolerances.
OTHER
REQUIREMENTS Design shall accommodate weather, thermal, acoustics and fire
performance as stipulated within
• Schematic Design report,
• Design requirements from consultants relevant to system design and
• in accordance with local codes and regulations.
GEOMETRY
Vertical section: Straight
Plan section: Straight
FAÇADE ZONE 125 mm mullion + 50mm for glass (Face of Glass to back of mullion) =
174mm

GSV-01A
COMPONENTS
INFILL PANELS
Double glazed insulated units (DGU). Refer to project glass schedule
Table 2: GSV-02A: Sliding Door

GSV-02A
DESCRIPTION Sliding Door
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Aluminium and glass, thermally broken sliding door system. Door’s jamb
shall be robustly weather sealed against the perimeter substrate.
Framing members consist of aluminium extruded-section profiles. The
system is assembled on site.
Stiffeners shall be adopted to reinforce the profile in where required.
SUPPORT STRATEGY
Door systems are bottom supported at the primary structure’s concrete
slab and affixed to the precast wall along vertical and top edges of the
door’s framing.
Glazing shall be retained using internally accessible glazing beads.
Reglazing shall be conducted from internal. Refer to Façade Access
Documentation and Façade Access sub-contractor for glass replacement
strategy.
Interstitial floor movement will be accommodated by the system at the top
of sash profile.
Sliding door system includes all necessary flashings, membranes,

SECONDARY
COMPONENTS
System shall be designed to allow for internal glass replacement without

tolerances.
OTHER
REQUIREMENTS Design shall accommodate weather, thermal, acoustics and fire

GSV-02A
GEOMETRY
Sliding door threshold should be laid flush with the level of the floor
surface on both sides of the door (external flooring to slop outside the
curtain wall).
FAÇADE ZONE 150mm track depth.
COMPONENTS
OPERABLE INFILLS
• Manually operated sliding door incorporated into precast wall.
Door performance requirement is class 4 air permeability and
class 9a water tightness – tested based on BS EN 12207, 12208,
1026, 1027.
• Aluminium and glass thermally broken regular door system to
meet specified performance requirements.
• Security standard of the doors PAS 24
INFILL PANELS
Double glazed insulated units (DGU) Refer to project glass schedule

Table 3: GSV-02B: Sliding Door in Pockets
GSV-02B
DESCRIPTION Sliding Door in Pocket
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Aluminium and glass, thermally broken sliding door system. Door’s jamb
shall be robustly weather sealed against the perimeter substrate.
Framing members consist of aluminium extruded-section profiles. The
system is assembled on site.
The system has two lines of weather defence. Water penetrating the
outer weather seal shall drain to the outside at each floor.
Stiffeners shall be adopted to reinforce the profile in where required.
Sliding door panels should hide behind pocket once open. Pocket
arrangement should allow access for occasional maintenance. Pocket
opening shall be covered when door is closed to avoid any ingress which
could affect regular door operation
SUPPORT STRATEGY
Door systems are bottom supported at the primary structure’s concrete
slab and affixed to the precast wall along vertical and top edges of the
door’s framing.
Glazing shall be retained using internally accessible glazing beads.
Reglazing shall be conducted from internal. Refer to Façade Access
Documentation and Façade Access sub-contractor for glass
replacement strategy.
top of sash profile.
Sliding door system includes all necessary flashings, membranes,
SECONDARY
COMPONENTS
System shall be designed to allow for internal glass replacement

without affecting adjacent panels.
tolerances.
OTHER
Design shall accommodate weather, thermal, acoustics and fire
REQUIREMENTS
• Design requirements from consultants relevant to system design
and
APPENDIX A

GSV-02B
GEOMETRY
Sliding door threshold should be laid flush with the level of the floor
surface on both sides of the door (external flooring to slop outside the
curtain wall).
FAÇADE ZONE 227mm 3 track depth & 150mm 2 track depth.
COMPONENTS
OPERABLE INFILLS
• Manually operated sliding door incorporated into precast wall.
Door performance requirement is class 4 air permeability and
class 9a water tightness – tested based on BS EN 12207, 12208,
1026, 1027.
INFILL PANELS
APPENDIX A

• Table 4: GSV-04A: Bi-fold Sliding Door
GSV-04A
DESCRIPTION Bi-fold sliding door
LOCATION Cluster 4 villa ground floor
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Aluminium and glass, thermally broken stick-built curtain wall system.
Framing members consist of steel built-up sections. The system is
assembled on site.
SUPPORT STRATEGY
Glass infill panels are bottom supported. Out of plane loading restraints of
glazing are provided using concealed toggle cleats around perimeter of
the glass, restraining glass against the gaskets and framing elements at
regular intervals.
Curtain wall mullions span between floor slabs and are fixed to the primary
concrete structure. Curtain wall system is bottom supported and
restrained to resist out of plane wind loads, at both top and bottom..
mullions and spandrel area.
tolerances as stipulated with Tender Documentation.
Curtain wall system includes all necessary flashings, membranes,

SECONDARY
gaskets, insulation and other accessories necessary to achieve system
COMPONENTS
System shall be designed to allow for external glass replacement without

tolerances.
OTHER Design shall accommodate weather, thermal, acoustics and fire
REQUIREMENTS performance as stipulated within
• Schematic Report,
• Design requirements from consultants relevant to system design
and
GEOMETRY
APPENDIX A

GSV-04A
FAÇADE ZONE Profile depth 75mm
OPERABLE INFILLS
• Manually operated swing door incorporated into curtain wall
system. Refer to Section 08 11 16 for door performance.
INFILL PANELS
APPENDIX A

• Table 5: OPV-03A: Render + Cement board rainscreen
OPV-03A
DESCRIPTION Render + Cement board rainscreen
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIBTION
Cement board rainscreen cladding panels will be supported using
exposed screws attached on a horizontal hook rail system supported on
vertical posts to concrete substrate. System shall be top hung. System
shall be designed as a rain screen. Where minor water ingress occurs,
system shall expel any water found in the system to the exterior. System
shall be provided with bimetallic separation where required.
Brackets shall allow for 3-way adjustability to accommodate construction
tolerances.
Cavity between backing concrete wall and cladding shall be thermally
insulated to meet required thermal performance of the envelope.
Where backing material is block wall, Façade Sub Contractor shall provide
steel subframe spanning between floors for support of the cladding panels
or full height panel supported at slab edge. No support fixity from the
block wall is allowed.
At interface with other systems or within system between waterproofing
membrane, lapping of waterproofing membranes shall be minimum
150mm.
System shall allow for worst case of the relative building movements,
system movements, and system thermal movement for the system.
System shall accommodate weather, thermal, acoustics, fire performance
and access strategy as stipulated within design requirements from other
consultants relevant to system design.
Corner connectors, waterproofing membrane, flashings, brackets,

SECONDARY
anchors, and fasteners, reinforcing mesh, cavity barrier (where required
COMPONENTS
by the FLS consultant)
FINISH
FINISH
Fine render, Stucco finish, TerraEvoca
COLOUR (As per the Architect and specification requirements)
ACOUSTIC
Refer to Acoustic report for sound insulation and flanking requirements.
APPENDIX A

OPV-03A
system movements, thermal expansion, and construction tolerances.
OTHER • Schematic Design report,
REQUIREMENTS
System shall be designed to allow for external replacement of the tiles
and tiles removal.
Cavity barriers should be installed at required locations.
GEOMETRY
Vertical section: Straight.
Plan section: Straight.
FAÇADE ZONE From face of precast wall 250mm
APPENDIX A

• Table 6: OPV-04: GRC Mashrabia Screen
OPV-04
DESCRIPTION Glass Reinforced Concrete (GRC) Screen
LOCATION Cluster 3 screen in front of MEP louvers
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Glass Fibre Reinforced concrete (GRC) screen panels, incorporating lighting
features.
GENERAL The system is uninsulated, depending on the location.
Concrete panel thickness: Min. 25mm, local reinforcement 75-100mm
Joints: Open for ventilation.
SUPPORT STRATEGY
Panels are hooked on to steel framing by embedded fixing.
SECONDARY
Brackets, fasteners.
COMPONENTS
FINISH
FINISH (As per the Architect and specification requirements)

COLOUR
(As per the Architect and specification requirements)
System shall allow for the worst case of the primary structure’s movements,
Design shall accommodate weather, thermal, acoustics and fire performance
OTHER as stipulated within
REQUIREMENTS

GEOMETRY
FAÇADE ZONE Minimum 250mm From Face Of MEP louvers.
APPENDIX A

• Table 7: OPV-05: Polycarbonate Panels
OPV-05
DESCRIPTION Opaque Polycarbonate
LOCATION Cluster 4 Villa exterior walls / Column
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Artistic polycarbonate produced with chemical treatment of resin and
polycarbonate to achieve artistic organic look with 125mm thickness to be
fixed on secondary steel members or backets. And 50mm x 50mm slate
brise soleil movable panels.
Chemical composition of build-up shall be suitable for external environment,
high surface temperature (Around 80oC) and product should be warrantied
for external project condition as per façade quality requirement.
Artistic polycarbonate shall be warrantied for external environment and shall
GENERAL
not acquire yellowness after exposure to UV and high surface temperature.
System shall allow for worst case of the relative building movements, system
movements, and system thermal movement for the system.
SUPPORT STRATEGY
Artistic polycarbonate panel will be produced with embedded threaded studs
which will be fixed with hooks. This hook shall be further fixed on secondary
steel members/brackets allowing adjustment and thermal expansion.
Brise Soleil panels with top fixed rollers shall be sliding on top rail with the
guider at ground level.
SECONDARY
Corner connectors, flashings, brackets, anchors, and fasteners.
COMPONENTS
FINISH
Rough - As per the Architect and specification requirements
Typical Panel size: 3m height x width (as per architect)
FINISH
Thickness: 125mm / 50x50mm
Joints: Open for ventilation
APPENDIX A

OPV-05
Artistic polycarbonate shall comply with SBC 201, SBC 801, EN 13501 and
ASTM D1929
Artistic polycarbonate shall comply with FLS requirement. Minimum fire
class to be A as per ASTM E84 and assembly shall be tested as per NFPA
285 if installation is above 12m from grade.
Self-ignition temperature of polycarbonate material shall be more than
3430C when tested as per ASTM D1929.
Yellowness Index shall be less than 1 when tested as per ASTM D 1925.
Abrasion resistance shall be less than 0.5% when tested as per ASTM
OTHER D1044
REQUIREMENTS System shall allow for worst case of the primary structure’s movements,
System shall be designed to allow for external replacement of the stone and
stone removal. Cavity barriers should be installed at required locations.

GEOMETRY
FAÇADE ZONE 350mm from face of backing wall
APPENDIX A

• Table 8: CNV-02A: Render + Cement Board Canopy
CNV-02A
DESCRIPTION Render + Cement Board Canopy
GENERAL
System Description
Render finish cement board panels fixed horizontally to the steel truss
frame
Frame is to be mechanically fastened or welded. Construction with welds
dressed smooth and flush.
Profile size: 50mm x 50 mm Truss
Spacing according to architectural drawings.
Finish according to architectural documentations.
Support strategy
Cement board panels are connected to steel truss on the perimeter of the
panel with L-shape aluminium cleats. Steel truss frame will be fixed to the
structural concrete on its end.
Prior to panel fabrication, field verify required dimensions.

After installation, touch-up damaged finish with paint supplied by
manufacturer and matching original coating.
All fasteners shall be concealed/countersunk and painted with matching
finish.
System shall be provided with bimetallic separation where required.

Brackets shall allow for 3-way adjustability to accommodate construction
tolerances.
system movements, and thermal movements, together with all
construction and fabrication tolerances.
SECONDARY
Shims, fasteners, flashings
COMPONENTS
FINISH
FINISH Fine render, Stucco finish, TerraEvoca

COLOUR
(As per the Architect and specification requirements)
ACOUSTIC
Refer to Acoustic report for sound insulation and flanking requirements.
APPENDIX A

CNV-02A
• System shall allow for worst case of the primary structure’s

movements, system movements, thermal expansion, and construction
tolerances.
OTHER • Design shall accommodate fire performance as stipulated within
REQUIREMENTS
GEOMETRY
Vertical section: straight
Plan section: Faceted in plan.
FAÇADE ZONE Maximum cantilever distance 3.7m
APPENDIX A

• Table 9: CNV-03A: Artistic Polycarbonate Canopy
CNV-03A
DESCRIPTION Artistic Polycarbonate Screen
LOCATION Cluster 4 roof
GENERAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Artistic polycarbonate produced with chemical treatment of resin and
polycarbonate to achieve artistic organic look with 50 to 60mm thickness
to be fixed on secondary steel railing above skylight.
Chemical composition of build-up shall be suitable for external
environment, high surface temperature (Around 80oC) and product should
be warrantied for external project condition as per façade quality
requirement.
Artistic polycarbonate shall be warrantied for external environment and
shall not acquire yellowness after exposure to UV and high surface
temperature.
system movements, and system thermal movement for the system.
SUPPORT STRATEGY
Artistic polycarbonate panel will be produced with embedded threaded
studs which will be fixed with hooks. This hook shall be further fixed on
secondary steel members allowing adjustment and thermal expansion.
SECONDARY
Corner connectors, flashings, brackets, anchors, and fasteners.
COMPONENTS
FINISH
Rough - As per the Architect and specification requirements
FINISH Typical Panel size: 150×200cm

Thickness: 6cm
Joints: Open for ventilation
APPENDIX A

CNV-03A
Artistic polycarbonate shall comply with SBC 201, SBC 801, EN 13501
and ASTM D1929
Artistic polycarbonate shall comply with FLS requirement. Minimum fire
class to be B S1D0 and assembly shall be tested as per NFPA 285 if
installation is above 12m from grade.
Self-ignition temperature of polycarbonate material shall be more than
3430C when tested as per ASTM D1929.
OTHER Yellowness Index shall be less than 1 when tested as per ASTM D 1925.
REQUIREMENTS
Abrasion resistance shall be less than 0.5% when tested as per ASTM
D1044
GEOMETRY • Design requirements from consultants relevant to system design and
Plan section:
System Straight.
shall be designed to allow for external replacement of the stone
and stone removal.
FAÇADE ZONE Cavity
Maximumbarriers shoulddistance
cantilever be installed
2.8mat required locations.
APPENDIX A

APPENDIX B – GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This section documents the overall quality requirements for façade systems.
B. Performance requirements are based on minimum performance required. Sustainability
consultant and MEP consultant shall be consulted, and the most onerous requirements
shall be adopted.
C. Suggested glass thicknesses and make-ups in the provided schedule are indicative
minimum. The Façade Sub-Contractor shall verify actual thicknesses and build-ups
required based on wind pressure, internal pressures, imposed loads, seismic loads,
impact, acoustic performance, thermal loads and effects of pillowing due to climatic
variance. Final glass thicknesses shall also take into consideration non-structural factor
such as acoustic requirement and safety requirements based on stipulated codes,
where laminated glass may be required. Refer to acoustic report for more information
on the glass build-ups and their assignation to different areas in the elevations. Worst
case requirements shall be adopted.
D. Laminated glass shall be heat strengthened.
E. FT glass to be Heat Soak Tested to EN 14179
F. PVB can be substituted by SGP interlayer.
G. Fully tempered glass may be substituted with laminated heat-strengthened glass.
H. Application of safety glass shall be compliant with local codes.
I. Glass canopy shall be designed and graded to minimize deflection due to self-weight to
prevent any dust and water stagnation. Maximum external lite deflection due to self-
weight to be 5mm.
J. Where the use of insulated glass with varying thickness placed against each other is
permitted, subject to.
1. The stepped configuration resulting from varying glass thicknesses shall not be
visible from the external face.
2. Visual acceptance of the glass of different thicknesses by the Architect.
K. Safety glass shall be applied to the internal life of the double-glazed unit used in low sill
application, unless at ground or landing applications.
APPENDIX B - GLAZING

1. PROJECT GLASS SCHEDULE
Vision Glazing
Build-up Performance requirements
Transmission
Outer Pane
Inner Pane
reflectance
reflectance
U –Value
External
Glass
Internal
W/m2K
SHGC
Cavity
Location Visual
Light
Type
Neutral
colour
6HS+1.52 8mm FT ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ >
GLV-01 Ground Black 16mm
PVB+6HS Clear 0.25 1.3 15% 21% 40%
spacers
Neutral
colour 8mm FT
6HS+1.52 16mm ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ >
Ceramic
GLV-02 Ground Black PVB +
Fritted / 0.25 1.3 15% 21% TBC
spacers 6HS
Frosted
General Note:
- The requirements listed in the table above define the minimum/maximum performance
requirements (as identified in the table).
- The glass build-up is indicative minimum, and the façade contractor must verify the actual
thicknesses and build-up required, based on wind pressure, internal pressures, imposed loads,
seismic loads, safety/impact and thermal loads, and any other conditions as listed in the Facade
Technical Specification, as well as applicable codes and standards. Final glass thicknesses shall
also take into consideration non-structural factor such as acoustic requirement and safety
requirements based on stipulated codes, where laminated glass may be required. Refer to acoustic
report for acoustic glass build-ups requirements and their assignation to different areas in the
elevations. Worst case requirements shall be adopted.
- All Fully Toughened (FT) glass to be Heat Soak Tested according to EN 14179
- Use of safety glass shall comply with local Saudi Building Code.
- Outer pane shall be thicker than the inner pane.
- Refer to architectural package for the location of ceramic frit / frosted glass.
Example of the coating compliant with the requirements: SN 50T by Guardian.
End of Specification
APPENDIX B - GLAZING

APPENDIX C – BUILDING MOVEMENT AND CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
1.1 BUILDING MOVEMENT
Deflection limits given in this section are in accordance with information provided by structural
engineer. Façade Sub Contractor shall coordinate and verify these values with Main Contractor
at the inception of construction phase. Systems shall be designed considering min.15mm
vertical movement.
1.2 CONCRETE TOLERANCES
Concrete tolerances given in this section are in accordance with information provided by
structural engineer. Contractor shall coordinate tolerance values with structural contractor once
on board.
A. Vertical out of tolerance (Top of slab and Soffit) +/- 20 mm
B. Vertical edge in/out (on plan): +/- 20 mm
C. Curved Surfaces edge in/out (on plan): +/- 25 mm
END OF SECTION
APPENDIX C – BUILDING MOVEMENT AND CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

13 214001 4800000492 CH2 Fac SPC 040001 - 02

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

13 214001 4800000492 CH2 Fac SPC 040001 - 02

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

13 214001 4800000492 CH2 Fac SPC 040001 - 02

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Document Submittal Form

Contractor authorized signatory

Exception as noted revise

COM-FRM-000019 Rev 0 Page 1 of 1

©NEOM [2023]. All rights reserved.

Revision code Description of changes Purpose of issue Date

Stage 3D Tendering & IFC Issued for 31.01.2023

Rev 02 Stage 3D Tendering & IFC Issued for

Prepared by Reviewed by Approved by

Job Title Façade Engineer Façade Associate Façade Associate

SECTION 01 30 50 – FAÇADE ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS

DOCUMENT CODE: 13-214001-4800000492-CH2-FAC-SPC-040001 REVISION CODE: 02 PAGE 2 OF 18

©NEOM [2023]. All rights reserved

1. 01 30 50 FAÇADE ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENT

SECTION 01 30 50 – FAÇADE ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS

DOCUMENT CODE: 13-214001-4800000492-CH2-FAC-SPC-040001 REVISION CODE: 02 PAGE 3 OF 18

©NEOM [2023]. All rights reserved

FAÇADE ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 30 50 – FAÇADE ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS

DOCUMENT CODE: 13-214001-4800000492-CH2-FAC-SPC-040001 REVISION CODE: 02 PAGE 4 OF 18

©NEOM [2023]. All rights reserved

2. Submittals for review and information.

3. Submittals for project closeout.

1.2 RELEVANT DOCUMENTATIONS

A. Architectural Tender Drawings and Specifications.

DOCUMENT CODE: 13-214001-4800000492-CH2-FAC-SPC-040001 REVISION CODE: 02 PAGE 5 OF 18

©NEOM [2023]. All rights reserved

A. KSA: Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.

A. Main Contractor: Contractor appointed by client to conduct the construction works.

SECTION 01 30 50 – FAÇADE ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS

DOCUMENT CODE: 13-214001-4800000492-CH2-FAC-SPC-040001 REVISION CODE: 02 PAGE 6 OF 18

©NEOM [2023]. All rights reserved

SECTION 01 30 50 – FAÇADE ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS

DOCUMENT CODE: 13-214001-4800000492-CH2-FAC-SPC-040001 REVISION CODE: 02 PAGE 7 OF 18

©NEOM [2023]. All rights reserved

2.1 ACCEPTED MANUFACTURERs

2.2 MANDATORY MATERIALS

3.1 KICK OFF MEETING

1. Client or Client's representative.

2. Architect and Architect’s Representative.

5. Relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and/or Façade Specialist Sub-contractor.

1. Introduction to project team.

2. Share project team contact details.

4. Alignment in document referencing.

7. Alignment of review Status.

9. Establish requirements of mock-ups, sample submittals, and benchmarks.

10. Any other items.

DOCUMENT CODE: 13-214001-4800000492-CH2-FAC-SPC-040001 REVISION CODE: 02 PAGE 8 OF 18

©NEOM [2023]. All rights reserved

1. Client or Client's representative.

2. Architect and Architect’s Representative.

6. Relevant Façade Sub-Contractor and/or Façade Specialist Sub-contractor.

2. All meeting participants shall receive coordination drawings, to be presented and

4. Additional meetings to be arranged as required to ensure project progress is

SECTION 01 30 50 – FAÇADE ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS

DOCUMENT CODE: 13-214001-4800000492-CH2-FAC-SPC-040001 REVISION CODE: 02 PAGE 9 OF 18

©NEOM [2023]. All rights reserved

The facade contractor is required to provide a detailed list of any non-compliances

2. Façade System concept drawings: